JP7060314B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a spinning machine (also referred to as a “pachislot machine” or a “slot machine”) or a ball-type gaming machine (also referred to as a “pachinko gaming machine” or a “pachinko machine”). ..

In a general conventional spinning machine (gaming machine), a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and a symbol display area in which a part of the plurality of symbols attached to each reel is displayed. Is provided. In such a game machine, a game is played by multiplying a predetermined number of game values (for example, medals), and as a specific game progress, a winning combination is internally drawn for each game, and based on the winning combination. The reels are controlled, and benefits can be given as a result of the game.

Then, in the conventional gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of executing a lottery regarding the transition to an advantageous gaming state when a specific condition such as a specific symbol combination being stopped on the reel is satisfied has been proposed (for example, Patent Document). 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-006487

As described above, various expectations have been proposed for conventional gaming machines, and various measures have been taken to improve the enjoyment of gaming, but there is still room for improvement.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned problems, it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of gaming by providing a gaming machine capable of producing a novel expectation degree.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention is a gaming machine capable of repeatedly executing a game in which a lottery related to a winning combination is executed and a game result displaying a game result based on the result of the lottery is repeatedly executed, and a plurality of symbols are attached to each. A plurality of rotatable reels, a plurality of stop operation means capable of accepting a stop operation for stopping each of the plurality of rotating reels, and an effect execution means for executing an effect as the game progresses. When a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operation means and the plurality of reels are stopped, and as a result, a specific symbol combination is indicated by the symbols attached to the stopped reels, a privilege is given to the player. The privilege-giving means for granting the game medium, the normal gaming state, the high-advantageous gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal gaming state, and the high-advantageous gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal gaming state but having a higher degree of advantage than the high-advantageous gaming state. The privilege when the game state control means for controlling at least one of the low advantageous gaming states is provided and the game state control means controls the low advantageous gaming state. It is possible to perform another privilege granting lottery as to whether or not to grant another privilege advantageous to another player, and when the game state control means is controlled to the low advantageous gaming state, the above-mentioned difference When the result of granting the other privilege is obtained a predetermined number of times by the privilege granting lottery, the game is controlled to the high advantageous gaming state after the low advantageous gaming state ends, and the special privilege granting lottery results in the control. It is possible to execute an effect according to the number of times that the result of granting the different privilege is obtained, and it is made visible that the result of granting the different privilege is obtained by the special privilege grant lottery, and the game state control is performed. In a game in which the special privilege granting lottery is performed when the game is controlled to the low advantageous gaming state by means, the degree of expectation that the result of granting the different privilege is obtained differs depending on the result of the lottery regarding the winning combination, and the above-mentioned normal When the special condition is satisfied in the gaming state, the preferential lottery means for performing a lottery regarding the degree to which the result of granting the other privilege is obtained in the special privilege granting lottery performed in the low advantageous gaming state, and the preferential lottery means. With respect to the information on the result of the lottery by the preferential lottery means that can hold the information of the result of the lottery by the game state control means, the result of the lottery when the low advantageous gaming state is completed by the game state control means. In particular to allow that information is not retained It is a pachinko machine as a sign.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by providing a game machine that executes a novel expectation degree effect.

It is an exploded perspective view of a slot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door type front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a vertical sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door type front member. It is an enlarged view of Z1 part of FIG. It is a Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. 4 which shows the state which moved the connector holder. It is sectional drawing of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door type front member. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the main part of FIG. 8A. It is sectional drawing of the main part of the slot machine which shows the back plate side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is a perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A) and (b) are perspective views of the main part of the case member explaining the temporary fixing state of the connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member. It is a front view which omitted the cover body of a wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows the other form. It is sectional drawing of the main part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the main part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a partial perspective view of the symbol variation display device which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the relationship between a case member and a stopper on the outer body side. It is sectional drawing of the main part which shows the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of a symbol variation display device. It is a vertical sectional view of the upper part of a slot machine. It is a perspective view which shows the lower half part of a slot machine omitting a medal discharge device. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is a rear view which looked at the heat dissipation port from the back side of a slot machine. It is a partial cross-sectional part front view of the slot machine which shows the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a cross-sectional view of a main part of a side plate of an outer body and a power supply device showing another form. It is the schematic sectional drawing of the lighting apparatus which shows the other form. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which shows the transparent plate and a light emitting unit by disassembling. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which shows by disassembling the transparent plate. It is sectional drawing corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door type front member which attached the transparent plate. It is a disassembly / assembly perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain of the hinge metal fittings. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part which shows the door type front member. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part which shows the door type front member in the process of opening. It is a perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door type front member. It is sectional drawing which cut the connector in the vertical direction. It is a cross-sectional plan view of a main part of a door type front member which shows the example of other hinge metal fittings. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part which shows the middle of opening of the door type front member of FIG. 42. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and a frame member in a model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door type front member with the connector connected. It is a development view which developed the symbol string of a reel band in a plane. It is an enlarged view of the symbol display window 401 part. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, etc. equipped in a slot machine. This is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination. It is a figure which shows each winning combination and the condition device which is established corresponding to each winning combination. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device, the number of medals paid out, and the like. It is a figure (No. 2) which shows the combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. It is a figure (3) which shows the combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device, the number of medals paid out, and the like. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of one basic game in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the game state transition control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the rough processing procedure of the instruction function processing executed by the main board. Of the instruction function processes shown in FIG. 57, it is a flowchart (No. 1) showing a detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation process. Of the instruction function processes shown in FIG. 57, it is a flowchart (No. 2) showing a detailed processing procedure of the instruction function generation process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the instruction function processing executed by the peripheral board. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the winning / failing lottery with the number of initial games added. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the game number lottery with the initial game number addition. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for AT first hit lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is a figure (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for a precursor lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. It is a figure (2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. It is a figure (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. It is a figure (4) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. It is a figure (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the special state transition lottery. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. It is a figure (3) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the continuous production generation lottery. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the continuous production generation lottery. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the lottery table used for the continuous production content lottery. It is a figure (2) for explaining the lottery table used for the continuous production content lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the bonus game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the bonus game end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of AT game determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition example of the AT lottery game state in each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the whole processing procedure in a chance continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure example of the continuous production lottery processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a continuous winning / failing lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a base level lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of an initial stage lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the waiting game number lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure example of the rank up processing. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a rank-up lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the continuous production game number distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure example of the continuous production transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure example of the processing at the end of a continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the production content example of a chance continuous production. It is a figure for demonstrating the configuration example of a stage icon. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating an example of a screen transition in a chance continuous production. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating an example of a screen transition in a chance continuous production. It is a figure (3) for demonstrating an example of a screen transition in a chance continuous production. It is a figure (the 4) for demonstrating an example of a screen transition in a chance continuous production. It is a front view (the 1) of the main part in the slot machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a front view (the 2) of the main part in the slot machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart for explaining the processing procedure performed by the main board regarding the jewel production. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the lottery table used in a treasure challenge. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the screen display example of a jewel effect. It is a figure (2) which shows the screen display example of a jewel effect. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the screen display example of the trial ball effect. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the screen display example of the trial ball effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the acquisition lottery of a trial ball. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery in a trial ball challenge. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the double navigation effect. It is a figure which shows the screen display example of the information addition effect. It is a development view which developed another example of the symbol string of a reel band in a plane. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination corresponding to a condition device, the number of medals paid out, and the like. It is a figure which shows an example of the conditional apparatus which is established corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the effect display of a performance change instruction effect. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the effect display of a performance change instruction effect. It is a figure (3) for explaining the effect display of a performance change instruction effect. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the display period of a finger effect and addition. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating another example of the effect display of a performance change instruction effect. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating another example of the effect display of a performance change instruction effect. In another example of the performance change instruction effect, it is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the display period of the instruction effect and the addition. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect display of a catching effect. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating an example of the stop type of a symbol which becomes effective when the left and right reels are visually recognizable. It is a figure (2) for demonstrating an example of the stop type of a symbol which becomes effective when the left and right reels are visually recognizable. It is a figure (3) for demonstrating an example of the stop type of a symbol which becomes effective when the left and right reels are visually recognizable. It is a figure (4) for demonstrating an example of the stop type of a symbol which becomes effective when the left and right reels are visually recognizable.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings, using a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is an omitted door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. 7 is a door-shaped front member. A cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing the omitted state, FIG. 8 (a) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8 (b) is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 12 shows the case member from behind. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are perspective views of the main parts of the case member for explaining the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, and FIG. 15 is a wiring relay member. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, FIG. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for fixing the case member, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another form. 21 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a guide structure of a case member, FIG. 22 is a partial perspective view of a symbol variation display device showing another form of a handle, and FIG. 23 shows a relationship between the case member and a stopper on the outer body side. A perspective view of the main part shown, FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the main part showing the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display device, FIG. 25 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, and FIG. A perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine, FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26, FIG. 28 is a rear view of the heat dissipation port seen from the back side of the slot machine, and FIG. 29 is a part of the slot machine showing a power supply device. A front view of a cross-sectional portion, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing a state in which the power supply device is looked up from below, FIG. 31 shows another form, a side plate of the outer main body and a cross-sectional view of a main part of the power supply device, and FIG. 32 is another form. FIG. 33 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the lighting device showing the above, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate and the light emitting unit, and FIG. 33A-A is a cross-sectional view of a door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate, FIG. 36 is an exploded / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting, FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge metal fittings, and FIG. 38 is a door-shaped front surface. A cross-sectional plan view of a main part showing a member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member. 41 cuts the connector in the vertical direction 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view showing an example of another hinge metal fitting, FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. 42, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened with the connector connected.

[1. First Embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer body 100 having an open front surface and a rotation shaft 100a laterally opened on the front surface of the outer body 100. It has a door-shaped front member 200 rotatably attached like a door, a symbol variation display device 300 that fluctuates a plurality of symbols by a driving means, and an opening 401 that is removable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface. It has a case member 400 and an image display body 500 for displaying an arbitrary image.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer main body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 is installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102 to form a vertically long "mouth" in front view. It has a character-shaped frame shape, and the back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame to form a box shape that opens only the front surface. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the leading edge is slightly tilted in a backward tilted state, and therefore the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward tilted state. Further, on the top plate 103, a plurality (in the embodiment) of the top plate 103 in a region facing the upper rail 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the game machine installation island in a state of being installed on the game machine installation island (not shown). 4) through holes 132, 132 ... Are bored.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
A shelf plate-shaped partition plate 105 is provided in the outer main body 100 at substantially the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a stepped portion 106 in the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. A vertical mounting piece 107 formed at both ends is attached to an outer main body 100. The vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and attached. A tubular protrusion (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring processing (metal processing that raises a short tubular protrusion while expanding the hole diameter of the prepared hole with a punch). The tubular protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 for positioning. Further, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal discharge device 110 for discharging medals, which are game media, to a medal tray 201 at the lower front portion of the door-shaped front member 200, and a medal discharge device 110 An auxiliary storage box 111 for medals for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal discharge device]
The medal discharge device 110 has a medal storage hopper 110b attached to a device main body 110a having a built-in drive means, and a medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a, and the medal discharge port 110c is provided in the hopper 110b. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow gutter 110d for discharging the overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned auxiliary storage box 111 for medals faces below the tip of the overflow gutter 110d. As the medal ejection mechanism of the medal ejection device 110, any currently known medal ejection mechanism may be adopted, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion where the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the side plate 102 on the left side when facing the front, and the three members of the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. There is. The power supply device 112 is for supplying electricity to an electric component such as the medal discharge device 110 and is a component that easily generates heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 dissipates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. The mouth 104a is open.

The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is made of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it becomes easy to detect unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112. The device case 112a has an upper surface plate 112b covering the upper surface, a rear surface plate 112c facing the back plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front plate 112d covering the opposite side of the rear surface plate 112c, and inside the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered manner, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is formed under the guard portion 102b. It is designed to let one side slip in. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is grooved. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly projected toward the side plate 102, and the tip thereof is the guard portion 102b. It is designed to fit into the groove.

In this way, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that abuts on the side plate 102 is made into an open structure without a cover so as to be closed by the side plate 102 during use, the inside of the device case 112a is entered. It is easy to incorporate the substrate 112s or the like using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to cover the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is assembled in the device case 112a.

A large number of ventilation holes 112g, 112g ... Are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the slope plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a so that heat is not trapped inside. .. The device case 112a is lifted on a stilt by the legs 112h, 112h ... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-layer relatively cold air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g ... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer body 100, cold air on the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If an inverted L-shaped step portion 112j (see FIG. 30) that raises the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear surface plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg portion 112h and the heat dissipation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height of the air vent space 112i, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. It is fixed to the outer main body 100 by a combination of 112 m and a heat radiation port 104a provided on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

That is, the contour of the heat radiation port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation port 104a. Further, the protrusion 112m projecting from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is located at a position inscribed in the heat radiation port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat radiation port 104a in order to resist the floating operation of the power supply device 112. It is composed of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical projecting piece 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiation port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, simply by pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat radiation port 104a, the rear surface (back side) of the device case 112a is upwardly (lifted) and FIG. 26. In, the fixing to the right (rollover) is completed. Of course, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 in the left direction in FIG. 26, the power supply device 112 is connected to the heat dissipation port 104a. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely regulated except in the direction of pulling toward the front by a simple operation of fitting the protrusion 112m.

On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and the wood screws 112q are passed through at least one of the through holes 112p and fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted even in the direction of pulling toward the front, so that the power supply device 112 can be securely fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving electricity from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a so that the power cord can be pulled out from the bulging portion. Since the slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing and the power cord must be put out outside the outer main body 100 in preparation for such a case, it is necessary to put out the power cord when moving on the manufacturing line or between lines. There is a risk that the power cord will rub against the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 when the machine is moved.

On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side to the upper side, and pulls out the power cord from the cord outlet 104b. As a result, a sufficient height can be secured to hang the bundled power cord in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the power supply device 112 is installed by simply setting the power supply device 112 in the inner corner portion of the outer body 100 and screwing in one wood screw 112q. Significant labor saving in installation work is possible. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, so that it is easy to see and can be securely fixed, especially when the fixing portion is brought to the front (front) of the power supply device 112. .. Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw the power supply device 112 to a plurality of surfaces or members, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 are difficult to see and may be forgotten.

Further, since the heat radiation port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiation port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, almost no extra process or cost is generated. On the contrary, the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing, so that the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the protrusion 112m for mounting can also be integrally molded, so that there is almost no cost. Therefore, the total cost required to install the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the legs 112h and the step 112j of the device case 112a, which are useful as measures against heat generation of the power supply device 112, can be implemented at almost no cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in the space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and the wiring relay member 113 which is the core of the wiring means described later is on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. It is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a vent 133 for heat dissipation is formed above the wiring relay member 113 on the back plate 104.

[3. Door type front member]
FIG. 3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 below the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided substantially in the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 has an insertion port 203 for inserting medals, and a single insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal from the medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409 described later. Similarly, the MAX input button 206 for instructing the maximum number of medals (for example, 3) that can be used in one game, and the medal return for returning the medals packed in the medal selector 207, which will be described later, to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (release command by settlement) of medals stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300. And three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c and the like for stopping each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is an example, and is not limited thereto.

Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, a medal gutter 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207, and a return gutter 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a known one that switches the flow path by turning on / off a built-in solenoid (not shown), and the flow path is set to the medal gutter 212 side in the gaming state waiting for the player to insert a medal. In addition, the flow path is set to the return gutter 213 side in a gaming state in which the insertion of medals is refused, such as the insertion of medals exceeding the specified number. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in the closed position so as to cover the front surface of the outer body 100, the medal gutter 212 has its tip facing into the hopper 110b of the medal discharging device 110, and the medal selector 207 is provided from the insertion slot 203. The medals that flow through the medal gutter 212 arrive at the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return gutter 213 is connected to the medal tray 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing from the slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 has a size that covers the entire front surface of the outer body 100, and the upper half thereof is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34. It is 214. The fluoroscopic window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is obtained by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided into upper and lower areas. If the transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 in this way, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door-shaped front member-transparent window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a methacrylic resin containing rubber having excellent impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, "Acrylic (registered trademark) IR D30" manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Corporation. ) Is an almost upside-down trapezoid, and the edge member 214b, which bulges toward the front side of the three sides (left and right side and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front. 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding mold. When the edge member 214b is integrally molded on the peripheral edge of the flat plate-shaped transparent plate 214a as described above, the transparent plate 214a is described above because the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. Even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 as described above, bending and distortion are unlikely to occur.

As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid structure, but a shell-like structure having an internal space, and the wall thickness of each part is arbitrary). In the internal space thereof, a light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or a character on the surface are incorporated.

In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is drawn so as to be attached to the door type front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted in the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. 35. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are treated as an integral part.

The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the peripheral edge of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on at least one of the sides.

In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 is a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a, and is a screw passed through the through hole 214c (see the enlarged view of FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. While the fixing member 218 serves as a corner decoration in appearance, the fixing member 218 is provided with holes 200a and 214d (see enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided in the upper corners of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a, respectively. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door type front member 200, and thus serves as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door type front member 200.

Further, in FIGS. 33 to 35, reference numeral 217a is a light emitting body of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b is a reflecting member supporting the light emitting body 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflecting members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of the light of the rod-shaped light emitting body 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitting body 217a can be arranged closer to the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it is as if it were a lighthouse at the tip of a cape. , It is advantageous when radiating light toward the surroundings. Further, the reflective member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

The light emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit occurs, to appeal the occurrence of the big hit to the surroundings. By producing a highly appealing effect to the surroundings in this way, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and since the eyes of many people give the player a sense of superiority, the game becomes even more exciting. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that a big hit has occurred.

The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above configuration, and the plate-shaped bottom of the door-shaped front member 200 has a plate-shaped bottom with respect to the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. It is inserted diagonally from the front surface and fitted into a fitting type, and in that state, the transparent plate 214a is made to stand upright, and all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b are brought into contact with the front surface of the door type front member 200, and further, the door type front member 200 It is fixed by a screw 603 (see FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 shows a cutout of a main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time, and as is clear from FIG. 35, if a player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if the foreign matter is forcibly inserted, there is almost no room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[3-2. Door type front member-locking device]
A lock device 215 for opening and closing using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the door-shaped front member 200 on the free end side.

[4. Design fluctuation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotary display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, 301c and the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, which can be individually rotated by a drive means 303 such as a motor. It is a well-known device that has a device case 302 for playing a game by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

The device case 302 has a modified hexagonal column shape excluding three sides facing the front (player) from the octagonal column lying sideways, and has a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and the right side when viewed in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between top plate 305 and rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. It has a box shape surrounded by a lower swash plate 310 provided between the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and a part of the arcs of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c protrudes from the front surface of the device case 302.

Further, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed into a usable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-used state in which the top plate portion 305 is prone, and a finger can be hooked on the handle 311. It is designed to be carried around.

As described above, the configuration in which the variable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is closely related to the measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, so that the opening 401 of the case member 400 is provided with sufficient strength to cantilever the image display body 500. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the loading and unloading of the device case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made variable and laid down on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can easily pass under the reinforcing bar 402. Therefore, it is possible to provide the opening 401 of the case member 400 with the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 only when the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with the variable handle 311 as described above. Become. By the way, in the conventional device case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

The handle 311 of the embodiment has a structure that swings and changes between a standing state and a prone unused state, but a structure that can change the handle 311 between a used state and a non-used state is implemented. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314 and 314 are cut up on the top plate portion 305, and the belt loops 314 and 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather and have retaining portions 315 and 315 at both ends. A belt-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted, and the structure is such that the center is pulled up from the unused state shown in FIG. 22 to change the use state so that the finger can be hooked. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to an unused state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is provided so as to project from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed or pushed by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling it, it is easy to put it in and out of the case member 400.

[5. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and has a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. It is a box shape consisting of a rear surface plate 405 erected on the trailing edge, a top plate 406 covering the rear surface plate 405 and the upper surfaces of the side plates 404 and 404, and having an opening 401 on the front surface.

In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear surface plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the inner surfaces of the side plates 404, 404 and the opening 401 of the top plate 406 are reinforced with metal. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 is hung between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 as a boundary is the installation area of the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area of the image display body 500. The area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is allocated as the wiring work space 408, and the main board 409, which is the main control board, is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear surface plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. A control board or the like other than the main board 409 (for example, an effect control board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

As shown in FIG. 1, a skylight portion 443 and 443 is formed on the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two parts with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406, and each of them is an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132, etc. of the outer main body 100. It is located in the region including the intersection, and is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132 ... However, the front peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found by fumbling with reference to the peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443, so that the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator cannot look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight portion 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight and further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation and replacement.

As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 5, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410 and 410 are projected on the outer surface of the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 are used as the back plate of the outer body 100. It is positioned by fitting it into the boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near the wiring window 411 described later, while the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer main body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. This makes it possible to accurately position the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the stepped portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 that expands toward the rear is provided at the end of the concave step portion 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side, and the stepped portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400 are guided by the tapered portion 413. Fitting with the concave step portion 412 can be smoothly performed. In this way, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the stepped portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid or integrally press-molded on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 so that the wheel 414 can be rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. May be good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a convex rail member 116 is laid or integrally press-molded on the partition plate 105, while flanges 415 and 415 are formed at both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400. The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the collars 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

Further, the case member 400 is stopped by the swing lever type stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state of being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end portion of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operating posture that engages with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operating posture that does not engage with the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 18 are manually switched in the forward direction on the partition plate 105 of the case member 400. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is shaped like a key as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 axially attached to the mounting tool 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the top plate 406. The operating posture and the non-operating posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 with the case member 400 pushed into a predetermined position.

Further, the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400 is provided with a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed in the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 4, 5, and 24, and is below the main board 409. (Or you can think of it as a horizontally long triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and a horizontally long empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309. It functions as an opening for connecting the plates 104.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter, also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a position substantially intermediate to the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419, which are wiring passages that pass through to the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400, are formed on both sides of the wiring window 411 on the outside of the rear surface plate 405.

If the arrangement of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 is the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. 24. , 301b, 301c The lower limit is the range between the horizontal plane HL passing through the center of rotation and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within that range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of displaying an image composed of at least a liquid crystal display (may be a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes to the front. The image display body 500 has a hinge metal fitting 420 attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the mounting position), and is rotated by the hinge metal fitting 420. It is supported freely.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, an effect control board 510 is assembled on the back surface side of the image display body 500. Therefore, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the staging control board 510 can be integrally configured, which makes it easy to handle, and the wiring connecting the two can be omitted, so that the wiring in the case member 400 can be omitted. The complexity of the work space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the staging control board 510 appears so as to pop out from the inside of the case member 400, so that the workability of the staging control board 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image display-hinge metal fittings]
FIG. 36 is an exploded / assembled perspective view of the hinge metal fitting 420. Since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a vertically symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge metal fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line region 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It is composed of a short link 420c and a long link 420d connecting the members 420a.

The fixing member 420a of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a sideways fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P1 on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e, and a short link is attached to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of the 420c is rotatably attached to the shaft with the pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge metal fitting 420 has a lateral bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d is a pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. One end of the short link 420c is rotatably attached to the shaft by the pin P4.

In this way, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 form a four-node rotary chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37, and the shortest link in the chain is particularly short. A so-called double lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is used as a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), the double lever mechanism approximates the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to a rotation trajectory centered on the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge metal fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door type front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door type front member 200 and the rotation outside of the image display body 500 The distance to the veranda is made to be substantially constant.

In the long link 420d and the short link 420c, the polymerization regions 420g and 420h are set so that the image display body 500 is vertically rotated (opened) by about 90 degrees and overlaps with each other (for example, the polymerization of the long link 420d). The region 420 g is bulged into a triangle so as to overlap the polymerization region 420h of the short link 420c), and pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the polymerization regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c by aligning them coaxially and inserting a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown), thereby locking both lever mechanisms and displaying an image. This is for fixing the 500 in an open position.

[6-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, among the vertical reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400, the reinforcing member 407 (on the right side when facing the right side in FIG. 11) on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 is locked. The piece 421 is axially attached, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip thereof engages with the receiving portion 508 protruding from the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the opposite direction from the locked state, the image display body 500 is unlocked and becomes rotatable around the hinge metal fitting 420. Normally, in the state before the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image display body 500 is locked to the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[6-3. Image display-connector]
By the way, since the case member 400 is provided with an image display body 500 that can be opened and closed separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the work is performed inside the case member 400. First, the door-shaped front member 200 on the front side must be opened, and then the image display body 500 on the back side must be opened, which may reduce workability or cause annoyance. ..

Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door type front member 200, and the door type front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. It is connected by 700, and the image display body 500 is opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door type front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 also rotates in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one lateral opening operation.

Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 of the embodiment have the rotation locus of the image display body 500 as the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the double lever mechanism of the hinge metal fitting 420. Although it is designed to approximate the rotation locus centered on, there is still a relative deviation between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the connector 700 of the embodiment forms the fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500 and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is housed in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by the stop shaft 703. be. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it were an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200, and both of them occur at that time. The rod 702 of the connector 700 moves in and out of the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative deviation of the movement.

The maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 most protrudes from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when the image display body 500 is opened by 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (the position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. Therefore, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and it becomes possible to suppress the increase in size of the connecting tool.

Further, the stop shaft 703 is vertically movablely attached to the support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215, and is always urged downward by the spring 703a. Has been done. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved upward against the urging of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached / detached by moving the stop shaft 703 upward to raise the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed in the tip portion of the rod 702 and can be held by the urging force of the spring 703a.

Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 is an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. It is intended to be housed and held inside, and engages with the hooking wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. A picking piece 706 is projected from the side surface of the rod 702 in a direction orthogonal to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the picking piece 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It has become like. Further, a retaining piece 701a is hung from the bottom surface on the tip end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining piece 701a comes into contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 is most projected, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 near the connector 700 is an engaging portion projecting from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotation outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with a reinforcing bar 402 that crosses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide portion 402a that inclines downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is made of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity, which is different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached (replaceable) to the image display body 500. There is.

By the way, the relative deviation of the movement caused by the difference in the rotation locus between the door type front member 200 and the image display body 500 is made into a flexible wire in addition to the stretchable rod type connector 700 as described above. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connector is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while the door-shaped front member 200 is open at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, which impairs smoothness. There is a risk. On the other hand, for example, the image display body 500 may be provided with an urging means such as a winding spring so that the image display body 500 is always urged in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 closes by itself while pulling the connector by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide with each other. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge metal fitting 420, which is one element for carrying around in the above, is not limited to the structure of the double lever mechanism as described above, and is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. It may be a simple one that rotates the image display body 500.

A locking means for locking the image display body 500 to the closed position as described above so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door by forming the attachment means of the image display body 500 to the case member 400 into a hinge structure. When the above lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, the image display body 500 can block important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the effect control board 510) in the wiring work space 408, which is effective in improving the security performance. be.

A gap 10 is provided between the front and rear of the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is provided with a finger passed through the gap 10. You can grab it. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front central portion (reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443) of the top plate 406 of the case member 400, and the top plate 406 is formed by a finger passed through the handle opening 422. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be appropriately used between the handle opening 422 and the gap 10 according to the handling place and posture. For example, when transporting the case member 400 before incorporating it into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bag form using the handle opening 422, while when the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, it is shown in FIG. As described above, since the handle opening 422 is hidden behind the outer main body 100 and the finger cannot enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by hooking the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 is projected from the center of the front surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer main body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily put in and taken out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 is projected from the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to.

[6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 that surrounds the area below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, the front area of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape is integrally hung. The frame member 501 borders the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is composed of a light emitting source such as an LED, a light emitting control substrate for controlling the light emitting source, and a decorative member arranged in front of the light emitting source and capable of transmitting light. A part is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described below as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44).

[6-4-1. Image display body-frame member-lighting device]
Lighting devices 502 are provided above and below the back side of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is brightly illuminated by the lighting device 502. Since the frame member 501 is vertically suspended under the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the lighting device 502 into such a frame member 501. can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a lower light intensity than the conventional lighting device.

As shown in FIG. 4, the lighting device 502 exemplified as an embodiment is a strip-shaped substrate elongated in a direction orthogonal to the paper surface in the figure (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301a ...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged on the 503, and the lower lighting device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent lid plate 505. The upper lighting device 502 is arranged so as to face upward, while the LED 504 is arranged so as to face downward in a translucent cover 507 having an upward U-shaped cross section, for example, milky white.

The upper lighting device 502 is installed so that the lighting direction is diagonally downward from directly below toward the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is such that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having a relatively strong directivity is directed obliquely with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is tilted diagonally downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

Further, if a rod-shaped light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is adopted as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-shaped or concave reflecting member that encloses the light source, and the direct light is emitted. The center line of the main irradiation region, which is directed by the sum of the reflected light, may be set so as to diagonally hit the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. If the irradiation aim of the lighting device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a as described above, there is almost no effect even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c.

According to the experiment, when the lighting direction of the lighting device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the curved reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and hard to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation region is directed obliquely with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated via the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, 301c It was confirmed that a wide range was bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the illuminating device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted to the see-through window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused as a whole, or the transparent plate 214a is brightly illuminated and the reel 301a, It is presumed that a wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic effect.

The structure of the upper lighting device 502 as described above can be adopted for the lower lighting device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only for the lower lighting device 502 as shown in FIG. 32. In FIG. 32, the upper lighting device 502 of FIG. 4 is arranged on the lower side, and the lower lighting device 502 is arranged on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the lighting device 502 is “lower”. And "bottom" should be read as "top".

By the way, when an LED is adopted as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) it is driven by a low voltage, so that it is safer than a conventional cold cathode fluorescent lamp driven by a high voltage of about 200 V (b). ) It has a longer life than a cold-cathode tube, (c) it is stronger than a cold-cathode tube which is a glass tube, (d) it can emit multiple colors, so the range of production can be expanded, and (e) it is combined with an inverter. It is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used in the above, and therefore has the advantage that the burden on the hinge metal fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, the input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter, simply referred to as “these” are collectively used in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door type front member 200, which are attached to the outer main body 100). (Sometimes referred to as "main body side electrical components") and, for example, the main board 409 or the like in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as "case member side electrical components" as a general term for the case member side electrical components) are electric. Is connected. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100, the model unit 50 can be replaced or the like. At this time, a rational wiring means for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electric component (housing side electric component) and the case member side electric component is provided.

[7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electric component, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two large and small) connector boards housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 (hereinafter, two large and small connectors). It may also be referred to as a "terminal board for connector connection".) It is composed of 122 and 123.

Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120 and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached to the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121 in a non-fixed idle state, and therefore is an enlarged view of FIG. As shown in, it can move up and down, and it can also move left and right. The small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 paired with a connector 427 at the tip of a harness 426 connected to an electric component on the case member side other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are a substrate fixing type that is fixed to a printed circuit board by a fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standard connectors are used.

Further, the cover body 121 that covers the front surface of the mounting plate 120 has two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 projecting side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. It has a tunnel-shaped wiring duct 129 overhanging in front of the portion.

The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 projecting from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. In this state, the wiring is distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by the alternate long and short dash line L in FIG. It is connected to each of the electrical components on the main body side through the opening 109 for wiring provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, if there is an electrical component on the main body side (for example, an external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, the opening 109 for wiring of the partition plate 105 is irrelevant. It will be connected as it is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) Self on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 between the horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the maximum height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a wiring relay member 113 that relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electric component is installed.
(C) A vertical wiring path is formed along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electric component from there through the wiring path.

In the gaming machine provided with the above components (a) to (d), the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 do not pass. Since the wiring path provided along the line (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the main body side wirings 119 go down substantially in the center of the back plate 104 and pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. Can be made larger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force during rotation.

[7-2. Wiring means-connectors 425,427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the end of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connector 427 at the end of the harness 426 connected to the electric component is connected to each.

The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, and a plate-shaped attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 in the center and projecting from both sides of the holder main body 429. It consists of a well-known button-shaped panel fastener 432 (trade name "Nylatch": registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and is a wiring relay member 113 as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8 (a). The attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Therefore, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 which is the fixing means and is fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connection between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 is not disengaged.

[7-2-1. Wiring relay board-connector 425,427-temporary fixing shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. The 427 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf plate-shaped member directed from the inside of the case member 400 toward the wiring window 411 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. A nearly horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 standing at both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435 and 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435 and. There is a space between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435 and 435 and the other upper and lower two pieces so that the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One of the bench side plates 434 has a thin plate structure in which a fingernail portion 436 is extended at the tip thereof, and is supported at one end by placing a finger on the fingernail portion 436 and applying a force in the direction of arrow X in FIG. 8 (b). It can be warped outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily removed from the inward claw pieces 435,435,435 in the warped state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape, and by doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed as if the button was pressed like the arrow Y. It's easy to do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw piece 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by fitting it between the 435s. Of course, even if it is called temporary fixing, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off from the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, until the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the work of transporting the case member 400 or incorporating the case member 400 into the outer body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the ends of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts inside the case member 400, and of course the parts are of course. There is no risk of damaging yourself.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8 (b) → FIG. 8 (a), in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one of the bench side plates 434 is bent outward as described above. If the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its own attachment piece 431 hits the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 become the connectors of the wiring relay member 113. Since it fits into 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in in that state to lock the attachment piece 431 to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for the guide is provided on the bench portion 433, the connector holder 428 only needs to be pushed inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base, and is separated from the case member and does not come into contact with the outer main body. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(A) A box-shaped outer body with an open front and a back plate covering the back, with a power supply and other electrical components on the main body side.
(B) A model unit provided with a symbol variation display device and other case member-side electrical components that vary a plurality of symbols on a case member that can be attached to and detached from the outer body.
(C) A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the wiring on the main body side connected to the electric component on the main body side and the wiring on the case side connected to the electric component on the case member side.
(D) A connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring and
(E) The connector holder attached to the connector and
(F) Temporarily fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder, and
(G) It has a fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) the connector holder is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing member in a state before the model unit is attached to the outer main body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is replaced with a fixing means from a temporary fixing member in a state where the model unit is attached to an outer main body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to a wiring relay member.

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the model unit 50 is attached to the outer body 100 and the connectors are connected to each other separately. In contrast to this, for example, the connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method is conceivable in which the connectors are automatically connected to each other by pushing the model unit 50 into the outer body 100. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector joint portion, so that the reliability is uncertain, and there is a problem that the countermeasure is costly. be.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100 and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into upper and lower two stages and the upper door-shaped front member is used as a component on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the connector coupling may become unstable. There is a problem that a new security structure is required for the seams between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After connecting the connector holder 428 to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 has an independent structure that is coupled to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and during games. Further, since only the model unit 50 is a replacement target when the model is changed and the door type front member 200 is not a replacement target, the burden on the amusement park for the model change is reduced.

[7-2-2. Coupling of connectors 425,427 and connectors 124,125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection between the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 at a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical matter, in a structure in which independent elements of two connectors 425 and 427 and a connector holder 428 are gathered and integrated, the difficult problem of "accurate positioning" of the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be collectively connected. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for increasing flexibility at the time of bonding without soldering to the printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 which is the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted on them, respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. It is non-fixed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121, and is in a direction orthogonal to the coupling direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (the "orthogonal" here is not limited to the exact 90 degrees. , It means about 90 degrees according to the conventional wisdom.) We are taking measures to make it playable. In such a configuration, when the coupling aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative positions of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 floats and causes the deviation. Since it moves to correct, it is possible to connect the connector 427 and the connector 125. As a result, a board-fixed, inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

From the explanation so far, the following technical ideas can be grasped.
(1) "In a gaming machine having two or more connectors for wiring and two or more connectors for wiring paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these. Another connector group is mounted on the connector board, and the connector board is further divided for each connector and one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is attached to the board support member in the direction of connecting the connector. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted so that it can move in orthogonal directions. "
(2) "Multiple designs are attached to the outer main body, which has a box shape with the front open and the back covered with a back plate and is equipped with a power supply device and other main body side electrical parts, and a case member that can be attached to and detached from the outer main body. In order to relay the model unit provided with the variable symbol variation display device and other case member side electric parts, the main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and the case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts. A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more connectors attached to the tips of the case-side wiring, a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group, and the connector. A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, another connector group with a board-fixed type connector used by fixing to a printed board by pairing with each connector of the two or more system connector groups, and the above. It has a connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and has connectors of the other connector group fixed to it, and the connector connection terminal board is divided into connectors and the connector 1 A gaming machine characterized in that one is fixed to the wiring relay member and another connector connection terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be playable in a direction orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector. "
(3) "In a gaming machine having two or more connectors for wiring and two or more connectors for wiring paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to a board support member via a connector board. At the same time, attach another connector group paired with these to one connector holder, fix one connector in the connector group to the connector holder, and attach the other connector to the connector holder in the connector connection direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is mounted so that it can move in orthogonal directions. "
(4) "Multiple designs are attached to the outer main body, which has a box shape with the front open and the back covered with a back plate and is equipped with a power supply device and other main body side electrical parts, and a case member that can be attached to and detached from the outer main body. In order to relay the model unit provided with the variable symbol variation display device and other case member side electric parts, the main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and the case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts. A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more connectors attached to the tips of the case-side wiring, a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group, and the connector. A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member, another connector group with a board-fixed type connector used by fixing to a printed board by pairing with each connector of the two or more system connector groups, and the above. It has a connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and fixes the connectors of the other connector groups, and fixes one connector in the connector group to the connector holder. At the same time, the gaming machine is characterized in that the other connectors are attached to the connector holder in a state in which it can move in a direction orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connectors. "

In the above game machine, if the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position between other connectors due to manufacturing error etc. Since the non-fixed connector terminal board moves together with the connector to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors that are not the coupling aim. Therefore, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive DIN standard connector that is used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is also low.

Further, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body via the wiring relay member and, by extension, the wiring relay member by a fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder. .. Therefore, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with only the outer body and is not interfered with by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

It should be noted that, as in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is playable and the large connectors 425 and the connectors 124 are defined as the criteria for coupling is a configuration in which the connectors 425 and 124 are compared with the reverse configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily aligned with each other.

Further, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 9, a chamfered portion C (a chamfered portion C) is formed at the peripheral corner portion of the convex portion tip of the convex connector 425,427 and / or the peripheral edge corner portion of the insertion port of the concave connectors 124, 125. If both linear chamfering and curved chamfering are formed), the inductive action along the taper of the chamfered portion C improves the bondability between the connectors.

Further, as in the embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 can be made playable, it is also possible to make one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side playable. In that case as well, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female screw is projected from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while an ear piece 427b having free holes 427a is formed on both sides of the connector 427, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The free hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted into the connector 427, and the screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving cylinder 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. Further, in the embodiment, two connectors are treated as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back side of the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear surface plate 405) of the case member 400 are provided near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409, etc., and in FIG. 11, the right side surface of the symbol variation display device 300 toward the device case 302 ( The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel board 312 provided on the side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 on the non-hinge side is pulled out from one wiring port 438 to the outside of the case member 400, and the cable 313 is pulled out as shown in FIG. It is housed in the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from another wiring port 438 into the case member 400 and connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall out of the cable groove 437.

The main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both electrical components on the case member side inside the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 from the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with wiring ports 438 and 438 and a cable groove 437 to detour the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

Considering the workability of wiring for connecting and disconnecting the connector in a limited space, the reel board 312 is installed on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 on the side surface of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302). The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the fully opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) and the reel substrate 312 are located close to each other. Because they face each other, it is not possible to secure a large work space required for inserting and removing the connector.

However, on the other hand, the connection portion of the boards (main board 409, effect control board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 is dressed to cross the inside of the case member 400. Then, there is a possibility that the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or conversely, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to detour the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. Further, it is better to perform the wiring work in a state where the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from the predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is the wiring allowance. There is room to say. Therefore, the cable 313 is slackened with the device case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the slackening of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the pull-out amount. If the cable 313 has a large amount of slack, the cable 313 is placed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can escape the loose part of the.

Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. It is useful for effective utilization of dead space that can be created. The wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 does not have to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel board 312, and can be applied to all the cables that cross the inside of the case member 400.

In addition, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function-separated relay terminal board.

The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in the state of a finished product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and the necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game hall as it is, but at this time, as shown in the imaginary line of FIG. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted through the skylight portion 443 from the inside of the case member 400 through the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100, and further. The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight portion 443 with a tool 602 such as a driver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. Since a plurality of through holes 132 are provided, they can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper rail 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper rail 600 can be selected. Further, if the through hole 132 to be used is changed when the entire gaming machine is replaced, it is possible to prevent the harmful effect (so-called stupid hole formation) of opening the hole of the fixing member 601 at the same position of the upper rail 600.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is generated by the cooling fan of the image display body 500 (not shown). From the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 to the ventilation port 133 of the back plate 104 through the gap S, and from there, it escapes to the inside of the game machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S in a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Design of each reel, design row]
As shown in FIG. 46, on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, as shown in FIG. A reel band (design band) on which the symbol (design) is written is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol trains indicated on the reel bands 321a, 321b, 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are expanded in a plane. In addition, the above-mentioned sequence number is described for convenience in order to identify the symbols arranged in the symbol string. Further, in FIG. 46, the reel 301a with the reel band 321a is shown as the left reel, the reel 301b with the reel band 321b is shown as the middle reel, and the reel 301c with the reel band 321c is shown as the right reel. In the above description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are described as necessary.

In each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols are the openings 401 (also referred to as a symbol display window, hereinafter referred to as symbols). It is arranged so as to be visible through the display window 401 (unified as the display window 401) (see FIG. 47 described below).

As shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols are "7" symbols filled with red (hereinafter referred to as "red 7 symbols") and "7" symbols filled with blue (hereinafter referred to as "7" symbols). "Blue 7 design") "," BAR design "," cherry design "with cherry design", "watermelon design" with watermelon design, "replay design", "bell design" "Bell design" with "Bell design", "Design with" Yoshi "(hereinafter referred to as" Yoshi design ")", "Design with" Positive "(hereinafter referred to as" Positive design ")" be. The bell design can be divided into a "bell 1 design" in which one star is drawn and a "bell 2 design" in which two stars are drawn, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell. can.

In FIG. 46, the “red 7 symbol” has two sequence numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 12 in the reel band 321b, and the sequence number 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. The "blue 7 symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 16 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 15 in the reel band 321c. The "BAR symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 11 in the reel band 321a, two of the sequence numbers 6.9 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 2 in the reel band 321c. The "cherry symbol" is one of the sequence numbers 10 in the reel band 321a, the three sequence numbers 1, 14, and 17 in the reel band 321b, and the sequence numbers 7 and 14 in the reel band 321c. Two are equivalent. There are five "replay symbols" of sequence numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, and 17 in the reel band 321a, and sequence numbers 0, 5, 8, and 11 in the reel band 321b. In the case of the reel band 321c, the five of 16th and 5th, and the 5th of the sequence numbers 1st, 5th, 8th, 13th and 17th correspond to each other. There are three "bell 1 symbols" in the reel band 321a with sequence numbers 13, 15, and 18, and in the reel band 321b, there are five sequence numbers 2, 7, 10, 15, and 18. , In the reel band 321c, the three arrangement numbers 9, 12, and 16 correspond to each other. The "bell 2 symbol" corresponds to the three sequence numbers 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and the two sequence numbers 0 and 4 in the reel band 321c. The "watermelon symbol" has three sequence numbers 9/14/19 in the reel band 321a, two sequence numbers 4/13 in the reel band 321b, and sequence number 3 in the reel band 321c.・ Four of No. 6, No. 11, and No. 20 are equivalent. The "prosthetic symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 20 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 19 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. The "normal symbol" corresponds to one of the sequence numbers 0 in the reel band 321a, one of the sequence numbers 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of the sequence numbers 18 in the reel band 321c. The types of symbols are examples, and are not limited to these types.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged portion of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. From the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can be visually recognized. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are the "upper (or upper position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301a is displayed) and the "middle (or middle position)" (for example). , The position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed) and the "lower stage (or lower stage position)" (for example, the position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

From the above, it is possible to display "the number of stages x the number of reels" in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 from "number of stages (3) x number of reels (3)".

Various lamps are provided on the left side edge of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, hereinafter referred to as a display panel 501) (on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401, of which "BET1" and "BET2" are provided. , "BET3" is the BET lamp (Betlamp) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of "BET1", "BET2", and "BET3" above) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number according to the number of medals bet). That is, "1" is one bet (the number of medals bet is one), and "2" is. It means that 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2) and "3" corresponds to 3 bets (also called MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

The valid sequence is determined according to the number of bets. This "valid sequence" is also called a valid line. In the following, it will be referred to as the effective line. It is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is displayed as the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination only when they are displayed side by side on one effective line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not lined up on any of the effective lines (that is, a predetermined one). If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not lined up on the valid line), it will not be determined that the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In addition, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not lined up on the effective line in this way, it is determined that the combination mode of the disjointed symbols (that is, the combination of the lost symbols) is displayed.

Next, the number of bets and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as an example, in the normal game state (general game state) and the bonus internal state, a game with three cards is specified or recommended (specified number of three cards). However, as will be described later, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the bonus state controlled during the bonus game, a game is played by playing two cards (a specified number of two cards). Further, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are two lines, that is, a linear arrangement that rises to the right (upward right line) and a linear arrangement that goes down to the right (downward right line). Specifically, the line (that is, the upward-sloping line) 623b in which "BAR symbol-replay symbol-prosthetic symbol" is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 and "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" Is displayed, only two lines of the line (that is, downward-sloping right) line 623a are valid lines.

The number of bets and effective lines are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a mountain-shaped or V-shaped arrangement in addition to one or a plurality of linear arrangements. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of effective lines may be changed according to the number of bets of medals in the game.

The combination of symbols on the effective line displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is "Bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" displayed on the downward-sloping line 623a, which is one of the effective lines. Since this combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination (replay combination), the next game is automatically bet without inserting a medal, and the same game as the previous game is executed again. It becomes possible to do. Even if "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the effective line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance which combination of symbols is displayed. However, by displaying the combination of the "replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol" symbol on the middle line, which is not a valid line, the player can grasp that the replay has been won. It should be noted that, like the above-mentioned replay combination (replay combination), it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance on the effective line, but it is difficult to grasp the winning combination when looking at the entire symbol display window 401. As for, other winning combinations may also prepare a symbol combination in the same manner. At this time, even if it is difficult to grasp the winning combination at first glance only from the effective line, it is possible to easily make the player grasp the winning combination of the winning combination when viewed from the entire symbol display window 401.

In addition, the display panel 501 is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be turned on (or blinked) according to the gaming state of the slot machine 1. These lamps are the error lamp 604 with the letters "ERR" drawn from the top of the figure, the replay lamp 606 with the letters "REP" located just below the BET lamp 614, and "STR". It is equipped with a start lamp 608 with the letters "INS", a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters "INS", and a payout number display LED 612 with two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp that announces the winning of the bonus game described later, a 7-segment LED that displays the cumulative number of medals paid out in the bonus game, etc., and a 7-segment LED that counts the bonus game, etc. are separately provided. May be good.

The error lamp 604 starts lighting (or blinking) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and the player or the like (hall staff, etc.) also indicates that the trouble or the like is currently occurring. Has the role of informing).

The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a replay (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) can be performed when the game result is a replay (described later).

The start lamp 608 starts lighting (or blinking) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of urging the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

The medal IN lamp 610 has a role of urging the player to bet by continuing to light (or blink) until the number of bets reaches the maximum (MAX bet).

The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the payout number of medals by displaying the payout number (the number of medals to be paid out) when the medal is paid out according to the game result.

[10. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically shows the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like equipped in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 409 is equipped with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like.

The above-mentioned single pushbuttons 205, 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors (not shown). It is possible to detect the operation by the player and output the detected operation signal to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 300 (starting rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a is output. , 211b, 211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is output to the main board 409, respectively.

In the following, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c will be referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main board 409, and various signals are input to the main board 409 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor consists of a stepping motor, and each reel 301a, 301b, 301c can rotate and stop independently, and at the time of rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom on the symbol display window 401. It is displayed while changing to.

Further, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, 331c for detecting the reference position regarding the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, and the position sensors 331a, 331b, 331c are reels on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, respectively. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c) are provided correspondingly to the inside. By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed in the medal selector 207. The insertion sensor 207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts the medal, the medal selector 207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter 213 return to the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the paid out medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been done. Further, the auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 500, the error lamp 604, or the like, and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, 341c described above is output from the main board 409. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 409 to the medal discharge device 110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal discharge device 110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the input signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 604, the image display body 500, or the like to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 1 includes an effect control board 510 in addition to the main board 409, and the effect control board 510 includes a CPU 1118, ROM 1120, RAM 1122, input / output interface 1130, VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and AMP (audio amplifier). ) 1126, sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The effect control board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502, and the operation of the speaker 512.

Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the amusement park via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (input medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 48 is only an example of the slot machine of the first embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also peripheral boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the effect control board 510) may be made connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the external relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, various game information managed by the effect control board 510 and emergency information manageable by the effect control board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunctions or malfunctions of components of the slot machine 1). Can be output to the hall computer 1200.

In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power supply switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1, and can be operated only by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Of these, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. .. Further, the reset switch 112u is for canceling the error generated in the slot machine 1, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t.

The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game using the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 while the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. When the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed from the display content (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the valid line) displayed in the symbol display window 401 when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective lines (right-up line 623b and right-down line 623a) in the symbol display window 401.

In this example, the number of effective lines is described as two, but when the slot machine 1 has a plurality of effective lines, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. Whether or not it is judged. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, a total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 15) can be specified as the upper limit of the number of medals to be paid out at one time. In such a case, if the total number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple valid lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals of the upper limit will be paid out and the upper limit will be exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, the excess of the upper limit is not divided into the next and subsequent games and paid out.

In the following, the case where the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the valid lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combinations are complete, or the winning combination symbols are complete.

The symbols of slot machine 1 include "red 7 symbol", "blue 7 symbol", "BAR symbol", "cherry symbol", "replay symbol", "bell 1 symbol", "bell 2 symbol", and "watermelon symbol". , "Yoshi symbol" and "Regular symbol", but of these, "Red 7 symbol", "Blue 7 symbol" and "BAR symbol" stand out compared to other symbols. The design is easy to identify and easy to identify. The ease of identification here means a high degree to which the player can easily identify the symbol including the state where the reel is rotating and the reel is stopped. Due to the color and size of these symbols even while the reel is rotating, it is easy for the player to aim and stop the symbols so that they are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player operates the stop operation. (That is, it is easy to push). Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 46, the "righteousness symbol" and the "genuine symbol" can be read as "justice" in the form of forming a circle with the two symbols "righteousness symbol" and "genuine symbol". As described above, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other on the upper and lower sides, and only one is arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, and 301c, so that it is easy to press the reels.

These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (only one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but by forming a predetermined combination, it becomes a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination. .. That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. Hereinafter, the combination mode of the symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

[10-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, a combination of a winning combination (including a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to the winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 to 53. FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination. The lottery table (also referred to as a winning price determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in ROM 1112 or the like in advance. Although the details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws a winning combination, and such a lottery is also called an "internal lottery".

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing each winning combination and a condition device that is established corresponding to each winning combination, and is stored in ROM 1112 or the like in advance. In FIG. 50, a blank in the table means that the conditional device with the corresponding conditional device number is inactive (OFF), and "1" in the table is assigned the corresponding conditional device number. It means that the condition device is activated (ON). FIGS. 51 to 53 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) showing combinations of symbols and the number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each condition device, which are also stored in ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

It should be noted that the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described below is assumed to have an AT (assist time) function using a small push order combination as an example of the functions provided by the gaming machine. In a gaming machine equipped with an AT function, the winning or losing of an AT is determined by a lottery (AT lottery), and if the AT is won as a result of the determination, the AT game is executed. In the AT game, it is possible to win many medals by teaching or announcing the appropriate push order that can be expected to pay out the most medals, mainly when the push order small role is selected as the winning role in the internal lottery. do. On the other hand, during the game period (non-AT) other than the AT game, by not teaching or notifying the above-mentioned push order, it is possible to make the medal acquisition in the proper push order uncertain, and for each game state. It can make a difference in the expected number of medals won and the pace of consumption of medals.

Further, to supplement the push order, since the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment uses three reels 301a to 301c, the push order (stop order of the reels 301) is "left-middle-". There are six types: "right", "left-right-middle", "middle-left-right", "middle-right-left", "right-left-middle", and "right-middle-left". In the following description, each push order is referred to as "forward push", "pinch push", "middle forward push", "middle reverse push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push" in order. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the same reel stop control is performed regardless of which push order of "middle forward push" or "middle reverse push" is performed. Without distinguishing between these two push orders, it may be simply called "middle push".

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a procedure of the stop operation for stopping the reel 301, in the case of a game in which the push order is not taught as in the period when the AT game is not performed (non-AT). , "Left push (" forward push "or" pinch push ")" is recommended to stop the left reel 301a first (that is, perform the stop operation first with respect to the reel stop button 211a). Further, if a stop operation that does not follow such a recommended procedure is performed, such as stopping the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c first, it is disadvantageous for the player such as temporary stop of the AT lottery. You may want to take action.

For example, in the case of the winning combination "push order bell", the stop roll in the slot machine 1 depends on the push order of the reel stop buttons 211 (individually, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c). The embodiments are made different. Such a difference in the mode of the stop roll can be realized, for example, as follows. That is, as the winning combination corresponding to the "pushing order bell", a plurality of types of winning combination (specifically, corresponding to "AT1" to "AT10" shown in FIG. If the winning combination is "AT1", the forward push corresponds to the "appropriate pushing order"), and the reels are used for multiple conditional devices that operate when each winning combination selected by the internal lottery is won. The priority is set based on the order in which the stop buttons 211 are pressed. This priority includes a priority based on the above-mentioned "appropriate push order" and a priority based on a push order other than the "proper push order" (that is, "inappropriate push order"). If the condition device operates according to the priority based on the "appropriate push order", the reel stop control is performed based on the operated condition device, and as a result, the condition device operates according to the priority order based on the "inappropriate push order". Can be stopped with a stop roll that can grant a privilege (eg, payout of a relatively large number of medals) that is more advantageous to the player than when is activated.

Further, since the symbols that can be drawn onto the effective line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 at the time when the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is performed (specifically, for example, a maximum of 4 frames). Depending on the timing (pushing timing) of this stop operation, a symbol that can be retracted and a symbol that cannot be retracted are generated. As a result, the mode of the stop roll differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device according to the push timing is also set in advance.

In the following description, the above AT game is taken as an example of a special game advantageous to the player, but the special game advantageous to the player in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is not limited to the AT game. It may be in another advantageous gaming state (for example, a bonus game, an ART game, an RT game, etc.). Further, the AT function is not limited to the AT function using the push order small combination, and other benefits given based on the timing of the stop operation for the push position small combination (reel stop button 211) have been changed. It may be an AT function or the like using the winning combination).

[10-1-1. Types of Winners]
First, the lottery table shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, different lottery tables are prepared according to the gaming state, and FIG. 49 shows, as an example of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a general state and a bonus. The internal state and bonus state are shown. Here, the general state is a normal gaming state in which the bonus game is not in progress and the bonus flag is not established. The bonus internal state is a gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, two types of BB described later) is won by an internal lottery, and the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus state. The bonus state is an advantageous gaming state in which a bonus (specifically, two types of BB described later) is won by an internal lottery, and a transition is made based on the display of a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus. In FIG. 49, type 2 BB (type 2 special accessory) is shown as a bonus, but the bonus that can be mounted on the slot machine 1 may be another type, so-called BB bonus, RB. It may be provided with a bonus, a single bonus (SB), and the like. In such a case, it is necessary to prepare a gaming state according to each bonus, but a detailed description of each gaming state is omitted because it is the same as a general gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the winning probability (or the number of places) for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, and is prepared in advance corresponding to each gaming state. An internal lottery is held using the lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when any combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the symbol combination corresponding to the operated condition device is displayed on the effective line, which will be described later. The reel stop processing is performed. Then, if any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the valid line, the medal is paid out based on the winning combination. In the payout of medals based on the winning combination, the number of medals to be paid out may be set to be different depending on the game state and the number of medals to be played (specified number). At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table according to the specified number.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, one condition device and a reel control pattern have a one-to-one correspondence. Therefore, when it is desired to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination, , A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for one winning combination (see FIG. 50 described later). By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stop rolls (symbol combinations displayed on the effective line) for one winning combination.

The winning combination shown in FIG. 49 can be roughly classified into a bonus combination, a small combination, or a replay combination (replaying combination), and when none of the above-mentioned combination is won, it is called "missing". Here, "missing" is not strictly a winning combination. However, as in the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is each winning combination shown in FIG. 49, when the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is "missing", based on the result ( That is, since the subsequent internal processing is set (as if the winning combination of "missing" was won), the following may explain including "missing" in the winning combination for convenience.

Briefly explaining each, the "bonus role" is a role that triggers the execution of the bonus game, and specifically, "type 2 BB" corresponds to the bonus role. The "replay role (replay role)" is a role in which the next game can be executed without re-inserting medals (replay role), and specifically, the "replay" corresponds to the replay role. A "small role" is a role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the winning, specifically, "push order bell", "push order bell", "weak watermelon", "strong watermelon", etc. "Weak cherry", "strong cherry", "weak chance", "strong chance", and "strongest" correspond to small roles. As described above, the winning combination "pushing order bell" shown in FIG. 49 actually corresponds to the winning combination "AT1" to "AT10" shown in FIG. 50, and the winning combination shown in FIG. 49. The "bell in any push order" actually corresponds to the winning combinations "bell 1" and "bell 2" shown in FIG. 50. The number of winning combinations shown in FIG. 50 is appropriately distributed so that the total number is the number shown in FIG. 49. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

In addition, "missing" means that no winning combination has been selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of "missing", the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state). On the other hand, if the bonus is "off" in the internal state, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination may be stopped. However, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the lottery table as shown in FIG. 49 is used, the above situation (“missing” in the bonus internal state) is set so as to rarely occur (1). / 65535) Also, since the winning probability of "Type 2 BB", which is a bonus role, is extremely low (1/65535), the chances that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus role will stop and the bonus game will be executed are extremely high. Low, most gaming states are controlled to general states or bonus internal states.

According to FIG. 49, there is a certain possibility that "missing" is selected in the general state (15453/65535), but there is almost no possibility that "missing" is selected in the bonus internal state and the bonus state. (1/65535 respectively). Furthermore, in the bonus state, the winning probability of the push order bell is set to be much lower than that of other gaming states (1/655535), and instead of almost no winning, the winning probability of the push order bell is set. It is set high (32059/65535). Nine pieces of the push order bell are paid out regardless of the push order, whereas the push order bell pays out two or less pieces when the push order is improper. Therefore, by distributing the numbers in this way, when the bonus state is controlled (bonus game), the medals held by the player can be increased without decreasing.

In addition, even if the result of the internal lottery is not "missing" and one of the winning combinations (bonus winning combination, replay winning combination, small winning combination) is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. The stop operation (operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is performed at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming to stop in the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective lines 623a and 623b) to the extent possible. If this is not done, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed on the valid line. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, even if one of the winning combinations is won, if the combination of symbols corresponding to this winning combination is not displayed on the valid line, it will be described later in the same manner as when "missing" is selected. In step S6 of FIG. 54, it is determined that the game result is lost. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game result is lost even though some winning combination is won, the winning combination is not displayed at random, but the winning combination. It is decided to control so that a predetermined symbol combination (stopped roll) indicating that the winning based on the winning combination has been missed is displayed in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stop roll) displayed at the time of such a loss is hereinafter referred to as "zero (or zero)".

Further, in the description of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the expression "bell zero (bell zero)" is used for "pushing order bells (AT1 to AT10)". Bell zero is a push order in which the proper push order is determined for each winning combination. When the bell is won, the stop operation is performed in the wrong push order, and the bells are aligned (strictly speaking, 9 cards). It means that another symbol combination as if the bell combination was removed is displayed without stopping the symbol combination of the bell combination for which the payout can be obtained. In the case of such a bell zero, the bell zero is displayed as a stop roll, and less payout (including no payout) than the original bell set is made. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device numbers 1 to 32 in FIG. 51 is a bell-zero symbol combination, and at this time, the number of payouts of one or two is set. As described above, "bell zero" is different from the above-mentioned "zero" at the time of loss.

Further, in the description of the first embodiment, the expression "disjoint (separate eyes)" may be used in addition to the above "zero (zero eyes)". "Breaking" is not a "matching" that makes it relatively easy for the player to recognize the characteristics of the stopped roll, but a stop roll (so-called) that looks like a combination of seemingly disjointed symbols. It means that it is a "separate eye"). That is, the "separate stitch" is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even if it is a loose stitch, it is not necessarily a loss, so medals may be paid out.

[10-1-2. Winning form of winning combination]
The winning combination illustrated in FIG. 49 is a winning combination (single combination) in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity. When a single winning combination is won, later reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a winning combination (simultaneous winning combination) may be prepared in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected. Such simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected in one lottery opportunity, for example, when a plurality of small winning combinations (for example, a plurality of bell winning combinations) are selected at the same time. A bonus role and a small role may be selected at the same time.

When the simultaneous winning combination is selected by the internal lottery, the reel stop control later is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition device based on each winning combination included in the simultaneous winning combination. Then, in the reel stop control when the simultaneous winning combination is won, a predetermined priority (for example, a priority such as "replay> small role> bonus" or "replay> bonus> small role"). According to this, the reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is permitted, and the privilege is paid out according to the winning combination. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small winning combinations, the setting method of the effective line, etc., control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combinations are won together, and when simultaneous winning occurs, each of them may be controlled. Benefits will be paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small role is a "non-carry-over role" that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning winning state of the winning combination that could not be won in the winning game is not carried over to the next game or later. Even if the winning combination is selected at the same time, medals will not be paid out according to the small winning combination that could not be won in the winning game.

In addition, when a bonus combination and a small combination are won at the same time, the combination selected in such a combination is also called a duplicate combination. Even when the bonus combination and the small combination are won at the same time, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous winning of the small combination, and the predetermined priority (for example, "re-" Reel stop processing is performed while the display of the symbol combination of the winning combination is allowed according to the priority order such as "game> small role> bonus" or "replay game> bonus> small role", depending on the winning combination. Benefits will be paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning winning state of the bonus combination is carried over until the symbol combination of the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. It can be a "carry-over role". Specifically, Type 2 BB is a "carry-over role". In addition, the replay role and the small role (for example, the bell role) are "non-carry-over roles". In this way, even when the "carry-over combination" and the "non-carry-over combination" are simultaneously won by winning the duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. Then, if the symbol combination corresponding to the "carry-over role" is not displayed in the winning game, the winning winning state of the "carry-over role" is carried over to the next game or later. However, in such a "next game", when another small role is won, both the "carry-over role" and the "other small role" are won, but in this case, Since they are selected in different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles.

In the case of simultaneous winning, which combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is preferentially displayed on the effective line is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop processing.

In the following, the winning combinations roughly classified above will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53.

[10-1-3. Bonus role]
The winning combination "Type 2 BB" shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination related to the Type 2 special character. When the bonus combination is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device "BB1" is activated, the reel stop processing is performed, and the privilege is given based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, by displaying the symbol combination (matching "Red 7") corresponding to the condition device "BB1" on the effective line, a bonus game (BB game) of two types of BB is executed. This bonus game is a game in which a player is provided with an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In this embodiment, for example, the specified number of games is set to two and is shown in the bonus state of FIG. 49. The bonus game is advanced using the drawn lottery table. Then, the bonus game ends when the number of games of the bonus game exceeds the specified upper limit (for example, 30 games) or the cumulative number of payouts in the bonus game exceeds the specified number (for example, 200). When the bonus game ends, the gaming state shifts from the bonus state to the general state.

Here, the symbol combinations (matching "Red 7") corresponding to "Type 2 BB" are arranged so that they cannot always be drawn onto the effective line depending on the timing of the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 (Fig.). 46). However, "Type 2 BB" is a carry-over role that allows the winning flag to be carried over, and even if the "Red 7" match, which is the corresponding symbol combination in the winning game, is not displayed (not aligned), after the next game. Until the winning status is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped, the game is played as a bonus internal status.

Then, when the replay combination or the small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery while being controlled to the bonus internal state, the winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority is "replay (replay role)> small role> bonus", and at this time, even if the established state of the type 2 BB is maintained as the bonus internal state, the type 2 BB The opportunity to display the symbol combination is limited to the case where neither the replay combination nor the small combination is won in the internal lottery (that is, out of order). However, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the ratio of deviation in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state is set to be extremely small (1/65535). Therefore, in most games, there is no chance that the symbol combination of the two types BB is displayed, and the game state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state.

[10-1-4. Replay role]
The winning combination "replay" shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of the replay (replaying combination). When the replay combination is won, the condition device for replay (replay game 1 with reference to FIG. 50) is activated, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is allowed on the effective line (either line 623a or 623b). Based on this, the reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54), which will be described later, is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, the symbol combination of the replay role is controlled so as to be always displayed on the valid line, so that it is determined that the symbol combinations of the replay are complete, and as a result, as a privilege of the replay role. , In the next game, medals are automatically bet without inserting medals or betting operations (operations for inserting stored medals), and a replay game in which the same game as the previous game is executed again becomes possible. Even if the symbol combination of the replay is displayed on the valid line, the medal as a prize will not be paid out.

The feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume (hang a new medal) a new medal in the next game instead of paying out the medal. In addition, since the replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, for example, by increasing the winning probability, even if the winning frequency increases, there is little disadvantage for the hall. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is approximately once every 6 to 7 times. This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain range. In other words, it is possible to give the winning role of replay a role of suppressing the consumption of excessive medals in the progress of the game.

Further, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are evenly arranged on the reels 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the same as the replay combination. By making other symbols (designs that do not constitute the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination) arranged between the symbols constituting the combination mode of the corresponding symbols from 1 to 4 at the maximum). It is possible to arrange the combination modes of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority of the displayed winning combination is "replay (replay role)> small role> bonus", it is assumed that the condition device for the replay role and other roles (small role and bonus role) are displayed. Even if the condition device and the condition device are activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination is not stopped and displayed.

[10-1-5. Bell role]
Next, the role of Bell as a winning role will be described. This bell role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals at the time of winning. In the first embodiment, several types of bell combinations are prepared, and an example thereof will be specifically described below.

[10-1-5-1. Pushing order does not matter]
First, a push order-independent bell (common bell) in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) does not change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

The specific winning combinations of the "bells in any push order" shown in FIG. 49 are "bell 1" and "bell 2" shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 50, when "Bell 1" is selected as the winning combination, the condition device for the accessory 17 is activated, and when "Bell 2" is selected as the winning combination, the accessory 17 and the accessory 18 are operated. The condition device is activated. Here, the condition device for the accessory 17 and the accessory 18 is configured so that any corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the effective line regardless of the reel pushing order and pushing timing (see FIG. 51 and the like). .. Therefore, when such a condition device is activated, the bell combination is won by the stop display of the symbol combination of the bell combination regardless of the stop order and stop timing of the reel stop button 211 by the player, and the prize is won. A medal payout (9 medals) will be given as a privilege.

[10-5-1-2. Push order bell]
Next, a push order bell in which the winning degree (winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) at the time of winning can change depending on the pushing order of the reel 301 will be described.

The "pushing order bell" shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination mainly prepared in order to surely give a privilege to a player in an AT game. The specific winning combinations of the "pushing order bell" are "AT1" to "AT10", and the appropriate pushing order is associated with each (see FIG. 50).

In FIG. 49, the winning probability of the “pushing order bell” is 32000/65535, and this winning probability is the total value of the winning probabilities of “AT1” to “AT10”. Then, the winning probabilities of "AT1" to "AT10" can be arbitrarily distributed under the condition of satisfying the above total value. For example, if the winning probability of each of "AT1" to "AT10" is 3200/65535, there are five appropriate push orders (forward push, pinch push, middle push, reverse push, reverse pinch push) in the "push order bell". ), The winning probabilities can be evenly distributed (that is, each winning probability of the 5-choice bell can be made equal). The proper push order of the "push order bell" will be described in detail later. Further, for example, the winning probability of each of "AT1" to "AT4" in which the left reel 301a is selected as the first stop reel as an appropriate pushing order is set to 2000/65535, and the pushing order other than the left reel 301a (middle reel 301b or If the winning probability of each of "AT5" to "AT10" in which the right reel 301c) is selected as the first stop reel is 4000/65535, then the left reel 301a is the first stop reel in the proper push order. The winning ratio can be significantly lower than the winning ratio of the push order bell in which the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c is the first stop reel in the proper push order. In such a case, in a normal game in which it is recommended to first stop the left reel 301a, the rate at which the push order bell wins can be suppressed, and the AT game or the like suppresses the payout rate in the normal game. It is also possible to increase the payout rate in special games.

As shown in FIG. 50, when "AT1" to "AT10" are selected as winning combinations, a plurality of condition devices among the accessories 1 to 16, the condition devices of the accessories 17, and the accessories 24 to 26 are selected. Of these, the condition devices 0 to 2 operate at the same time. The symbol combinations and the like corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53. It should be noted that the accessory 1 to the accessory 16 are conditional devices corresponding to the symbol combination (payout of 1 or 2 sheets) of "bell zero", respectively, and the accessory 17 is the symbol combination of "bell role" (9 sheets). It is a conditional device corresponding to (payout). Further, the accessory 24 to the accessory 26 are originally conditional devices related to the weak chance eye and the strong chance eye, which will be described later, and even if they are activated at the time of winning the push order bell, their priority is higher than the other conditional devices that have been activated. By keeping the value low, the symbol combination corresponding to the accessory 24 to the accessory 26 is not actually stopped.

Then, for these plurality of condition devices that operate simultaneously, the condition devices that operate preferentially are determined according to the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211 (individually, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) in the stop operation of the player. By doing so, it is possible to display different stop rolls depending on the proper push order and the wrong push order (inappropriate push order). That is, while the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is being performed in the proper push order corresponding to the winning combination (for example, in the case of AT1, the forward push), the accessory 17 is preferentially operated until the end. When the stop operation is performed in an appropriate push order, the symbol combination of the bell role is stopped on the effective line, and 9 medals can be paid out as a privilege. On the other hand, when the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is performed in an improper pressing order, the priority of the accessory 17 is set lower than that of other operating condition devices (accessories 1 to some of the accessories 16). As a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 17 is prevented from being stopped on the effective line, and the symbol combination of the bell zero is stopped on the effective line, which is a privilege (one piece or one) as a bell zero. Two medals will be paid out).

According to FIG. 50, "AT1" and "AT2" are winning combinations of push order small combinations in which forward push is in the proper push order, and "AT3" and "AT4" are in the push order in which pinch push is in the proper push order. "AT5" and "AT6" are the winning combinations of the pushing order small winning combination, and "AT7" and "AT8" are the winning winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination with the middle push as the proper pushing order. Is the winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination with the proper pushing order, and "AT9" and "AT10" are the winning winning combination of the pushing order small winning combination with the reverse pinching push as the proper pushing order. Therefore, when FIG. 50 is used, the "pushing order bell" in the present embodiment is a so-called "5" in which the proper pushing order is divided into five ways (forward push, pinch push, middle push, reverse push, reverse pinch push). It becomes "choice bell". As a matter of course, such an appropriate push order can be freely set within a predetermined limit at the design stage of the gaming machine. For example, even if it is a three-choice bell based only on the first stop reel. Alternatively, it may be a 6-choice bell based on the first stop reel and the second stop reel.

In this way, the push order bells "AT1" to "AT10" are winning medals that can be paid out as 9 medals for winning the bell role only when the stop operation is performed in the proper push order. Yes, if the stop operation is performed in an improper push order, it is a winning combination that is given a lesser privilege (1 or 2 medals paid out) than when the bell role was won as "bell zero". ..

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, it is recommended to push left (forward push or pinch push) in a non-AT state other than the AT state. Therefore, when the game is played according to the recommended procedure in the non-AT state, the push order bell (specifically, AT5 to AT10) that has the proper push order other than the left push (forward push or pinch push) is won. Even so, you cannot win the role of Bell. However, in the AT state, the proper push order is taught, and the stop operation according to the teaching content is allowed, so that the bell role can be easily won when the push order bell is won. If the player unreasonably obtains a medal by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure during non-AT, the overall medal will be paid out by taking measures such as temporarily stopping the AT lottery. The expected value of may be adjusted appropriately.

[10-1-6. Cherry]
Next, the role of cherry as a winning role will be described. This cherry role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals (2 medals) at the time of winning. In the first embodiment, two types of cherry roles, a weak cherry and a strong cherry, are prepared. There is a difference in strength between the weak cherry and the strong cherry mainly in terms of the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning, winning probability regarding AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the explanation regarding AT).

As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak cherry" is won, the condition devices of the accessory 19 and the accessory 20 are activated, and when the "strong cherry" is won, the condition devices of the accessory 19 to the accessory 21 are activated (each condition device). See FIG. 52 for the symbol combinations and the like corresponding to. Although detailed explanation of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, when the symbol combination based on the accessory 19 and the accessory 20 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the weak cherry or the strong It can be seen that one of the cherries has been won, and when the symbol combination based on the accessory 21 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is known that the strong cherry has been won.

[10-1-7. Watermelon role]
Next, the role of watermelon as a winning role will be described. This watermelon role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals (5 medals) at the time of winning. In the first embodiment, two types of watermelon roles, a weak watermelon and a strong watermelon, are prepared. There is a difference in strength between weak watermelon and strong watermelon mainly in the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning, winning probability regarding AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the explanation about AT).

As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak watermelon" is won, the condition device of the accessory 22 operates, and when the "strong watermelon" is won, the condition device of the accessory 22 and the accessory 23 operates (corresponding to each condition device). See FIG. 53 for symbol combinations and the like). A detailed explanation of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, but when the symbol combination based on the accessory 22 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, either a weak watermelon or a strong watermelon is displayed. It can be seen that the crab has won a prize, and when the symbol combination based on the accessory 23 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is known that the strong watermelon has won a prize. Supplementally, when the weak watermelon is won, there is a possibility that the watermelon symbols will be aligned and stopped on the upward-sloping line or the downward-sloping line, and when the strong watermelon is won, the watermelon symbols may be aligned and stopped on the middle line. be.

[10-1-8. Chance role]
Next, the chance role as a winning role will be described. This chance role is a winning role that can be expected to pay out medals (1 piece) at the time of winning. In the first embodiment, two types of chance roles, a weak chance and a strong chance, are prepared. There is a difference in strength between the weak chance and the strong chance mainly in the degree of expectation regarding AT (AT winning, winning probability regarding AT game, etc.) (details will be described later in the explanation about AT).

As shown in FIG. 50, when the "weak chance" is won, the condition device of the accessory 24 is activated, and when the "strong chance" is won, the condition devices of the accessory 25 and the accessory 26 are activated (for each condition device). See FIG. 53 for the corresponding symbol combinations and the like). Although detailed explanation of the operation of the condition device when each winning combination is selected is omitted, if the symbol combination based on the accessory 24 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the prize is won in the weak chance. When the symbol combination based on the accessory 25 and the accessory 26 is stopped and displayed on the effective line, it is understood that the prize has been won in the strong chance.

[10-1-9. Strongest]
Next, the strongest prize-winning role will be explained. The strongest point is the winning role that can be expected to pay out (1 piece) of medals at the time of winning. As shown in FIG. 50, at the time of winning the "strongest", the condition device of the accessory 27 is activated. The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of the accessory 27 cannot be stopped unless the reel stop button 211 is operated at an appropriate pressing timing due to the arrangement of the constituent symbols, but the strongest is the operation of the appropriate pressing timing. When winning a prize, the "positive" symbols are displayed together on the middle line.

The strongest winning probability is set to 1/65535 (see FIG. 49), which is an extremely low probability in any gaming state, and can be positioned as a so-called premier role. Then, at the time of winning such a premier role, a freeze control may be added at the time of rotation control of the reel 301, and as a result, the player can easily grasp that the special winning combination has been won. , Can enhance the interest of the player.

The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

It should be noted that these symbols are not limited to the symbols and combinations of symbols described above. Further, in addition to the above-mentioned symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. Then, the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Further, the winning combinations described above are not limited to the provision of all the winning combinations, and the required types of winning combinations may be selected as appropriate.

For example, duplicate winning of a bonus combination and a small combination (or a replay combination) may be set. When such a duplicate combination is won, which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed on the valid line is controlled by the reel stop process.

Further, instead of the push order small combination prepared for the AT game, a push position small combination may be prepared. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the push position small combination means that the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (push position) and at an improper stop timing. , It is a small role that shows different winning modes. When such a small push position combination is installed, in the AT game, by teaching or notifying the player so that the appropriate push position can be easily recognized, when the small push position combination is won. , It is possible to allow the player to easily win the corresponding role and to win many medals.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds according to the processing procedure on the control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

FIG. 54 shows the basic processing procedure of one game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial settings for preparing for the start of the game are executed. Especially when the power is turned on, the connection and operation status of the various devices mentioned above are confirmed, the presence or absence of backup data is confirmed, and if the backup data exists, the process is restored to the state before the power was turned off. To execute.

In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or one insertion button 205) if there are already stored medals. Then, the start lever 210 is in a state of waiting for operation. That is, the bet number of one game is determined, and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. If the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is a three-card dedicated machine capable of executing a game by inserting three medals, the one-insertion button 205 is not provided. May be good.

In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 that has been in the operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process for determining whether or not any of the winning combinations is the result of the internal lottery is performed. Run. This internal lottery process is any one of the stages before all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that start rotation in the subsequent step S4 are in the stopped state (the state is stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed to determine whether or not the winning combination of the game is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any of the winning combinations, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the effective line. It is permissible to stop.

Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to the AT instruction function (so-called AT navigation). In the instruction function processing, not only the winning of the AT game and its start are determined, but also the transition to the precursor game in which the precursor effect that suggests or teaches whether the AT game is to be started is executed is determined. , If the AT game is in progress, the AT navigation that teaches the push order and the like is executed. The details of the instruction function processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 57 and the like. In this example, it is assumed that the main board 409 and the peripheral boards other than the main board (for example, the effect control board 510) perform the instruction function processing, but the instruction function processing is not limited to this, and for example, all the instruction functions are performed. The processing may be performed on the main board 409. Further, in the instruction function process of step S31 shown in this example, the processing content related to the instruction function of the AT is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3. Further, it is preferable that the instruction function processing is completed before the reel rotation processing of step S4 described in the next stage is started.

Next, in step S4, the reel rotation process for starting the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3 is executed. In this reel rotation process, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is enabled when the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are enabled. The operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying the fact is turned on, and the timer count until the next reel rotation process is executed is started. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c, respectively.

In step S5, the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, and the operation valid lamp is turned off in the order of acceptance, and the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, 301c. To execute.

In the next step S6, only two lines, that is, all the upward-sloping lines) 623b and the line displaying "Bell 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" (that is, the downward-sloping line 623a) are valid in step S5. When it is determined that the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped as a line, the display content (design combination mode) displayed on the valid line and the result of the internal lottery determined in step S3 above are allowed. A determination process is executed in which the winning combinations are determined by collating the reels.

In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. Further, when the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination accompanied by a change in the gaming state as in the case of Type 2 BB, the gaming state is changed (change in the gaming state shown in FIG. 49) and the re-gaming is performed, respectively. Various game benefits are given by such means.

The above is the basic processing procedure of one game of the slot machine 1. Here, in steps S2 (BET processing) to S4 (reel rotation processing), internal processing is performed triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, a specific description of this starting process will be given.

[11-1. Start process]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the start process.

In the start processing, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or the single insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. When there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S102. In this judgment, a medal equivalent to a MAX bet is inserted (that is, three or more medals are inserted in the case of a game with a specified number of three, and two or more medals are inserted in the case of a game with a specified number of two). It is assumed that the bet is satisfied only when the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206, which are MAX bets, are operated.

In the next step S102, as a reception process, the number of bets (only MAX bets in this example) is determined, and the effective line lamp corresponding to the number of bets is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number of medals is three, two lines, a right-up line 623b and a right-down line 623a, become effective lines, indicating this. Turn on the effective line lamp.

In step S103, the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled. When the operation of the start lever 210 is enabled, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled, and in that case, whether the operation of the starting lever 210 is accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is enabled in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 until the player does not perform a bet operation or insert a medal in step S101 or reaches a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

Also, the replay game does not require a new medal bet. This automatically puts the MAX bet state into the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. As a result, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

In step S105, the operation of the starting lever 210 is invalidated in response to the operation of the starting lever 210 in step S104.

Next, in step S106, when the starting lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are started to rotate, and random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the starting lever 210. After extracting the random numbers, the process proceeds to the next step S107. The timing of extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the operation of the start lever 210, or may be performed immediately after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds later), for example, in the process of programming. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

In step S107, a hit determination (collation of random values) is performed from the extracted random values (hereinafter referred to as extracted random values) to determine which winning combination is applicable. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in the hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches, matches) with the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). The winning probabilities for each winning combination in the hit determination performed by collating the extracted random number values with the hit determination table are as shown in FIG. 49.

Then, in the flag processing, when the hit value determination table to be the reference of the determination is determined when collating the extracted random value in the game, the game state flag such as the BB in-game flag described later is referred to. Determine the winning price judgment table (lottery table) in the game. That is, the winning value determination table corresponding to the game state flag (game state flag) that is in the ON (= 1) state in the game is set and the extracted random number values are collated. As the game state flag, it is assumed that flags corresponding to the game state are prepared respectively, and for example, it is assumed that there are a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus medium flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus internal flag are in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always set to the ON (= 1) state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes a "loss" that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated (see FIG. 50). ). Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (when it is operated / satisfied), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the satisfied condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to each condition device are as shown in FIGS. 51 to 53. Therefore, if any of the condition devices is not satisfied, the symbol combinations corresponding to any of the winning combinations cannot be aligned on the effective line. In the above steps S106 and S107, a random number lottery is performed inside the slot machine 1, and in the following, these steps are collectively referred to as an internal lottery or an internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random number to the flag processing corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

As described above in FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the instruction function processing shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 55, this instruction function process may be executed as a part of the flag process of step S107 of FIG. 55, or after the flag process of step S107 is completed, the flag process of step S108 is completed. The wait timer may be executed before the time is up. The details of the instruction function processing will be described later, but when the instruction function processing is performed, the information that can identify the winning combination determined in step S107 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the effect control board 510) by command communication. ) Will be notified.

In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called the wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. It is a thing. Here, when the wait timer has timed up (4.1 seconds have already passed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S109. In addition, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

In step S109, the rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started. Then, when the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation valid lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c has been enabled.

In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to rotate at the above-mentioned constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) by the player is accepted. ..

Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is allowed as the corresponding winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) in the game. Here, when the corresponding winning combination is allowed, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is used as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery for subsequent processing (reel stop processing, It will be reflected in the judgment process, payout process, etc.).

In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is called an extraction range) when performing random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 to the 14th power = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 1 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the value is not limited to this. When the extraction range of random numbers is expanded, the range of random numbers that can be extracted (so-called denominator) becomes larger by that amount, so that an event that a specific random number value is biased and extracted is less likely to occur.

Within the above extraction range, a random number value corresponding to each winning combination is further assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to the winning combination "Type 2 BB" is set to "1" among the random values in the extraction range (1 to 65535 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment), the extracted random value will be. When it becomes "1", the result of the internal lottery is "winning the 2nd class BB", and the BB1 which is the condition device of the 2nd class BB is processed as an information command in the game. .. Further, by using this, it is possible to calculate the winning probability of the type 2 BB (probability that the type 2 BB is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the lottery probability) from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to the type 2 BB. .. In the example of FIG. 49, the winning probability of the type 2 BB in the general state is 2 because [the total number of random values corresponding to the type 2 BB / the total number of random values in the extraction range] is 6553/65535. The winning probability of the seed BB is about 1/10.

In this way, the corresponding random number values are determined for all the winning combinations, and these random number values are called the winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (type 2 BB), the random number value "1" in the extraction range is the hit value corresponding to the type 2 BB. Further, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of the predetermined winning combination is a continuous random number value "1", "2", "3", "4" within the extraction range, the winning value of the predetermined winning combination is set. The range of values is a random number value "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined (collated) that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values "1" to "4", it means that "a predetermined combination has been won" as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single winning combination (for example, two types BB, cherry, replay, etc.) that wins only one winning combination is prepared. As described above, in addition to such a single role, a simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously elected (including a "duplicate combination" in which a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously elected) may be prepared. When such a duplicate combination is prepared, the winning value of the duplicate combination is also included in the above-mentioned winning value.

From this, the range of the winning value is determined for all the winning combinations, and it is determined by the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of the winning value of any of the winning combinations. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any of the winning combinations, the result is a loss. That is, the range of the winning price of the loss is other than the range of the winning price of all the winning combinations. The winning price may also be referred to as a winning allowance.

By the way, a single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination for one extracted random number value, and a simultaneous winning combination means a plurality of (for example, two) winning combinations for one extracted random number value. Corresponds to. That is, if the extracted random value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combination has been won. At this time, the condition device corresponding to each of the plurality of winning combinations is simultaneously established (operation is permitted). However, even if a plurality of conditional devices corresponding to each winning combination are simultaneously established, the priority of the conditional device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, so that in reality, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the established conditional devices are all. It is not always possible to stop on the valid line. For example, when the replay combination and the bonus combination are won at the same time, if the attraction of the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop process in step S5 is performed so as to give priority to the attraction of the replay combination, and further, the replay combination is used. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the effective line regardless of the push order and the push timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the effective line and is always a replay combination. The symbol combination of is stopped.

Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the push order bells (bell 1, bell 2) and the hit value of the replay that can be expected to win (or be established) without depending on the push timing and push order in the stop operation are extracted. It occupies more than most of the range. Specifically, out of the total lottery value of 65535 in the extraction range, the lottery value assigned to the replay is 30993, and the lottery value assigned to the bell regardless of the push order is 32059, so the total is 63052, which is the extraction range. It accounts for more than 96% of. Then, in the first embodiment, the specified number of cards in the bonus is 2, and if the replay is established, the next game is provided without consuming medals, and if the push order bell wins, 9 cards are provided. Medal will be paid out. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the execution period (during the bonus) of the bonus game.

[11-3. Game state control process]
Hereinafter, the game state control process performed in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

[11-3-1. Game state transition control process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

First, it is determined whether or not the bonus game (BB game) is in progress (step S151), and if it is determined that the bonus game is in progress (YES in step S151), is the end condition of the bonus game satisfied? Confirm whether or not (step S152). If the end condition of the bonus game is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the game returns while the gaming state during the bonus is maintained.

If the end condition of the bonus game is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game ends and the game shifts to the general state (step S153). In the general state, when the game is executed for a certain period of time, the number of medals that the player bets to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within this certain period of time. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB game) is not in progress (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not the bonus is inside (bonus internal state) (step S154). That is, when the bonus combination (type 2 BB) is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated, but the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination corresponds to the bonus combination in the game in which the internal lottery is won. Even if the symbol combination is not displayed on the valid line, it will continue to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line even after the next game.

If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is in the internal state, then it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line (step S155). When it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line (YES in step S155), the game state shifts to the bonus state (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. To. If a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the player returns while maintaining the gaming state inside the bonus.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is not in the internal state, whether or not the bonus combination (here, the 2 types BB, but may be a duplicate combination including the 2 types BB) is won in the internal lottery. Is determined (step S157). If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has been won (YES in step S157), the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). If the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the valid line in the game in which the bonus combination is won, the game in the bonus internal state is not played, the game state is controlled to the bonus state, and the bonus game is executed. To. If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in step S157), the game returns in the game state controlled to the general state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main board 409 controls the game state to any one of the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state. On the other hand, as described above, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has an AT function, but the execution of the AT game by the AT function is basically a system different from the above-mentioned control of the gaming state. Be controlled. That is, the AT game can be executed in any of the general state and the bonus internal state. However, this does not apply if the restrictions such as rules are violated. For example, it is assumed that the AT game cannot be executed in the bonus state. Hereinafter, the game state control process related to the AT function will be described in detail.

[11-3-2. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 54, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the main board 409 selects the winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table). The instruction function processing is executed by each of the main board 409 and the peripheral board (specifically, for example, the effect control board 510). By executing these instruction function processes, not only the winning of the AT game and its start are determined, but also the precursory game in which the precursory effect of suggesting or teaching whether or not the AT game is initiated is executed. The transition to is also determined (the above is the instruction function generation process), and if the AT game is in progress, the AT navigation that teaches the push order etc. is executed (instruction generation process).

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a rough processing procedure of the instruction function processing executed by the main board, and FIGS. 58 and 59 are detailed processing procedures of the instruction function generation processing among the instruction function processes shown in FIG. 57. It is a flowchart (No. 1, No. 2) showing. Further, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the instruction function processing executed by the peripheral board. In the following, first, the instruction function processing by the main board 409 will be described, and then the instruction function processing by the peripheral board (effect control board 510) will be described.

In the following description of the instruction function processing, various flags are used, and these flags are the memories in the board for executing the instruction function processing (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510). ), And the value is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. Further, when the flags having the same name are used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the effect control board 510), it is assumed that these internal flags basically have a common data format, and the main board 409 to the peripheral board. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a signal such as a command to the side.

In addition to the above internal flags, variable data may also be used, but these variable data also refer to the memory of the board that refers to the variable data (for example, RAM 1114 in the case of the main board 409, effect control board 510). In the case of RAM 1122), the value is read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and CPU 1118 in the case of the effect control board 510).

[11-3-2-1. Instruction function processing (main board)]
First, the outline of the instruction function processing by the main board 409 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In step S61 of FIG. 57, a process (instruction function generation process) relating to whether or not to generate the instruction function is performed. The details of the instruction function generation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58, 59, and 60.

When the instruction function generation process in step S61 is completed, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is ON (= 1) (step S62). The AT flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the AT game is in progress, and if it is ON, it means that the AT is in progress.

If the AT flag is ON in step S62 (YES in step S62), the instruction generation process is performed in step S63 to generate AT navigation, and then the process ends. On the other hand, when the AT flag is not ON, that is, OFF (= 0) (NO in step S62), it means that the AT is not in progress, so that the process is terminated as it is without generating an instruction.

The above is the outline of the instruction function processing by the main board 409. Hereinafter, the instruction function generation process shown in step 61 of FIG. 57 will be described in detail while showing a specific example of the extraction table. FIG. 58 mainly describes the processing other than the special mode, and FIG. 59 describes the processing in the special mode. The "special mode" will be described later.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is ON (= 1). If the AT flag is ON (YES in step S601), the instruction function generation processing is terminated without performing any significant processing. When the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601), it is determined in step S602 whether or not the AT internal flag is ON (= 1). The AT internal flag is an internal flag for indicating whether or not the AT game is internally determined to be won (AT internal state), although it is not in AT. Specifically, the AT internal flag is an AT. After winning the game, the AT internal flag is turned ON when the AT game is in the non-AT state until the start of the game. Further, when the AT is not won or during the AT, the AT internal flag is turned OFF (= 0). In step S602, if the AT internal flag is ON, the process of step S603 is performed, and if the AT flag is OFF, the process of step S621 is performed.

In step S603, an AT addition lottery is performed. In the AT addition lottery in step S603, first, whether or not to add the initial number of AT games is drawn (lottery for adding the initial number of games), and if it is decided to add, how many games are added is drawn. (Lottery for the number of games added to the number of initial games). In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the AT is won, a predetermined game period (for example, a period of a precursory game described later) may be provided before the AT starts, and the predetermined game period is set. If the conditions are met, the initial number of AT games may be added. When the process of step S603 is performed, the AT flag is OFF (NO in step S601) and the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S602), which means that the precursor game is in progress. Therefore, an AT addition lottery will be held. During the precursor game, the "precursor game flag", which is one of the internal flags, is ON.

Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the winning / failing lottery for adding the number of initial games. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 61, the winning combination selected by the internal lottery process (see step S3 in FIG. 54) is "replay", "push order bell", "type 2 BB", or "missing". In most cases (65534/65535), non-winners are selected and not added. On the other hand, the winning combinations selected by the internal lottery process are other than the above, that is, "bell in any order", "watermelon (weak / strong)", "cherry (weak / strong)", "chance eye (weak / strong)". ) ”Or“ the strongest ”, a certain percentage (16384/65535) is won and the addition is selected.

In addition, since the two winning combination groups shown in FIG. 61 are used repeatedly for the sake of brevity in the following explanations, "replay", "pushing order bell", "type 2 BB", and "missing" are won. We decided to call the roles "Winners of Group A", and the winners other than Group A, that is, "Bell in any order", "Watermelon (weak / strong)", "Cherry (weak / strong)", "Chance" The winners of "eyes (weak / strong)" and "strongest" will be referred to as "group B winners". Needless to say, the classification of the winning combination by the A group and the B group is just an example for explanation, and in reality, it may be a different winning combination category, or it may be a category of 3 or more. Alternatively, the winning combination may be classified differently for each lottery table.

Further, FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the initial game number addition game number lottery. The lottery for the number of games to be added to the number of initial games is performed when the lottery to add the number of initial games is won. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 62, the distribution pattern of the number of additional games is set to be different depending on whether the winning combination is the winning combination of the A group or the winning combination of the B group. As a general tendency, in the case of the winning combination of Group A, a relatively small number of games are often selected, and only 200 games can be selected at the maximum. On the other hand, in the case of the winning combination of the B group, it is the same that a small number of games is easily selected, but a higher number of games is more likely to be selected than in the case of the A group, and a larger number of games is selected. There is a possibility that

After the AT addition lottery is performed in step S603, it is determined whether or not the initial game number addition winning / failing lottery is won (step S604), and if it is determined that the winning is won, the current "AT" is determined in step S605. The process of adding the number of additional games selected in the lottery for the number of initial games to the "number of initial games" is performed (addition of the number of initial games). The "AT initial number of games" is variable data for indicating the number of AT games set at the start of AT. After that, the process proceeds to step S606. Even if it is determined in step S604 that the number of initial games is not won in the winning / failing lottery, the process proceeds to step S606.

In step S606, the "precursor game number" is subtracted by 1. The "precursor game number" is variable data for indicating the number of games of the "precursor game" in which the precursory effect of AT (details will be described later) can occur.

Next, in step S607, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become 0. When the number of precursor games is other than 0, that is, when the precursor game period remains (NO in step S607), the instruction function generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of precursor games is 0 in step S607 (YES in step S607), it means that the precursor games have ended. At this time, since the AT internal flag is ON, the AT game is started. Therefore, the "AT flag" is turned ON (step S608). After that, the AT internal flag and the precursor game flag are turned off (step S609, step S610), the "special state flag" and the "each state flag" are also turned off (step S611, step S612), and the instruction function generation process is terminated. ..

Here, the "special state flag" is an internal flag that is turned on when the game progresses in the "special mode". In the first embodiment, the "special mode" is not a mere production mode, but a special mode in which the winning probability and the like related to the AT lottery are given preferential treatment. The conditions for shifting to the "special mode" will be explained each time in the processing of each step shown later. Further, regarding the AT lottery game state controlled when the "special mode" is set, in the following description, the game is played in the "special mode" when the AT lottery game state is controlled to the dedicated "special state". It will be done. Derivative examples will be described later. When there are a plurality of "special states" (special state 1, special state 2, special state 3) (see, for example, FIG. 63), one special state flag manages a plurality of states (for example, special state). When the state flag is 0, it is OFF, when it is 1, it is a special state 1, when it is 2, it is a special state 2, and when it is 3, it is a special state 3). It may have a flag (for example, a special state 1 flag, a special state 2 flag, and a special state 3 flag are prepared). In any case, in the following determination that the special state is ON or OFF, it is determined to be ON when it is controlled to some special state, and it is determined to be OFF when it is not controlled to any special state.

In addition, "each state flag" is a plurality of "AT lottery game states" (for example, low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state, etc.) prepared so that the winning expectation degree regarding the first hit lottery of AT is different. It is an internal flag for indicating the control state for "each state" of special states 1 to 3, hell state, etc.). Therefore, it can be understood that each state flag includes a special state flag and a hell state flag. Then, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when "turning off each state flag", the state flags related to all AT lottery game states are returned to the initial settings (in this example, the low probability state is turned on). When "turning on each state flag" means to turn on the state flag corresponding to the AT lottery game state selected by the immediately preceding state transition lottery (other state flags are OFF). ) Means that. Further, when "turning off each state flag", each state flag when not in AT (for example, low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra high accuracy state, etc. which can be controlled even when not in AT), etc. You may turn off all the state flags related to each state, or you may turn on a predetermined state. Details of "special state", "each state", "state transition lottery (state transition lottery A, B, C, special state transition lottery)" and the like will be described later.

When the AT flag is OFF in step S602, that is, when the AT is not won internally and the AT is not won internally, whether or not the special state flag is OFF (= 0) in step S621 is determined. It is judged. The process when the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621) will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

If the special state flag is OFF in step S621 (YES in step S621), the AT first hit lottery is performed (step S622). The AT first hit lottery is a lottery for determining the winning of the AT game without winning the AT game. The condition that the process of step S622 is performed is not during AT (AT flag OFF in step S601), AT is not won internally (AT internal flag OFF), and it is not a special mode (special flag OFF). Therefore, it is considered that the normal state in which neither the AT nor the precursor game is won, or the precursor game in which the AT is not won (during the flag).

FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the AT first hit lottery. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 63, the winning probability of the AT first hit is set based on the gaming state controlled when the AT first hit lottery is performed and the winning combination selected by the internal lottery. There is.

Here, the game state described in the lottery table of FIG. 63 is a “game state related to the winning combination lottery” (specifically, a game state related to the winning combination lottery) in which a different number is set in the internal lottery of the winning combination as shown in FIG. , General state, bonus internal state, bonus state), but is a "game state related to AT" in which a different number is set in the lottery related to the first hit of AT or a precursory game of AT, and thereafter, "AT lottery game state". Called.

According to FIG. 63, as a specific example of the AT lottery game state, the hell state, the low probability state, the high probability state, the ultra-high probability state, the special state 1, and the special state 2 are in the order of the winning probability of the first AT hit. , And special state 3 are prepared.

Briefly explaining each AT lottery game state, first, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning the first AT hit no matter what winning combination is selected. Next, the low probability state is the initial state of the AT lottery game state, and it is relatively difficult to win by the internal lottery. If the role is the strongest, and the bells in any order other than the bonus state may be included in the rare role), it can be expected to win the first AT to some extent. In particular, when comparing the winning probabilities of the same kind of rare role (for example, weak watermelon and strong watermelon), it is set to be easier to win in the "strong" type than in the "weak" type. These tendencies are the same in other AT lottery gaming states. In addition, if a winning combination other than the rare role (non-rare role), that is, a high winning combination that is relatively easy to win by internal lottery (specifically, replay and push order bell) is selected, any AT Even in the lottery game state, winning the first AT hit can hardly be expected.

In this example, the "low winning combination (rare role)", which is relatively difficult to win by the internal lottery, is a winning combination with a relatively high degree of expectation regarding advantageous games (for example, the first winning AT). Expected role ". On the other hand, the "highly-winning role (non-rare role)" other than the rare role is a "low-expected role" because it is a winning role with a lower degree of expectation regarding advantageous games than the "high-winning role".

The high-accuracy state is a gaming state in which the expectation of winning the first AT based on each winning combination is higher than that of the low-accuracy state, and the ultra-high-accuracy state has a higher expectation of winning than the high-accuracy state. It is a high game state.

Further, the special states 1 to 3 are dedicated gaming states controlled in the "special mode" in this example. In the special states 1 to 3, the expectation of winning the first AT hit is higher than in the above-mentioned AT lottery game state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state), and the winning role is a rare role. If so, there is a probability of winning the first AT with a probability of at least 55,000/65535. Further, according to FIG. 63, the special state 2 is higher than the special state 1, and the special state 3 is more highly advantageous than the special state 2 because the expectation of winning the first AT hit is higher.

It should be noted that the distribution in the lottery table shown in FIG. 63 is an example, and for example, if the winning combination is a rare combination in a special state, even if the distribution is performed such that the winning combination is always won at the first AT. good. Further, each of these states may shift to another state based on the winning combination, and such a transition lottery of the AT lottery gaming state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 71 and 74.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the "game state related to the winning combination lottery" is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state, the "game state related to AT" becomes any of the above AT lottery game states. Be controlled. Which of these AT lottery game states is controlled is managed by ON / OFF of "each state flag". "Each state flag" is an internal flag provided corresponding to each of the AT lottery game states, and is a low probability state flag, a high probability state flag, an ultra-high probability state flag, and a special state flag (special state 1 flag ~. Special state 3 flag), equivalent to the hell state flag. A plurality of these state flags are not turned on at the same time, and when only one of the state flags is turned on, the other state flags are turned off. For example, when controlled to the ultra-high accuracy state, the ultra-high accuracy state flag is turned ON and the other state flags are turned OFF among the state flags. The "each state flag" does not have to be an individual flag corresponding to the type of AT lottery game state, and is an internal flag that collectively manages all AT lottery game states (for example, the flag value is 1). When it is a low accuracy state, when it is 2, it may be a high accuracy state, and so on.

In step S623, it is determined by the AT first hit lottery in step S622 whether or not the AT first hit is won. If the AT first hit is won (YES in step S623), the process of step S624 is performed, and if the AT first hit is not won (NO in step S623), the process of step S632 is performed.

In step S624, a precursor lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute (shift) the “precursor game”.

Here, the "precursor game" and the "precursor effect" in the first embodiment will be described. As mentioned above, the "precursor game" is a special game in which a "precursor effect" can occur, and the precursory game is played over a predetermined number of games (multiple games) selected by lottery. The "precursor effect" is an effect that suggests or teaches whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state (in this case, the transition to the AT) is appropriate or not based on the result. The "precursor effect" is an effect that is continuously executed over a plurality of games, and specific examples of the effect are, for example, a "continuous effect" that is performed over a plurality of games and a suggestion effect that is completed in one game. It is formed by interweaving (for example, navigation teaching of small roles, title display, etc.). The details of the "continuous effect" will be described later in the description of the instruction function processing by the peripheral substrate (see FIG. 60).

In this example described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the precursory effect is always performed over a plurality of precursor games, and the final game of the precursory effect is the final game of the precursory game. Therefore, the success / failure result of the AT transition indicated by the precursory effect can be regarded as the result of the precursory game. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the precursor game is played in both the case where the AT first hit is won (at the time of AT winning) and the case where the AT first hit is not won (when the AT is not won). May be started. The precursory game (or precursory effect) played when the AT is won is called "main precursor", and the precursory game (or precursory effect) played when the AT is not won is called "gase precursor". In the case of this precursor, it is shown that the AT shifts at the end, and in the case of the gasse precursor, it is shown that the AT transition does not occur at the end.

It should be noted that the precursory game whose execution is determined in the instruction function processing according to the present invention not only includes the “precursor effect” in which the “continuous effect” is performed as described above, but also executes in a mode including various other effects. It is possible. For example, although it is not a continuous production with continuity, a "roughness production" in which some predetermined production occurs more frequently than usual (for example, a characteristic background production frequently occurs, or a color such as a character's dialogue is displayed. It is conceivable to perform (such as frequent occurrence of changing effects).

When such a "roughness effect" is used, as a pattern example of the precursor game (this precursor), a pattern of "roughness effect A" + "continuous effect A (precursor effect)", "continuous effect A" + "continuous effect A" + " Patterns such as "Rough effect A" + "Continuous effect B (precursor effect)", "Continuous effect A" + "Rough effect A" + "Rough effect B" + "Continuous effect B (precursor effect)" can be executed. Is. In the case of this precursor, it is necessary to finally announce the winning of the AT transition, so it is preferable that the precursor effect is performed at the end.

On the other hand, as an example of the pattern of the precursor game (Gase precursor), since the AT transition is not finally won, the precursor effect does not have to be performed at the end of the precursor, so in addition to the pattern possible with this precursor, It is possible to execute a pattern of only "roughness effect" or a pattern of combining "continuous effect" and "roughness effect" and ending with "roughness effect". In addition, in the case of a pattern that ends with "Rubbing effect" at the time of a sign of gassing, the end of "Continuous production (precursor effect)" performed before that is pretended to be the end of the precursor game, and "Rubbing effect" is a game after the precursor game. You may pretend that it is displayed. Further, in any of the precursor games (main precursor, gasse precursor), in addition to the "continuous production" and the "roughness production", the "normal production" which is the same as the normal time may be mixed.

As described above, the precursory game in the instruction function processing according to the present invention can be executed in various patterns, but in this example, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, any precursory game (main precursor, false precursor) may be used. , It is assumed that the game progresses in the pattern of "normal production" + "continuous production (precursor production)". At this time, as described above, the precursory effect is always performed over a plurality of games in the precursory game, and the final game of the precursory effect can be the final game of the precursory game.

In the precursory lottery in step S624, since the first AT hit is won in advance step S622, it is determined whether or not to play the precursory game (this precursor) before starting the AT. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the precursory lottery is performed even when the AT first hit lottery is not won (for example, step S633 described later), and in such a precursory lottery, the precursory lottery is performed. It is decided whether or not the game (slot sign) will be played, but in the case of the slot sign, although the precursor effect that can make the player expect that it may shift to AT is executed, it is actually No transition to AT is shown.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 determines whether or not the precursory game can be executed (for example, the precursory lottery in step S624) and determines the number of precursory games, which is the number of executed games (for example, step S626). Processing up to the precursory game number lottery), and subsequent processing related to the precursory game production (for example, displaying a suggestion during the precursory game, determining the production content and execution opportunity of the precursory effect and continuous effect, It is preferable that the process of executing the effect according to the determination result) is performed by the peripheral board (for example, the effect control board 510) that receives the precursor game number command from the main board 409. This is because when the main board 409 performs all or the majority of the above processing, the processing amount by the main board 409 becomes excessive, and the processing capacity of the main board 409 (the upper limit of the capacity is defined) overflows. This is to prevent it from happening. In recent gaming machines, as a result of the enhancement of the types and contents of the effects, the amount of data required for processing related to the effects is increasing. Considering such a background, it is not preferable to perform the processing related to the effect on the main board 409, and by distributing the processing load between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (effect control board 510) as described above, Not only can the processing capacity of the main board 409 be suppressed, but also the effect content (effect pattern) by the peripheral board that is not bound by the capacity limit can be enhanced. Details of the processing related to the production of the precursor game will be described later in the instruction function processing (FIG. 80, etc.) by the peripheral board.

64 to 66 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining a lottery table used for the precursory lottery. According to the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, in the precursory lottery, whether or not to execute the precursory game (yes / no) is drawn based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. FIG. 64 is an example of a lottery table used in the precursory lottery performed at the time of AT winning, in other words, a lottery table used in the precursory lottery of the present precursor. Further, FIG. 65 shows a precursory lottery performed when the first AT hit is not won (AT non-winning) in a non-special mode (for example, a state in which the AT lottery game state is controlled to a state other than the special state and the game is played). An example of the lottery table used in the above is shown, and FIG. 66 shows a precursory lottery performed when the AT is not won in a special mode (for example, a state in which the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state and the game is played). An example of the lottery table used in is shown. In other words, FIGS. 65 and 66 are lottery tables used for the precursory lottery.

In the precursory lottery of step S624, the lottery table of FIG. 64 is used. When the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 64 is used, the execution of the precursory game is determined in any AT lottery game state, but the precursory game is not executed by changing the distribution of presence / absence. May be prepared.

Next, in step S625, it is determined whether or not the precursory lottery of step S624 is won, that is, whether or not the execution of the precursory game is decided, and if it is won (YES), the process of step S626 is performed. If the game is performed and the game is not won (NO), the process of step S631 is performed.

In step S626, a lottery for the number of precursor games is performed to determine the number of games to be played (precursor games). 67 to 70 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 4) for explaining a lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery. The lottery table used for the precursor game number lottery is the same as the lottery table used for the precursor lottery (FIGS. 64 to 66), depending on whether or not there is a special mode when the lottery is performed and whether or not the AT is won. Different lottery tables are available. FIG. 67 is an example of a lottery table selected when an AT is won in a mode other than the special mode, FIG. 68 is an example of a lottery table selected when an AT is not won in a mode other than the special mode, and FIG. It is an example of the lottery table selected when the AT is won in the mode, and FIG. 70 is an example of the lottery table selected when the AT is not won in the special mode. In step S626, the lottery table of FIG. 67 is used.

According to the lottery table shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, in the precursor game number lottery, the precursor game number is drawn based on the winning combination and the AT lottery game state. Then, during the number of precursor games selected by the lottery, the precursor game is played, the precursor effect appears in the middle, and finally the notification of whether or not to shift to AT is performed. Regarding the distribution by the winning combination in each lottery table, in FIGS. 67 to 70, the winning combination is summarized into the above-mentioned "rare role" and "non-rare role (non-rare role)". These lottery tables may be separately implemented in different lottery tables for each winning combination, but as shown in FIGS. 67 to 70, the data held by the main board 409 can be obtained by making the lottery tables as common as possible. It has the effect of reducing capacity.

Comparing FIGS. 67 to 70, a relatively small number of precursor games (specifically, 4 games) is selected in the special mode, whereas a relatively long precursor game number (specifically, 4 games) is selected in the non-special mode. Specifically, 8 games or more) is selected.

Further, comparing FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, the number of precursor games at the time of AT non-winning (that is, the precursor of gasse precursor) at the time of AT winning (FIG. 67) and the time of AT non-winning (FIG. 68) other than the special mode. The number of games) is more likely to be selected, which is slightly smaller than the number of precursor games at the time of winning the AT (that is, the number of precursor games of this precursor). In addition, the maximum number of precursor games when the AT is not won is 32 games, while the maximum number of precursor games when the AT is won is 36 games, so the precursor games are a specific number of games (32 games). ) Is exceeded, at that point, a special effect can be achieved in which it is confirmed that this is a precursor to AT winning.

After the precursor game number lottery is performed in step S626, the precursor game number selected by the lottery is set in the variable data for the “precursor game number” (step S627). Then, by turning on (step S628) the "precursor game flag" which is one of the internal flags and turning on the AT internal flag (step S629), the precursor game starts in the subsequent games. The flag to be set is set. Then, since the start of the precursory game means that the special mode (special state) is not reached, the special state flag is turned off (step S630), and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

In step S631, although the AT first hit lottery was won but the precursory lottery was not won, the AT flag is turned ON in order to shift to the AT without performing the precursory game number lottery, and then the instruction function generation process is performed. To finish.

In step S632, processing is performed when it is determined in step S623 that the AT first hit lottery has not been won, but specifically, it is determined whether or not the precursor game flag is OFF (= 0). .. If it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is OFF (YES in step S632), the process of step S633 is performed, and if it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (step S632). NO), the process of step S641 is performed.

In step S633, a precursor lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the precursor game. The precursory lottery in step S633 is the same lottery process as in step S624 described above, but since the AT first hit is not won in step S623, whether or not to perform the precursory sign using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. Is drawn. According to the lottery table of FIG. 65, when a winning combination other than the rare role (non-rare role) is selected, the execution of the precursor game is not selected, but the weak rare role (weak watermelon, weak cherry, etc.) is selected. If (weak chance) is selected as the winning combination, it is more likely that the execution of the precursor game will be selected. If the winning combination is a strong rare role, the possibility that the precursory game will be executed is even higher, and if it is the strongest, the precursory game is always selected to be executed.

Next, in step S634, it is determined whether or not the precursory lottery of step S633 has been won, that is, whether or not the execution of the precursory game has been decided, and if it has been won (YES), the process of step S635 is performed. If it is not won (NO), the process of step S638 is performed.

In step S635, a lottery for the number of precursor games for determining the number of precursor games to be played is performed, and in step S636, the number of precursor games determined by the lottery is set in the variable data for the "number of precursor games". In step S637, the "precursor game flag" is turned ON (= 1). Since the processing of steps S635 to S637 is the same as the processing of steps S626 to S628 described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S637, the process of step S638 is performed.

In step S638, a lottery (state transition lottery A) relating to the state transition of the AT lottery game state is performed. In the state transition lottery A, when the current AT lottery game state is the low accuracy state, the high accuracy state, or the ultra-high accuracy state, which of the low accuracy state, the high accuracy state, or the ultra-high accuracy state is the AT lottery. It is a lottery to decide whether to shift to the game state (including continuation of the current state). In step S678 or the like of FIG. 59, which will be described later, when the current AT lottery game state is a special state (special states 1 to 3), which of the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state is used. The state transition lottery B for drawing whether to shift to the AT lottery game state is shown.

Here, FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery A. 71, 72, and 73 are lottery tables for the state transition lottery A used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state, respectively. This is just one example. When the state transition lottery is performed, which AT lottery game state is currently controlled can be recognized by referring to the value of each state flag.

The features of the lottery table shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 will be briefly described. With reference to FIG. 71 used in the low probability state, in the low probability state, unless the winning combination is the strongest, there is almost no transition (promotion) to the ultra high probability state, which is a realistic possibility. As for the sex, it can be seen that when the winning role is a rare role, the transition (promotion) to the high probability state can be selected. In particular, it is most likely to be promoted to a high-accuracy state when playing a weak rare role, and specifically, promotion to a high-accuracy state is selected at 16384/65535.

Refer to FIG. 72, which is used in the high-probability state. In the high-probability state, if the winning combination is a rare role, the winning combination does not shift (demotion) to the low-probability state, and the winning combination is replay, push order bell, 2 types. It can be seen that there is only a fairly low probability (1310/65535) of being demoted if the BB is off. It can be seen that there is a certain possibility of transition (promotion) in the ultra-high accuracy state, which is the upper state, when the winning role is a rare role (especially, a bell in any push order or a weak rare role). In the high probability state as a whole, the state is mostly maintained or promoted, and it is rarely demoted to the low probability state.

With reference to FIG. 73, which is used in the ultra-high probability state, in the ultra-high probability state, if the winning combination is a rare role, the winning combination does not move to a lower state (demotion), and the winning combination is replayed and the push order bell. It can be seen that there is a possibility of being demoted to a low probability state or a high probability state only with a fairly low probability in the case of the second type BB, which is out of order. That is, in many cases, even if the state transition lottery A is performed in the ultra-high accuracy state, the ultra-high accuracy state is maintained, so that the state with high benefits regarding AT is maintained.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the state transition lottery A relating to the state transition of the AT lottery gaming state is not limited to the AT game, and any gaming state during the non-AT game (for example, general). It may be performed in the same manner in the state (state and bonus internal state). Then, in the state transition lottery A during such a non-AT game, the same lottery table as illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 may be used, or different distributions are set according to the game state. The lottery table may be used.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the state transition of the AT lottery game state is drawn using the lottery table in which different transition probabilities are set based on the winning combination, the winning probability of each winning combination is obtained. The number of games in which each AT lottery gaming state is continuously controlled (so-called average number of staying games) can be calculated based on the selection ratio of the transition destination state. Specifically, for example, using FIGS. 49 (lottery table of winning combination lottery) and FIGS. 71 to 73 (lottery table of state transition lottery A), the average number of staying games in each AT lottery game state in the bonus internal state can be determined. By calculation, the average number of staying games in the low-accuracy state is about 120 games, the average number of staying games in the high-accuracy state is about 25 games, and the average number of staying games in the ultra-high-accuracy state is about 36 games. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the average number of staying games in each AT lottery game state is not limited to the above calculation example, and for example, each average number of staying games is set in advance to correspond to the setting. As such, the winning probability of each winning combination and the selection ratio of the transition destination state may be adjusted.

Further, in the case of the above calculation example, the longest average staying game number is about 120 games in the low probability state, and the shortest average staying game number is about 25 games in the high probability state. On the other hand, the number of staying games in the "special state", which is another AT lottery game state, is selected from between 2 games and 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), so that the average number of staying games in the special state is , The number of games is shorter than the average number of staying games in any of the low-accuracy state, high-accuracy state, and ultra-high-accuracy state. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in the previous stage, the average number of staying games in each AT lottery game state can be arbitrarily set, but the average number of staying games in the special state is the other AT lottery games. It is preferable that the number of games is relatively shorter than the average number of staying games in the state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state).

After the state transition lottery A in step S638 is performed, each state flag is turned ON (step S639) so as to correspond to the state of the transition destination determined in the lottery, and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S632 that the precursor game flag is ON (NO in step S632), the process of step S641 is to subtract 1 from the value of the variable data of the “number of precursor games”. Then, in step S642, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. When it is determined that the number of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S642), it means that the precursor games have ended, so the precursor game flag is turned off (step S643). If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S642), it means that the precursor games are continuing, and the process of step S649 described later is performed.

After the processing of step S643 is performed, a special state transition lottery for drawing whether or not to shift to the "special mode (special state)" is performed (step S644).

Here, the conditions for shifting to the special mode (special state) in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the precursory effect of displaying (suggesting, teaching) whether or not to shift to AT can be performed as a result, but the precursory effect is completed in the precursory game. Not only the pattern of returning to the gaming state before the start of the precursory game (or precursory effect) (the gaming state here means the AT lottery gaming state), but also another special gaming state (special state). May be controlled (transition to special mode). If the transition to AT is confirmed by the precursory effect, the AT game will start as it is, so there will be no transition to the special mode. Therefore, such a special state is a special AT lottery game state that can be controlled only after the transition to AT is not shown in the precursor game (that is, the precursor of Gase), and in this example, it is controlled to the special state. The game situation that progresses is called "special mode".

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the end of the sign of gassing, it is drawn by lottery whether to shift to the special mode (control to the special state), and if the lottery is won, the slot machine 1 is controlled to the special state. The period (number of special state games) to be played is determined by lottery. Then, the game progresses in the special mode until the number of special state games is exhausted, and the AT lottery, the precursory lottery, and the like are performed again based on the winning combination selected during that time. Here, one of the features of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is that the lottery regarding the AT in the special mode is performed in a situation in which the lottery regarding the AT in the special mode is performed in a preferential situation than before the execution of the sign of the gassing, and such a special mode. By preparing, even if the transition to AT is denied by the precursor of Gase, it is possible to shift to the special mode with high expectation for AT, and the expectation of the player due to the precursor of Gase is lowered. It is possible to suppress the above and maintain the expectation for the special game (AT game). It should be noted that the lottery related to AT is given preferential treatment in the special mode, for example, in the lottery table of the AT first hit lottery shown in FIG. 63, the AT first hit winning probability in the case of the special state 1 to the special state 3 is given preferential treatment. It is shown to be. The special state 1 to the special state 3 are game states set separately so that the degree of such preferential treatment is different, and the degree of preferential treatment is higher in the order of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3.

In this example, it is assumed that which of the special state 1 to the special state 3 is controlled is determined based on the gaming state when the transition to the special state is determined. Specifically, when the transition to the special state is decided in the low probability state, the special state 1 is selected as the special state of the transition destination, and similarly, in the case of the high probability state, the special state 2 is selected. , In the case of ultra-high accuracy state, special state 3 is selected. By doing so, the special state of the transition destination is given preferential treatment according to the degree of advantage of the gaming state before the transition to the special state (low probability state <high probability state <ultra high probability state) (special state). 1 <special state 2 <special state 3) can be performed. Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to having a one-to-one correspondence between the gaming state before the transition and the special state of the transition destination as in the above example. As another example, for example, when the transition to the special state is decided in the low probability state, either the special state 1 or the special state 2 is drawn as the transition destination state, and similarly, the high probability state is obtained. In that case, either the special state 2 or the special state 3 may be drawn by lottery, and in the case of the ultra-high accuracy state, the state may be changed to the special state 3 without fail.

Further, in the processes shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, a special state transition lottery is performed in the final game of the Gase precursor, and when the lottery is won, the special mode is shifted immediately after the Gase precursor is completed. By performing such a process, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not shift to the special mode until the sign of the ghost reaches the final game, so that the AT shift is not denied. Therefore, even if it is a sign of a mess, it is possible to entertain the player whether or not to win the AT transition until the final game.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the timing of shifting to the special mode after the end of the sign of Gase is not limited to the immediate transition after the end of the sign of Gase as described above. For example, a relatively short waiting period (standby game) may be provided between the end of the Gase precursor and the transition to the special mode (however, the standby game period may be shorter than the number of games of the Gase precursor. preferable). When such a standby game is provided, it is preferable to control the standby game to a specific effect state during the standby game. As the specific effect state, for example, a high frequency effect mode in which a predetermined effect occurs frequently can be considered. By controlling to the high-frequency production mode during the standby game, it is possible to generate production over multiple games of the standby game, so that a production similar to a precursor effect (short precursor) can be generated across multiple games. It can be realized and can be expected to improve the playability. In addition, when a standby game is provided, even if the precursory game is a precursory game, it can be expected to shift to the special mode when a production that can be presumed to be a standby game occurs after the end of the game. It can be expected to have the effect of maintaining the interest of the person.

In step S644, a special state transition lottery for drawing whether or not to shift to the special mode as described above is performed using a predetermined lottery table. FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state transition lottery. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery table of the special state transition lottery is changed to a special state based on the winning combination of the current game and the current AT lottery game state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state). The winning rate that is controlled (shifts to a special state) is set. Specifically, if the winning combination is a rare role, the player will always win the transition to the special mode regardless of the AT lottery game state. When the winning combination is a non-rare role, the higher the AT lottery game state is, the easier it is to win the transition to the special mode. Even if it is a non-rare role, the transition to the special mode is won at a rate of more than half (32768/65535). As described above, when the transition to the special state is decided, the special state 1 to the special state 1 to the special state is based on the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state) at the time of the decision. It is assumed that which of the states 3 is controlled is determined.

Then, in step S645, it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode has been won in the special state transition lottery in step S644, and if the transition to the special mode is won (YES in step S645), steps S646 and subsequent steps are performed. If the process is performed and the transition to the special mode is not won (NO in step S645), the process of step S649 described later is performed.

In step S646, after receiving the winning in the special state transition lottery in step S644, the period for controlling the special mode (the number of special state games) is determined by lottery (special state game number lottery). FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table used for the special state game number lottery. According to FIG. 75, the number of special state games is drawn from among different distributions depending on whether the winning combination is a rare role or a non-rare role (non-rare role), and the winning combination is a non-rare role. In some cases, it is selected between 2 games and 9 games, and when the winning combination is a rare role, it is selected between 2 games and 20 games. In the case of the lottery table of FIG. 75, when the winning combination is a rare role, not only the expectation of the maximum number of games is high, but also the average number of games is large, so it can be expected that the special mode will continue for a long time. Since the special mode is given preferential treatment regarding the AT over the game state before the execution of the precursor game (or precursor effect), the fact that the special mode continues for a long time means that the expectation for the AT is higher. ..

Next, in step S647, the number of special state games selected in the special state game number lottery in step S646 is set in the variable data "number of special state games" for indicating the number of special state games, and then the special state flag is set. Turn it ON (step S648) to end the instruction function generation process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S642 that the number of precursor games is not 0, or if it is determined in step S645 that the transition to the special mode has not been won, the state transition lottery A is processed in step S649. Is done. The state transition lottery A in step S649 is the same as the state transition lottery A described in step S638, and the state of the transition destination is changed by using the lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) corresponding to the current AT lottery state. It is determined.

Then, in step S650, each state flag corresponding to the state of the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery A in step S649 is turned ON, and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

The above is a description of each process shown in FIG. 58. Hereinafter, each process shown in FIG. 59 will be described. The process shown in FIG. 59 is a process to be performed subsequently when it is determined in step S621 of FIG. 58 that the special state flag is ON (NO in step S621). In FIG. 59, when the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 58 is performed, the detailed description thereof may be omitted.

First, in FIG. 59, the AT first hit lottery is performed in step S661. Since the AT first hit lottery in step S661 is the same as the process described in step S622, the details will be omitted.

Next, in step S662, it is determined whether or not the hell state flag is OFF (= 0). As mentioned above, the hell state is a special AT lottery game state in which there is no possibility of winning the first AT hit no matter what winning combination is selected. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the slot machine 1 is controlled to a special state after the end of the precursor game (precursor) in which the winning result for the transition to AT is not shown by the precursor effect. Then, when a rare role is selected as a winning combination in a game period (special mode) controlled in a special state and the player wins the first hit of the AT, a precursory effect indicating the winning result for the transition to the AT is displayed. The precursory game that occurs (this precursor) is executed. During the period when this precursor is executed, since the transition winning to AT is confirmed, even if further AT winning is performed, it will be a useless game. Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the AT first hit is won in the special mode and the present precursor is executed, the period of the present precursor is controlled to the "hell state", so that the AT is uselessly won. Is prevented from occurring. Also, when shifting from the special mode to the sign of Gase, it is possible to control the state to hell.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the slot machine 1 is controlled to the above-mentioned "hell state", not only the AT winning may be suppressed, but also a privilege advantageous to the player may be given. Specifically, for example, the AT addition lottery for adding the number of AT games may be performed (the AT addition lottery may be made easier than in the normal AT game). The process related to the AT addition lottery may be the same as the AT addition lottery performed in the AT internal state described in step S603.

If it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is OFF (YES in step S662), the process of step S663 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not OFF (ON), (YES). NO of step S662), the process of step S681 described later is performed.

In step S663, whether or not the winning combination of this game is other than replay, push order bell, type 2 BB, or "out of place" (that is, whether or not the winning combination is a "rare role") is determined. Judgment is made by referring to the activated condition device. In this example, the winning combination, which is the standard for this judgment, is referred to as a "rare role" for the sake of brevity, and it is not always necessary to limit the winning combination to a specific "rare role". It may be limited to "rare role". If it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is a "rare combination" (YES in step S663), the process of step S664 is performed, and if it is determined that the winning combination is other than the "rare combination" (YES). NO) in step S663 and the process of step S671 are performed.

The process of step S664 is a process performed when a rare combination is won in the special mode. With reference to FIG. 64 (a lottery table used in the precursory lottery performed at the time of AT winning), it can be seen that if the AT is won when the winning combination is a rare combination, the precursory game always occurs. Further, referring to FIG. 66 (a lottery table used in the precursory lottery performed when the AT is not won in the state controlled by the special mode), when the winning combination is a rare combination, the AT first hit lottery is performed. Even if the player does not win (AT is not won), it can be seen that the precursory game always occurs (corresponding to the situation when the process of step S672 described later is performed). Therefore, the transition to the precursor game can be confirmed by performing the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown) before the process of step S664 is performed.

As mentioned above, when the mode is controlled to the special mode, if the rare role is selected as the winning combination, the precursor game will always occur even if the AT first hit lottery is not won (AT non-winning). Therefore, it is a gaming state that can easily lead to continuous production (precursor production in a precursor game). Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game state is such that continuous production is likely to occur, such as by displaying a screen such as "Preparing for continuous production" as the display in the special mode. Also, paying attention to the fact that a precursor game (and continuous production) will occur if a rare role is won in the special mode, a screen display such as "What if I draw a rare role now?" Is performed as a display in the special mode. You may make the player expect to win the rare role. In any case, the special mode can be regarded as a mode that leads to the subsequent precursor game (or precursor effect or continuous effect), so in a broad sense, it is included in the "subsequent precursor game (or precursor effect or continuous effect)". Can also include special modes.

Then, in step S664, since the execution of the precursory game is confirmed, the precursory game number lottery is performed, and as the process following the lottery, the set of the precursory game number drawn (step S665) and the precursory game flag ON (step S666) is performed. Since the processing of steps S664 to S666 is the same as the processing described in steps 626 to S628 of FIG. 58, details are omitted, but in the precursor game number lottery of step S664, it is shown in FIG. 69 or FIG. 70. A lottery table (a lottery table selected when the AT is won in the special mode / when the AT is not won) is used.

After that, in step S667, it is determined whether or not the AT first hit is won by the AT first hit lottery in step S661. If it is determined that the player has won the first AT hit (YES in step S667), the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S668), and then the process of step S669 is performed. If it is not determined that the player has won the first AT (NO in step S667), the process of step S669 is performed.

In step S669, since it is confirmed that the precursory game is started (precursor game flag ON) from the progress so far, the special state flag is turned off. Further, since the precursor game is being executed (during the precursor game), the state should be controlled to the hell state. Therefore, in step S670, the hell state flag is turned ON and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S663 that the winning combination is other than the "rare combination" (NO in step S663), whether or not the winning combination was won by the AT first hit lottery in step S661 as the process of step S671. Is determined.

If it is determined in the determination process of step S671 that the AT first hit is won (YES in step S671), the process of step S672 is performed. When the process of step S672 is performed, as described above in step S664, the situation is such that the precursor game is always generated. Therefore, the transition to the precursor game can be confirmed by performing the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 (not shown) before the process of step S672 is performed.

Then, in step S672, a lottery for the number of precursor games is performed, and then the number of precursor games selected in the lottery is set in the variable data "number of precursor games" (step S673), and the precursor game flag is turned ON (step S673). Step S674). Since the processes of steps S672 to S674 are the same as the processes described in steps S664 to S666 and steps 626 to S628 of FIG. 58, the details will be omitted. After that, the AT internal flag is turned ON (step S675), and the processing after step S669 described above is performed.

If it is not determined in the determination process of step S671 that the AT first hit is won (NO in step S671), the process of step S676 is performed.

The process of step S676 is performed in a situation where the rare role is not won in the special mode and the AT first hit is not won. Referring to FIG. 66, the precursor game is not executed in such a situation. Therefore, by making the precursor lottery as shown in step S624 of FIG. 58 performed before the process of step S676 is performed (not shown), it is possible to confirm that the game does not shift to the precursor game.

Then, in step S676, the value of the "number of special state games", which is variable data for indicating the number of games in the special mode, is subtracted by 1. After that, in step S677, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of special state games is 0, and if it is determined to be 0, it means the end of the special mode. After the processing is performed, the instruction function generation processing is terminated. Further, when it is determined in step S677 that the value of the number of special state games is not 0, it means that the special mode is continued, so that the instruction function processing is terminated without performing the processing of steps S678 to S680. ..

In step S678, a lottery (state transition lottery B) relating to the state transition of the AT lottery game state is performed. The state transition lottery B shifts to any AT lottery game state among the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state when the current AT lottery game state is any of the special states 1 to 3. Or (including the continuation of the current state) is drawn by lottery.

Here, FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the lottery table used for the state transition lottery B. 76, 77, and 78 are the lottery tables for the state transition lottery B used when the currently controlled AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state 1, the special state 2, and the special state 3, respectively. This is just an example. When the state transition lottery is performed, which AT lottery game state is currently controlled can be recognized by referring to the value of each state flag (particularly the special state flag).

In each of the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 76 to 78, the state of the transition destination is drawn based on the winning combination. Referring to FIG. 76, when controlled to the special state 1, the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state is not performed, and when the winning combination is a rare combination, the transition to the high accuracy state is always selected. If the winning combination is a non-rare combination, the transition to the low probability state or the high probability state is selected to the same extent. Referring to FIG. 77, when the special state 2 is controlled, the state does not shift to the low probability state, and the transition to the high probability state or the ultra-high probability state is selected, although the degree varies depending on the winning combination. Will be done. It should be noted that when the winning combination is a rare role, it tends to be easier to select the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state than when it is a non-rare role. Referring to FIG. 78, when the special state 3 is controlled, the transition to the ultra-high accuracy state is always selected without shifting to the low-accuracy state or the high-accuracy state. In this way, comparing FIGS. 76 to 78, the AT lottery game state (low probability state <high probability state <ultra high probability state), which has a high advantage in the relationship of special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3, is obtained. It can be seen that the transition of is easy to select, and from this point as well, it can be seen that the degree of advantage is high in the special state 1 <special state 2 <special state 3.

Then, after the state transition lottery B in step S678 is performed, the special state flag is turned off because the special mode ends (step S679), and the state of the transition destination determined in the state transition lottery B in step S678 is reached. Each status flag is turned ON (step S680) so as to correspond, and the instruction function generation process is terminated.

Next, the processing after step S681 performed when it is determined in step S662 that the hell state flag is not OFF (ON) will be described. The situation in which the process of step S681 is performed is that the AT internal flag is not ON (step S602), the special state flag is not OFF (step S621), and the hell state flag is not OFF (step S662). For example, it corresponds to a state in which the precursor game (flag precursor) is executed without winning the AT after the special mode is set.

Since the processes performed in steps S681 to S689 are the same as the processes described in steps S641 to S648 of FIG. 58 except for the process of step S688, details are omitted and only a simple flow will be described.

First, the number of precursor games is subtracted (step S681), and it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games has become 0 (step S682). When the number of precursor games becomes 0, the precursor game flag is turned off (step S683), a special state transition lottery is performed (step S684), and it is determined whether or not the transition to the special mode is won. (Step S685) If the transition to the special mode is won, a special state game number lottery is performed (step S686), the lottery number of games is set to the "special state game number" (step S687), and the special state game number is set. After the status flag is turned ON (step S689), the instruction function generation process is terminated. However, since the mode shifts from the hell state to the special mode at this time, an additional process of turning off the hell state flag is performed between step S687 and step S689 (step S688).

If the transition to the special mode is not won in the process of step S685, the state transition lottery C is performed (step S690). Here, the state transition lottery C is a lottery for the transition destination of the AT lottery gaming state, as in the state transition lottery A described in step S638 of FIG. 58. However, in this example, in the state transition lottery C, the transition to the low probability state is determined with a 100% probability, so that the player is forcibly dropped from the next game to the low probability state.

Here, in the situation where the processing of step S690 is performed, when the AT internal flag is OFF (NO in step S602) and the hell state flag is ON (NO in step S662), the number of precursor games becomes 0 (step S682). YES), and further, when the transition to the special state is denied by the special state transition lottery (NO in step S685). Explaining the specific game situation, after the end of the precursory effect, it shifts to the special mode, and by winning the rare role during the special mode, the precursory effect is performed again (during this time, it is controlled to the hell mode). Regardless, it corresponds to the case where the AT was not won, and in this example, in such a case, after the end of the precursory effect after the special mode (that is, at the end of the hell mode), it is forced to a low probability state. To migrate to.

In the present embodiment, winning a rare role, which is a highly expected role, in the special mode (meaning that it is controlled to a hell state in terms of the AT lottery game state) shifts to a mere precursor game. This is a very advantageous game situation for the player compared to the subsequent transition to the special mode (however, a mere precursor game or a transition to the special mode is also an advantageous game situation for the player). .. However, if the special game (AT) cannot be won as a result of being able to reach such an extremely advantageous game situation, the degree of advantage is significantly lower than that of other game states. I try to fall. That is, in the present embodiment, when a highly advantageous gaming situation (rare role winning in the special mode) appears, but an advantageous result (AT winning) cannot be obtained, it is recoiled. By setting it to the worst state (low accuracy state), it is possible to realize a well-balanced gaming machine without making the specifications only sweet for the player. Also, from the perspective of the hall, a gaming machine equipped with only modes that are advantageous to the player (specifically, precursor mode, special mode, precursor effect after the special mode, etc.) is less likely to give a disadvantage to the hall. However, if the result of a very favorable gaming situation ends in failure (AT non-winning), the profit on the hall side can be secured by shifting to the worst state. Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game period controlled to the special state is shorter on average than other general AT lottery gaming states (low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state). By doing so, the game balance can be maintained.

After the state transition lottery C in step S690 is performed, a process of turning off the hell state flag is performed in order to shift from the previous hell state to the gaming state drawn in the state transition lottery C (step S691). ), Each state flag (that is, the low probability state flag) corresponding to the state of the transition destination selected in the state transition lottery C is turned ON (step S692), and then the instruction function generation process is terminated.

As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the instruction function generation processing by the main board 409 (step S61 in FIG. 57) is performed, and based on the result of the processing, FIG. 57 shows. The processing after step S62 of the indicated instruction function processing is performed.

[11-3-2-2. Instruction function processing (peripheral board)]
Next, the instruction function processing by the peripheral board (specifically, for example, the effect control board 510) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. By performing the instruction function processing by the peripheral board in parallel with the instruction function processing by the main board 409, it is possible to shorten the time required for the overall processing, but at least, as shown in step S701 described later, the conditions. It is preferable that the time is after the timing when the device command can be received.

First, in step S701 of FIG. 60, the condition device command transmitted from the main board 409 is received. The condition device command is a command that can identify the condition device (which may be a plurality of condition devices) whose operation is permitted based on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery regarding the winning combination performed on the main board 409. It is formalized. The specific format of the command may be any commonly used command format, for example, a format in which a bit is set and notified only to the conditional device whose operation is permitted from all the conditional devices. , A format in which only the identification number associated with the condition device for which operation is permitted is notified as information can be considered.

Although not shown, the peripheral board (effect control board 510) has each state flag (special state flag) used in the instruction function generation process by the main board 409 before and after receiving the condition device command in step S701. , Including the hell state flag) is received by a command or the like. Further, it is assumed that the AT flag, the AT internal flag, and the like are also transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral boards by appropriate commands or the like.

After receiving the condition device command in step S701, in step S702, it is determined whether or not the hell state flag is ON. If it is determined that the hell state flag is ON (YES in step S702), the process of step S703 is performed, and if it is determined that the hell state flag is not ON (OFF), the process is performed (step S702). NO), the process of step S721 described later is performed.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not the "precursor game number command" for notifying the number of precursor games has been received. The "precursor game number command" shall be transmitted as a command to the peripheral boards at an appropriate timing when the execution of the precursor game is determined in the instruction function generation process of the main board 409 (precursor game flag ON). .. If it is determined that the precursor game number command has been received (YES in step S703), the process of step S704 is performed, and if it is determined that the precursor game number command has not been received (NO in step S703), As the process of step S718, a process for displaying various effects is performed, and the instruction function process is terminated.

When the process of step S718 is performed, it is not in the hell state and the precursor game is not started. Therefore, as a specific "various effect display", for example, if it is in AT, it is in AT. A predetermined effect screen or the like is displayed to indicate to the player that this is the case.

In step S704, it is determined whether or not the "continuous effect flag" is OFF. The "continuous effect flag" is an internal flag that is turned "ON" when the "precursor effect" including the "continuous effect" is being executed.

Here, the "continuous production" in the first embodiment will be described. This "continuous production" corresponds to a production in which the content of the continuous production is displayed over a predetermined number of games from one game to a plurality of games in the precursory production executed during the precursory game. , At the end of the "continuous production", the production result of teaching (suggesting / notifying) whether or not the special game (here, AT) is appropriate is displayed. Therefore, the result of the continuous production is also the result of the precursory effect, and more specifically, the result of the precursory game.

Here, an example of the relationship between the "precursor effect" and the "continuous effect" in the first embodiment will be described. For example, "title display" is performed in the first game of the precursory effect. This title display may be a display indicating the content of the continuous production that follows (for example, "the battle of the main character vs. the enemy A!"), Or a display that simply indicates the start of the continuous production (for example, "the start of the judgment chance"). ! ”) And so on. Then, in the second and subsequent games of the precursory effect (corresponding to the first and subsequent games of the continuous effect), the effect content of the continuous effect (corresponding to the "continuous effect content" described later) is displayed. Then, in the final game of the continuous production (which is also the final game of the precursory production), the result of the continuous production (here, whether or not the AT transition is possible, but it may be the transition to another advantageous gaming state) is announced. (Suggestion / teaching). In addition, the next game after the display of the continuous production content may be set as the final game of the continuous production, and the result of the continuous production may be announced.

In the following description of the instruction function process, the "continuous effect" means a continuous effect related to such an AT transition. If the precursory effect or continuous effect is executed over "multiple games", this "multiple games" is a multiple game by a game (this game) in which an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed for each game. It may be present, or it may be a pseudo plurality of games created by changing the reel 301 over a plurality of times during this game.

In step S704, if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is OFF (YES in step S704), the process of step S705 is performed, and if it is determined that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (ON). (NO in step S704), the process of step S711 is performed.

In step S705, a continuous effect generation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a “precursor effect (which may be regarded as a continuous effect)”. In the above example, when the precursory effect is generated, the title is displayed in the first game of the precursory effect, and the continuous effect is generated in the remaining games of the precursory effect. Therefore, the continuous effect is generated by the continuous effect generation lottery. It can be considered that it is decided whether or not to let it.

79 and 80 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a lottery table used for the continuous effect generation lottery. FIG. 79 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is ON, and FIG. 80 is an example of a lottery table used when the AT internal flag is OFF. In both FIGS. 79 and 80, it is distributed so as to draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the precursory effect (or continuous effect) based on the number of precursory games (that is, the number of remaining precursory games) at that time. Is set.

According to the examples of FIGS. 79 and 80, when the number of remaining precursor games is 5 games or more or 1 game or less, the occurrence of the precursor effect is not won and the number of remaining precursor games is 2 to 4 games. Only in case will you be given the opportunity to win the occurrence of the precursory effect. Moreover, in the lottery tables of FIGS. 79 and 80, the occurrence of the precursor effect is always won (255/255) when at least the number of remaining precursor games reaches 2 games. Comparing the case where the AT is internally won (FIG. 79) and the case where the AT is not internally won (FIG. 80), the case where the AT is internally won is the AT. It is easier to win the occurrence of the precursory effect at the stage when the number of remaining precursory games is large than when it is not internally elected. By performing a continuous effect generation lottery using such a lottery table, when a precursory effect (or continuous effect) occurs, the more the effect continues, the higher the expectation that the player will reach the result of winning the AT, which is advantageous for the player. Can be high.

An example of the breakdown of the precursory production according to the number of remaining precursory games will be explained. In the continuous production generation lottery, for example, when the number of remaining precursor games is 2, if the occurrence of the precursor effect is won, the title is displayed in the first game (since it is executed immediately, the number of remaining precursor games is 2). In the second game (the number of remaining precursor games is 1), the first game of the continuous production content (the first game of the continuous production; the same applies hereinafter) is displayed, and the result of the precursor production (or the continuous production) is performed. Is displayed.

Further, in the continuous production generation lottery, for example, when the generation of the precursory effect is won when the number of remaining precursory games is 3, the title is the first game (since it is executed immediately, the number of remaining precursory games is 3). The display is performed, the first game (the first game of the continuous production) of the continuous production content is displayed in the second game (the number of remaining precursor games 2), and the third game (the number of remaining precursor games 1) is displayed. The second game of the continuous effect content (the second game of the continuous effect) is displayed, and the result of the precursor effect (or the continuous effect) is displayed.

Further, in the continuous production generation lottery, for example, when the generation of the precursory effect is won when the number of remaining precursory games is 4, the title is the title in the first game (since it is executed immediately, the number of remaining precursory games is 4). The display is performed, the first game (the first game of the continuous production) of the continuous production content is displayed in the second game (the number of remaining precursor games 3), and the third game (the number of remaining precursor games 2) is displayed. The second game of the continuous production content (the second game of the continuous production) is displayed, and the third game of the continuous production content (the third game of the continuous production) is displayed in the fourth game (the number of remaining precursor games is 1). Is performed, and the result is displayed by the precursor effect (or continuous effect).

In step S706, it is determined in the continuous production generation lottery of step S705 whether or not the occurrence of the precursor effect is won, and if it is determined that the prize is won (YES in step S706), the process of step S707 is performed and the prize is won. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (NO in step S706), the instruction function process is terminated.

Then, in step S707, a continuous effect content lottery for determining the content of the precursor effect (or continuous effect) is performed for the precursor effect won in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705. 81 and 82 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a lottery table used for the continuous effect content lottery. In cases other than the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 81 is used, and in the case of the special mode, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 82 is used.

In FIGS. 81 and 82, four types of production contents, "weak story", "strong story", "weak battle", and "strong battle", are prepared, and each of them is based on the ON / OFF of the AT internal flag. The lottery will be held with different distributions. These four types of production contents have a relationship of "weak story" <"weak battle" <"strong story" <"strong battle" as the degree of expectation (reliability) that leads to AT winning, and are similar. In the production content (story system, battle system), the production of "strong" has higher reliability than the production of "weak".

From the above, the reliability (expectation that leads to AT winning) in the precursory effect (or continuous effect) is determined by the number of continuous games of the precursory effect (determined by the continuous effect generation lottery using FIGS. 79 and 80). It can be seen that the effect is variably realized depending on the effect content of the precursory effect (determined by the continuous effect content lottery using FIGS. 81 and 82).

Further, in the first embodiment, when the continuous production content lottery is performed in the special mode (using FIG. 82), the selected production content is determined to always continue for 4 games including the title display. That is, when the game is controlled to a special state, in the continuous effect generation lottery in step S705, when the number of remaining precursor games is 4, the precursor effect is always won (not). (Illustrated), no matter what kind of effect content is selected in the continuous effect content lottery in step S707 thereafter, the precursor effect can be continued for 4 games. As mentioned above, the breakdown of the precursory effects of these four games is that the first one game is the title display and the remaining three games display the contents of the continuous effect, and especially in the final game, the result of the precursory effect (or continuous effect). Is displayed.

When the effect content of the continuous effect displayed in the precursor effect is determined by the above-mentioned continuous effect content lottery, in step S708, the generation of the precursor effect based on the determined effect content is started. Then, since the precursor effect is being executed, the continuous effect flag is turned ON (step S709), and the instruction function process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S704 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF (that is, the precursor effect is being executed), it is determined as the process of step S711 whether or not the number of precursor games is 0. The number of precursor games can be confirmed by referring to the precursor game number command confirmed to be received in step S703. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is 0 (YES in step S711), the process of step S712 is performed as the process associated with the end of the precursor game. If it is determined that the number of precursor games is not 0 (NO in step S711), the precursor game is in progress and the precursor effect is being executed. Therefore, as the process of step S717, the precursor effect currently being executed is displayed. Display (continuous effect display) is performed. The precursor effect displayed by the process of step S717 is a precursor effect based on the effect content determined in step S707, and by referring to the number of games since the precursor effect is started, the precursor effect can be accurately predicted. It is possible to display the effect.

In step S712, it is determined whether or not the special state flag is ON. As described above, ON / OFF of the special state flag is set in the instruction function generation process by the main board 409, and in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, for example, a precursor game (precursor effect) is played. It may be controlled to a special state (become a special mode) after it is finished. Then, when it is determined that the special state flag is ON (YES in step S712), a predetermined display (special state screen display) that allows the player to recognize that the special mode is set is displayed as the process of step S713. After outputting, the instruction function processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S712 that the special state flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S712), it is determined whether or not the AT internal flag is ON (step S714). If it is determined that the AT internal flag is ON (YES in step S714), it means that the continuous production and the precursor game have ended in the AT internal winning state, so that the AT game is started, so that in step S715, As a process, a predetermined display (AT start screen) indicating the start of AT is output, and then the instruction function process is terminated. If it is determined that the AT internal flag is not ON (OFF) (NO in step S714), various effect displays are output as the process of step S716, and then the instruction function process is terminated.

Next, the processing after step S721 will be described. The processing after step S721 is a processing performed when the hell state flag is ON, that is, the hell state is controlled. The situation controlled to the hell state is, for example, when the precursor game is played after the special mode, and when the lottery table of FIG. 63 is used, the AT first hit is not won in the hell state.

As a process in such a hell state, first, in step S721, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is OFF. Since this process is the same as the process of step S704, the details will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is OFF, a lottery for generating continuous effects is performed (not shown, but the same as in step S705), and then a lottery for the contents of continuous effects is performed in step S722. In step S723, the generation of the precursor effect according to the lottery result is started, in step S724, the continuous effect flag is turned ON, and the instruction function process is completed. Since the processing of steps S722 to S724 is the same as the processing of steps S707 to S709 described above, the details will be omitted. Further, when it is determined in step S721 that the continuous effect flag is not OFF, since the precursor effect is in progress, the precursor effect display (continuous effect display) is performed as the process of step S725, and the instruction function process is terminated. The process of step S725 is the same as the process described in step S717.

As described above, by performing the processing of each step shown in FIG. 60, the peripheral board (effect control board 510) manages the AT game and the state that can be positioned as a precursor of the AT game (for example, the precursor game and the special mode). Control processing can be performed. Then, in combination with the instruction function processing by the main board 409 (FIG. 57 and the like), the characteristic instruction function processing by the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment can be realized. The determination process related to the end of the AT game and the management of the number of games (AT game determination process) is performed after the reel stop process (step S5 in FIG. 54), and the details thereof are described in [11-5-3] and the like. It will be described later.

The instruction function processing by the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is not limited to the contents of each processing shown in FIG. 57 and the like, and is replaced with processing by various derivative patterns as shown below. Can be done. Further, such a derivation pattern is also shown in [12] and later, which will be described later.

For example, in the instruction function processing described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60 and the like, whether or not the precursor game flag is ON (more strictly, whether or not the number of precursor games is 0 in the precursor game). (For example, steps S632, S642, S644 in FIG. 58) were drawn for the transition to the special mode, but as an example of the derivation pattern of the instruction function processing by the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the precursor game Strong and weak (strong and weak precursors) may be provided, and in the case of strong precursors, it may be easy to shift to the special mode. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately adjust the degree of transition to the special mode, so that the playability of the slot machine 1 can be improved.

Further, the timing of the special state transition lottery and the state transition based on the lottery result is not limited to the time when the number of precursor games becomes 0, and for example, the special status transition lottery is performed at an appropriate timing during the precursor game. It may be possible to shift to the special mode. In such a case, by combining the precursor game and the subsequent special mode to make it look like a series of "precursor modes", the first implementation is performed in a manner different from that shown in FIGS. 57 to 60 and the like. Form precursor games and special modes can be configured. Specifically, if the game period of 32 games is selected as the "precursor mode" and the precursor game is played in that, and the special state transition lottery is won in the middle of the precursor game, the precursor game is selected. By switching to the special mode, the remaining game period of the "precursor mode" can be set to the special mode. At this time, even if the precursor game ends as a precursor, the special mode will be in a game state with a higher advantage than before the execution of the precursor, so if the special mode can be switched to at an early timing, the period of the special mode will be longer. Subsequently, the degree of expectation for winning the AT can be increased. On the contrary, if the timing to shift from the precursor game to the special mode is delayed, the display of the AT winning result by the precursor effect performed in the precursor game is expected for a long time, and the special mode controlled after that makes the AT winning again. You can have a sense of expectation.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, by adjusting the distribution of the lottery table for the transition to the precursor game (precursor effect) and the subsequent transition to the special mode (special state), the slot machine 1 does not shift to the special state. If the winning combination that triggers the execution of the precursory game is a rare role, the pattern in which the AT winning is announced only by the precursory effect in the precursory game is halved, and the winning combination that triggers the execution of the precursory game is If it is a non-rare role (non-rare role), it can be 100% (it may be close to 100%). By doing so, when a non-rare role that is normally difficult to win an AT is selected and the game develops into a precursor game (or precursor production), the expectation of winning the AT can be significantly increased.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 59, as described in step S663, when the rare role (low winning combination) is selected as the winning combination during the special mode, the occurrence of the precursory game is given preferential treatment. The slot machine 1 of the embodiment does not have to be limited to winning a rare role in the transition from the special mode to the occurrence of a precursory game. For example, even if a non-rare role (high winning role) is selected as a winning role during the special mode, the distribution may be such that the precursory game can be expected to occur. Specifically, for example, the winning role is a bell. (The push order bell of the rare role and the push order bell of the non-rare role may be regarded as a "bell", or the push order bell of the non-rare role may be regarded as the main "bell"). Occasionally, 70% or more may determine the occurrence of a precursory game. Further, the winning of the first AT in the special mode (step S661 in FIG. 59) may be distributed to the extent that the AT winning can be expected even when the high winning combination (for example, bell) is won. For example, the winning combination is the bell. Occasionally, the AT may be won at 50% or more. At this time, in the distribution table illustrated in FIG. 63, the winning value corresponding to the push order bell may be changed. By doing so, during the special mode, it is possible to make a winning role that can be fully expected even if it is a high winning role that is not normally expected to occur in a precursory game or AT winning, and enhances the interest of the player. be able to.

However, as mentioned above, if the high winning combination is included in the preferential treatment for the occurrence of a precursory game from the special mode or the AT winning, the advantage of the special mode will be extremely high, so the balance of the overall payout rate etc. should be balanced. From the viewpoint of maintaining, it is preferable to make the game period of the special mode (the number of games controlled by the special state) extremely short. By doing so, while raising the expectation of the occurrence of a precursory game from the special mode and the AT winning, when the game period of the special mode is shortened, the player's expectation for the special mode for a short period of time is increased. It can be further enhanced.

When the game period (number of games) of the special mode is extremely shortened as described above, the specific number of games can be determined, for example, as follows.

First, as a first example, when the push order bell is given preferential treatment among the high winning combinations, the integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of the push order bell is set as the game period of the special mode. According to the winning combination lottery table shown in FIG. 49, the winning rate of the push order bell is about 0.49 (calculated from 32000/65535) in the gaming state (general state, bonus internal state) other than the bonus state. Therefore, the reciprocal is about 2.04. Therefore, as an integer value based on the reciprocal of the winning probability of the push order bell, it is "2" when an integer value close to the reciprocal is adopted, and "3" when an integer value rounded up to the nearest whole number is adopted. Will be.

When the game period of the special mode is "2 games", this number of games is the number of games that the player can feel that he / she can win a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the push order bell) within the game period. Therefore, the effect of increasing the player's motivation and expectation for playing can be expected. Further, when the game period of the special mode is "3 games", the number of games is theoretically the number of games that can be won in a predetermined winning combination (in this case, the push order bell) within the game period (that is,). Since the expected winning value is 1 or more), it is possible to increase the possibility that a privilege (occurrence of a precursory game or winning an AT) is given through the special mode, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

Next, as a second example, when the push order bell and the replay are given preferential treatment among the high-winning winning combinations, the winning probability that the winning winning combination to be given preferential treatment is selected is higher than that of the first example (Fig.). According to 49, the probability that the push order bell or replay will be won is about 0.63 in the general state and about 0.96 in the bonus internal state), so the game period in the special mode is from the first example. Is also shortened so that it is limited to, for example, "1 game". When the game period of the special mode is set to "1 game", the player's game is given an opportunity to overturn the failure result by being controlled by the special mode only in the next game in which the failure result due to the sign of the ghost is shown. You can sharply increase your motivation.

The above is a description of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the lottery tables used in various internal lottery for controlling such a gaming state do not have to be one, for example. , A plurality of set values (for example, four stages from set values 1 to 4) may be provided, and a different lottery table may be used for each set value. Specifically, there is a difference (gradual difference, extreme difference, etc.) in the internal lottery probability in each set value. As for this set value, the higher the set value is, such as set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4, the lottery probability such as the bonus winning combination and the AT winning rate may be given preferential treatment. For example, since the winning probability of BB1 is determined to be higher in the set value 4 than in the set value 1, there is a high possibility of winning the BB1. By providing stepwise set values in this way, each set value can be characterized and used as a clue when the player guesses the set value, or the slot machine 1 can be set according to the management of a hall or the like. It is possible to operate and so on. It should be noted that the setting value is not limited to the above.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start processing is completed, the operation (stop operation, that is, the operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c) for stopping the reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed is waited for. FIG. 83 shows the content of the reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

In the reel stop processing, first, in step S201, the reel stop control table is selected according to the condition device operated corresponding to the result of the internal lottery in the game. The reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices on a one-to-one basis, and these are stored in ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device satisfied in step S201, the standby state is set until the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether or not each reel of the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c has already stopped, or a state in which the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF). It is also determined whether or not the state) is satisfied, and also whether or not any of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes after step S202 are repeated.

Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, "forward push", "pinching push", "middle forward push", and "middle reverse". It can be divided into 6 types, "push", "reverse pinch push", and "reverse push". In the following explanation with respect to FIG. Then, classify them in three different push orders. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is called "forward push", the case where the first stop reel is the middle reel 301b is called "middle push", and the case where the first stop reel is the right reel 301c is called "reverse push".

In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a is in the stopped state (left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0) and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a is accepted. do. Assuming that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) according to the stop operation procedure of "forward pressing" from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c in step S201, step S202. Is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The "first reel" here means the reel for which the stop operation is first accepted or the reel is stopped first. In this example (“forward push”), the stop operation of the left reel 301a is first accepted, so that the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F = 0). Therefore, the determination in step S203 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

In the next step S204, the first reel stop processing is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop processing, the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is controlled based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

In step S206, the reel stop control tables for the remaining middle reels 301b and right reels 301c are determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) have only one stop control table at this point. Can be decided. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is called a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper position or the lower position can be a winning combination symbol. If it is a sexual symbol, select a reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the corresponding symbol. It will be.

In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF is only turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 and the subsequent processes are repeated. Run.

Then, when the processing after step S202 is executed again, the determination of step S202 is not satisfied because the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, and the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, it is determined whether the flag (middle reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of "forward pressing", the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination in step S210 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S211.

In step S211 it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. Since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1) at this point, this determination is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination symbol is performed based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). To execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second reel (second reel) to stop, steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, the process moves to step S216, and the middle reel stop flag MF is turned ON (MF = 1). To step S209.

Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stopped state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in the stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since there is no such determination, this determination is not satisfied, the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

Further, in the processing after the third step S202, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, since the subsequent processes of steps S218, S220 and the like are the same as the processes after the above steps S210 (steps S211 and S213), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stopped state at this point, this determination is satisfied and the reel stop process is completed.

In the case of the stop operation procedure of "middle push", the same explanation as above can be performed, so the details will be omitted. However, in the case of the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", there are some differences from the above explanation, so it will be described below.

The "reverse push" stop operation procedure differs from the above "forward push" or "middle push" stop operation procedure in step S221 (determining the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). be. That is, in the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", if only the right reel 301c is in the stopped state and any of the winning combination symbols is in the lower position among the stopped stitches of the right reel 301c, two valid symbols are still valid. It is possible to align the winning combination symbols on any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any effective line may be prepared and one of them may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the above reel stop processing, reel stop control is performed to pull the winning winning combination symbol (corresponding winning winning combination symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the player's reel stop operation is accepted, the range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range in which the corresponding winning combination symbol can be pulled in, for example, four symbols). Minutes) are determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within that range, the control of pulling it into the symbol display window 401 to stop the reel is executed. The "retractable range" here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the direction of rotation of the reel from the time the reel stop operation is received until the reel stops. say. For example, if the pull-in range is set to a maximum of four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotated and moved up to four symbols from the position as a base point.

Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning combination symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning combination symbol can be pulled in. If there is, it is possible to move the corresponding winning combination symbol into the symbol display window 401 and then stop it. Further, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player presses the winning combination symbol a little earlier, if the winning combination symbol is within the pullable range, the winning combination symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of omission (the game privilege is extinguished because the game privilege corresponding to the winning combination cannot be obtained because the winning combination symbols cannot be aligned).

In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the replay combination or the bell (bell 1, bell 2) in any push order is operating, the corresponding winning combination symbol is always displayed without the need for the player's push. Can be aligned. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination, bell 1, bell 2, etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged at a maximum of four symbols. (See FIG. 46 above). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum number of pull-in is 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of up to 4 as described above are always effective regardless of the push timing (push position). It will be possible to pull into the line.

Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are aligned in the middle row when a predetermined replay combination is won, focusing on the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, the other symbols are the maximum between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. Four are arranged (see FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel where the stop operation is received, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay combination is operating, the replay symbol is always pulled to any of the effective lines and stopped. be able to.

In addition, when the result of the internal lottery is a duplicated combination of the bonus combination and the small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn in over the bonus symbol. When a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in this winning game, the established state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In the subsequent games in which the small combination (or replay combination) is not established, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

The above is an example of reel stop processing by the table method. Aside from this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this as well, a specific description thereof will be omitted here. Further, in the first embodiment, either the control method or the table method reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 displays whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines in the symbol display window 401 (the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed. Whether or not it is determined. In FIG. 84, the content of this determination process will be specifically described.

When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the effective lines from the mode of the stop stitch in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination). Whether or not the combination mode of the symbols to be used is displayed) is determined. In particular, the stop stitch when all the reels 301 are in the stop state is called a stop roll.

First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and the OFF state (= 0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game in-game flag). If the bonus game flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF (= 0), the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is a bonus symbol (symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination). Explaining the determination of the symbol combination with a specific example, if the bonus is the type 2 BB shown in FIG. 49 or the like, the symbol combination corresponding to the type 2 BB is the symbol arrangement of "Red 7" on the effective line. (Refer to the condition device "BB1" in FIG. 53), it can be determined that the two types of BB symbols (bonus symbols) have stopped when such a symbol arrangement is stopped on any of the diagonal lines. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the valid line (YES in step S302), the bonus game start process related to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process ends. do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is a replay symbol (symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination), and if it is determined to be a replay symbol, the replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same number of bets as the number of bets in the game (MAX bets in this example). Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S306), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the valid line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), the symbol combination is a small winning combination symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small winning combination) as the next determination process. ) (Step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that it is a small winning combination symbol, as a process of step S309, a specified number of medals are paid out according to the prepared small winning combination symbols (a specified number of medals are paid from the medal discharging device 110). put out). Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED612). As a result, the player is notified (notified, displayed) that a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination have been paid out. Then, after the processing of step S309 is completed, the corresponding small winning combination winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S310), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the effective line is not a small winning combination symbol (NO in step S308), any of the determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 described above is not satisfied, and any of the symbols are on the effective line. The winning combination designs are not available. In addition, the result at this time is also called "missing eye (combination mode of disjointed symbols)". In such a case, the loss process is executed (step S311). In the loss processing, if the winning flag that is in the ON (= 1) state at this point is another winning flag excluding the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (at this time, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss processing in step S311, the determination processing is terminated.

The process from step S302 to step S311 described above is a process to be executed when the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, the processing after step S312 performed when the determination in step S301 is not satisfied will be described. The process here is a process to be executed during a bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

In step S312, it is determined whether or not the bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the valid line. The "bonus game payout symbol" here means a general term for a combination of symbols in which medals are paid out by aligning them during the bonus game, and specifically, a bonus game payout combination (general in this example). It is the same as the small winning combination whose payout is specified in the state or internal state, but a special bonus-only winning combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to all the bonus game payout symbols (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal discharge device 110, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the payout number display LED612. By such a medal payout process, the player is notified (notified, displayed) that a predetermined number of medals corresponding to the payout combination at the time of the bonus game have been paid out.

Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 86), and then the determination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern of NO in step S312, it is conceivable that the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is won but the payout combination is not won, or the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the establishment flag of the payout combination at the time of the bonus game is turned off, and in the latter case, the loss flag is turned off. If a bonus-dedicated role that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and if the bonus-dedicated role can be won without being lost, the process of step S315 is performed. It may be omitted.

The above-mentioned processes of steps S301 to S315 are game state determination processes performed by the main board 409 (particularly CPU 1110), and after that, AT game determination processes are performed in steps S320.

Since the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has an AT function as described above, it is necessary to perform a determination process (AT game determination process) regarding the end of the AT game and the management of the number of games for each game. There is. In the first embodiment, in the description of [11-3-2], the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110) manages many of the flags related to AT (for example, AT internal flag, AT flag, etc.), and these flags are managed. Is given as a command to the peripheral board (for example, the effect control board 510). Therefore, in the following description, the AT game determination process is also performed by the main board 409. However, the processing is not limited to the processing by the main board 409, and the effect control board 510 or the like performs the AT game determination processing based on the result of the internal lottery included in the command transmitted from the main board 409 and the information regarding the stop symbol. You may do so.

The timing at which the AT game determination process is performed may be any appropriate timing among the determination processes shown in FIG. 84, but here, as an example, of each process of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315. Later, it is assumed that the AT game determination process of step S320 is performed. The details of the AT game determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 87 in [11-5-3].

[11-5-1. Bonus game start process]
If the determination in step S302 of FIG. 84 is satisfied, the bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

First, in step S401, it is determined whether the bonus flag (for example, the BB flag) is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the flag during the bonus game is set to ON (= 1) and the bonus flag is set to OFF (= 0). Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count during the bonus game is cleared. As a result, the cumulative number of payouts is accumulated from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the number of bets of the specified number of bonus games (in this example, the specified number of BB games is two).

If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where the bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF (= 0). That is, it can occur either by some illegal means (for example, a goto act) or by a failure of the slot machine 1. Therefore, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on and the above-mentioned LED or the like is displayed to notify the occurrence of the error.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end judgment process]
Subsequently, the bonus game end determination process of step S314 of FIG. 84 will be described with reference to FIG. 86.

First, in step S451, in response to the fact that the medals have been paid out in step S313 of FIG. 84, the number of payouts of the game is added to the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game.

Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative number of payouts exceeds the total number of payouts (for example, 200) specified for each bonus. If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454, and the cumulative number of payouts during the bonus game is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED612 or the like. The cumulative payout number is separately provided with an LED or the like for display. It may be displayed on this).

On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S460), and the process ends.

[11-5-3. AT game judgment processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of the AT game determination process. As described above in [11-3-2] and the like, the AT game is a game executed based on winning the AT in the AT lottery, and when the AT game is being executed, the push order small winning combination ( If you win the winning combination of the push order bell), the navigation will teach (specify) the "appropriate push order" that you can expect to win many medals. The AT game determination process is a determination process relating to the start, continuation, end, etc. of such an AT game, and is performed by an AT control body (for example, an effect control board 510). Hereinafter, an example of the AT game determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

First, the outline of the AT game will be described. The AT game is started when the start condition of the AT game is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the end condition of the AT is satisfied. As described in the instruction function processing of [11-3-2], when the start condition of the AT game is satisfied, the predetermined internal flag (AT flag) is turned ON (= 1) and the AT game is started. It is started and the AT flag is turned OFF (= 0) at the end of the AT game. It is assumed that information such as an internal flag related to the AT game such as the AT flag and the number of AT games described later is held in a memory in the board for controlling the AT game (for example, RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510).

The conditions for starting the AT game (conditions for turning on the AT flag) are as described in detail in [11-3-2], but simply put, the state in which the AT is won in the AT lottery (AT). When the internal flag is ON), the start condition of the winning AT is satisfied. Further, as described above, when the AT flag is turned on and the AT game is started, the AT internal flag is turned off.

In step S501 of FIG. 87, as the first process of the AT game determination process, the current AT flag is compared with the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game, and whether or not the AT flag is turned ON (= 1). To judge. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the AT flag has changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the AT flag has been turned ON (YES in step S501), the number of AT games at the start of AT is set (step S502), and the process ends. The number of AT games (so-called initial number of games) at the start of AT may be set in advance as a fixed number of games, the number of games may be drawn at the time of winning the AT, or it is determined by another method. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined by the above-mentioned instruction function processing is set as the number of AT games at the start of AT.

By performing such processing in step S502, the AT game is started from the next game. At the start of the AT game, the start of the AT game and the effect of clearly indicating the number of AT games to the player are performed (for example, the display of the AT start screen).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the AT flag is turned ON, that is, if the AT flag is OFF or the AT flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the AT flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is ON (= 1) (step S505). If it is determined that the AT flag is ON (YES in step S505), it means that one game in the AT game has been played, so the process of subtracting "1" from the value of the number of AT games is performed (YES in step S505). Step S506). If it is determined in step S505 that the AT flag is not ON (NO in step S505), it is not in the AT game, so the process ends as it is.

Here, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the number of AT games is added based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game, in addition to the number of games at the start determined at the start of the AT game. It is assumed that it has an additional function. When the number of AT games is added, a predetermined internal flag (additional flag) is turned ON (= 1), and the number of AT games to be added (number of additional games) is determined. The conditions for determining the addition are not particularly limited, and may be the winning of a specific winning combination in the combination lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method of determining the number of additional games is not limited to a special method. The processing of the following steps S507 to S509 is a processing performed when the AT game number addition function is provided.

First, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the addition flag is ON (= 1). If the addition flag is ON (YES in step S507), a process of adding the number of addition games to the current number of AT games is performed (step S508), and the addition flag is turned OFF (= 0) (step S509). .. As a result, the number of remaining AT games is increased by the additional amount, and the duration of the AT game that is advantageous to the player is extended.

After the processing of step S509 (after the processing of step S506 if the addition function is not provided), it is determined whether or not the current number of AT games is "0" (step S510), and if it is "0". Will satisfy the end condition of the AT game, so the AT flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S511), and the process is terminated. At this time, not only the end of the AT game should be clearly shown to the player, but also information about a series of AT games (for example, the total number of medals paid out in the AT game, the number of continuous AT games, etc.) should be clearly shown to the player. May be.

If the current number of AT games is not "0" in the determination of step S510 (NO in step S510), the end condition of the AT game is not satisfied, so the process ends without changing the AT flag. As a result, the AT game is continued in the subsequent games.

The AT game determination process described with reference to FIG. 87 is a processing example in which the game period (AT game period) controlled by the game state for the AT game is deducted by 1 count for each game. , When the AT game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the AT game period is determined by the number of appearances of AT navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate AT game determination process according to the subtraction method. ..

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an internal flag (for example, an AT start flag) indicating the start of the AT game may be prepared separately from the AT flag for the AT game determination process. The AT start flag is an internal flag that is turned ON (= 1) when the AT game start condition is satisfied by winning the AT first hit lottery. In such a case, in a series of processes by the AT game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the AT start flag is ON, and if the AT start flag is ON, the AT initial game is in step S502. After setting the number, a process may be performed such that the AT flag is turned ON and the AT start flag is turned OFF. If the AT start flag is OFF in step S501, the processes after step S505 are performed. It should be.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various effect operations are controlled by the effect control board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the effect control board 510 (mainly CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information commands, output signals) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, the effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

For example, the effect mode includes a game that is completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single-shot effect mode), a game that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous effect mode), and the like. Of these, the one-shot production mode includes a production that suggests the winning flag (suggestion production, notification production, details will be described later), a production that informs the payout of medals (a mode that informs the payout appearance, and even the number of payouts). There is.

The suggestion effect is different from the effect of directly notifying the player of the winning flag (notification effect), and is an effect of indirectly notifying the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. , Displaying colors, etc. In addition, the suggestion effect is also performed when there is no winning flag (that is, in the case of loss). In this case, the content is such that it is difficult to notice that it is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken as any winning combination). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

The notification effect clearly informs the player of the result related to the game, such as "bonus confirmed!" Or "AT winning!", For example, when the winning flag is a bonus role or when the AT is won in the AT lottery. It is something that can be done. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination (because there is a possibility of winning a large number of medals) that is particularly pleasing to the player such as a bonus or AT. That is, when the player wins the AT or the like, it can have a meaning of congratulating it.

In addition, as a continuous production mode, there are those corresponding to a game state such as a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state. These are to clarify what the game state is, and the player can perform these effects (continuous effects) to see if the current game state is, for example, a general state inside the bonus. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is a state or not.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the continuous production mode corresponding to the game state (general state, bonus internal state, bonus state) as described above, but also [11-3-2] and the like will be described. It is possible to execute continuous production in a manner of suggesting or teaching whether or not to shift to a special game (for example, an AT game) that is advantageous to the player, such as the precursory effect of AT. Further, such continuous effect is not limited to control by a peripheral board (for example, effect control board 510), and may be controlled by a main board 409. Further, such a continuous effect may be completed in one game, but it is continuously executed in such a manner that the related effect contents are displayed over a plurality of games, and finally the result is displayed. Is common. In the instruction function processing of the first embodiment, as a display form of the "precursor effect", an example in which the title of one game is first displayed and then the "continuous effect" from one game to a plurality of games is performed. As I explained, overall, it can be said that "precursor production" is also continuous production. Then, when the result of such a continuous effect (for example, a precursory effect) is displayed, the player can recognize whether or not to shift to the special game state in which the special game is performed in the subsequent game.

It should be noted that the various production modes described above can be executed as an image display by the image display body 500, a sound effect generated by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like, and the like. Such an effect mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, such as when a player has been playing a game for a long time. It should be noted that the effect mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. In addition, dolls that imitate characters, movable models, and side reels (for example, they are placed in different positions from each reel and can be started and stopped regardless of the player's operation as part of the production. (To be executed), or lighting such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light typified by a rotating lamp) may be provided to execute various effects. If such a method is adopted, it is possible to fully entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[12. Other embodiments]
In the above-mentioned [1] to [11], the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the present invention has been described, but in the following, as other embodiments, the slots of the second and third embodiments of the present invention will be described. Describe the machine. Since the slot machines of the second and third embodiments are almost the same as the slot machines 1 of the first embodiment in their configurations and processes, the description thereof will be omitted, and the components, processes, etc. Is diverted. The slot machines of the second and third embodiments are in terms of control processing of the gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) in the instruction function processing (mainly described in [11-3-2] in the first embodiment). , Different from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining a transition example of the AT lottery game state in each embodiment. FIG. 88 (A) is an example in the first embodiment, FIG. 88 (B) is an example in the second embodiment, and FIG. 88 (C) is an example in the third embodiment. .. FIG. 88 shows a gaming state (AT lottery gaming state) controlled over time and the degree of expectation thereof. The degree of expectation here is mainly the degree of expectation regarding winning (AT transition) of a special game, and in FIG. 88, it means that the higher the upper side in the vertical axis direction, the higher the expected value, and the lower the expectation value. It means that the value is low. Further, a plurality of points (a1 to a5, b1 to b5, c1 to c7) in the figure indicate characteristic timings in each transition example. In the following, the control of the characteristic gaming state in the second and third embodiments will be described while comparing with the control of the gaming state in the first embodiment.

[12-1. Example of transition of gaming state in the first embodiment]
First, the transition example of FIG. 88 (A) will be described while showing the correspondence with each process of FIGS. 58 and 59.

In FIG. 88A, the game starts from a normal gaming state in which the AT has not been won (the internal AT has not been won), and at this time, the AT lottery gaming state is controlled to a low probability state. Then, in a1 in the middle of the normal game state, as a result of the state transition lottery (step S639 in FIG. 58), the AT lottery game state shifts to the highly accurate state.

After that, the game progresses in a normal game state, and in a2, the precursor game (precursor game A) is started by winning the precursory lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) such that the winning combination of the rare role is selected. rice field. However, the precursory game A started in a2 is a precursory precursor that has not been won at the first AT. When the precursor game A of the precursory sign is started in a2, the state transition lottery A is performed for the transition of the AT lottery game state (step S638 in FIG. 58), but here, it is assumed that the high accuracy state continues.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the transition of the AT lottery gaming state is not particularly different from the normal gaming state while the precursor game A due to the precursory sign is played. Then, in a3, the precursor game A ends after the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses, but the special state transition lottery (step S644 in FIG. 58) is performed at the end. If the transition to the special mode is won in, the game in the special mode is immediately started by controlling the AT lottery game state to the special state (any of the special states 1 to 3) (FIG. 58). Step S648). It has already been explained in the first embodiment that the game is played in a state having a higher advantage than the normal state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra-high accuracy state) up to that point during the special mode. be.

Next, in a4, it is assumed that the precursory game (precursor game B) is started in the special mode game started from a3 when the winning combination of the rare role is selected (step S666 in FIG. 59). It should be noted that the precursory game A started in a4 is a precursory precursor that has not been won at the first AT. When the precursor game B of the precursor of Gase is started in a4, the transition of the AT lottery game state is controlled to the hell state by turning off the special state flag and turning on the hell state flag (FIG. 59). Steps S669 and S670).

As described in the first embodiment, in the game controlled to the hell state, the AT first hit lottery is not won (or a lottery table that is difficult to win is used), and the precursor game number lottery (FIG. 59). During the number of precursor games determined in step S664) of the above, the precursor game B is executed.

Then, in a5, the precursory game B ends, and in the final game, the result of the AT non-winning is announced by the precursory effect (continuous effect), and then the normal game state is restored. If the precursor game B is the present precursor when the first hit of the AT is won, the transition to the AT game (AT winning) is announced at the time of a5, and then the AT game is started.

[12-2. Second embodiment]
FIG. 88B is a transition example in the slot machine of the second embodiment. In the slot machine of the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expected effect over a plurality of games indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is appropriate, the expected effect is generated by an internal lottery performed during the execution of the expected effect. It is characterized by suppressing the establishment of another opportunity that may lead to execution. Such a slot machine of the second embodiment suppresses the influence of the execution mode on the expected production determined to be executed when the expected production is executed triggered by a certain internal lottery result. Therefore, when the executionability of the expected effect is determined based on the result of the internal lottery such as the winning combination lottery, the purpose of treating the result of the internal lottery carefully can be realized.

In the slot machine of the second embodiment, as a specific control example of the gaming state for achieving the above object, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), when the execution of the expected effect is determined. , The lottery state is controlled to a low expectation state (for example, a hell state) at a predetermined timing thereafter, and the transition to an advantageous gaming state is suppressed.

Similar to the case of FIG. 88 (A), the flow of processing in the transition example of FIG. 88 (B) will be described. First, in FIG. 88 (B), the process of b1 is the same as that of a1 of FIG. 88 (A), so the description thereof will be omitted.

In b2 of FIG. 88 (B), the precursor game A of the precursory sign is started by winning the precursory lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) such that the winning combination of the rare role is selected. Here, in the slot machine of the second embodiment, the AT lottery game state is controlled to a low expectation state (specifically, for example, a hell state) while the precursor game A due to the precursory sign is performed. By controlling to the hell state, even if a rare role is selected in the internal lottery of the winning combination performed during the precursory game A, it is possible to prevent the AT winning or the execution of a new precursory game from being selected. ..

Then, in b3, when the precursor game A is completed after the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) has elapsed, the special state transition lottery (step S644 in FIG. 58) is performed at the end. If the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (any of the special states 1 to 3), and the game in the special mode is immediately started (step S648 in FIG. 58). .. It should be noted that during the special mode, the game is played in a state having a higher advantage than the normal state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state, ultra-high accuracy state) up to that point, as in the first embodiment. ..

After that, when the execution of the precursor game B is decided during the game in the special mode, the precursor game B is started in b4, and when the precursor game number elapses in b5 and the precursor game B ends, the precursor game B is started. The result (AT non-winning / AT winning) is shown. Since the processing of this series of flows is the same as a4 and a5 in FIG. 88 (A), the description thereof will be omitted.

The processing example described with reference to FIG. 88B is an example of controlling the gaming state in the slot machine of the second embodiment, and is an expected effect (specifically, a precursor game, a precursor game) whose execution is determined. The game state may be controlled in such a way as to make it difficult to win the advantageous game state with respect to the execution period (effect, continuous effect).

Further, the slot machine of the second embodiment drops the lottery state related to the game state to the low expected state at least at any predetermined timing from the time when the execution of the expected effect is determined to the end of the expected effect. be able to.

[12-3. Third Embodiment]
FIG. 88C is a transition example in the slot machine of the third embodiment. In the slot machine of the third embodiment, when the expected effect indicating the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous gaming state is executed, the advantageous winning combination (corresponding to the “highly expected combination”) having a high degree of expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state. , Specifically, for example, when a rare role is selected as a winning role, it is possible to execute another expected effect triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning combination while teaching the result of the above expected effect. It is characterized by doing. In such a slot machine of the third embodiment, when an expected effect is executed triggered by a certain internal lottery result, the execution mode of the expected effect is influenced in some way based on another internal lottery result. For example, when the execution of another expected effect is won based on the above-mentioned other internal lottery result, control is performed so as to respect both the previous expected effect and the other expected effect. It is a feasible gaming machine.

In the slot machine of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), as a specific control example of the gaming state for achieving the above object, the expected effect (previous expected effect) is executed. If it is decided to execute another expected effect (later expected effect), the execution of the previous expected effect is continued, the result of the expected effect is displayed at the end, and then the later expected effect is displayed. I am trying to execute.

Similar to the case of FIGS. 88 (A) and 88 (B), the flow of processing in the transition example of FIG. 88 (C) will be described. First, in FIG. 88 (C), the processing of c1 is the same as that of c1 in FIG. 88 (A), so the description thereof will be omitted.

In c2 of FIG. 88 (C), the precursor game A of the precursory sign is started by winning the precursory lottery (step S633 in FIG. 58) such that the winning combination of the rare role is selected. Here, in the slot machine of the third embodiment, while the precursor game A due to the precursory sign is performed, the special transition control as in the second embodiment is not performed with respect to the AT lottery game state, for example, the first. It is assumed that the state transition lottery A is performed as in the embodiment.

After that, it is assumed that the winning combination of the rare role is selected in c3 during the execution of the precursor game A. At this time, in the third embodiment, if a precursory lottery is performed based on the rare role and the execution of a new precursory game (precursor game C) is won by the precursory lottery, the execution of the precursory game C is at least the precursory game. A process of delaying after the end of A is performed. At this time, a lottery for the number of precursor games for the precursor game C is also performed, but the selected precursor games are set in variable data different from the number of precursor games corresponding to the precursor game A currently being executed. In addition, the precursor game C is a sign that the AT first hit has not been won, and as a result of the state transition lottery (for example, the state transition lottery A) based on the winning combination of the rare role in c3, the AT lottery game state is super. It is assumed that the player has been promoted to a high accuracy state.

Then, in c4, the precursor game A ends after the number of precursor games determined by the precursor game number lottery (step S635 in FIG. 58) elapses, and at the end, the result of the precursor game A (AT) by the precursor effect (continuous effect). Transition non-winning) is taught. In this way, in c4, the precursor game A ends, but since the precursor game C whose execution is delayed in c3 is stocked, the precursor game C is started. In FIG. 88 (c), no special lottery is performed regarding the AT lottery game state from the end of the precursor game A to the start of the precursor game C.

In the slot machine of the third embodiment, a predetermined connection period may be provided between the end of the precursor game A and the start of the precursor game C in c4, and further, the precursor game C may be provided in the connection period. You may perform a fanning effect that can guess the start of.

Then, the precursor game C of the precursory game is performed until the number of precursory games determined by the precursory game number lottery elapses, and at the end of that, the result of AT non-winning is announced by the precursory effect (continuous effect). Then, in c5, if the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the precursor game C and the transition to the special mode is won, the AT lottery game state is controlled to the special state (any of the special states 1 to 3). The game in the special mode is started immediately.

Next, in c6 during the special mode game started in c5, if the execution of the precursor game (precursor game B) is decided due to the selection of the winning combination of the rare role, etc., the precursor game B is selected. It will be started. Then, as shown in c7, when the precursor game B is a precursor, the result of AT non-winning is announced by the precursor effect (continuous effect) at the end of the elapsed number of precursor games, and then the game returns to the normal game state. .. If the precursor game B is the precursor, the transition to the AT game (AT winning) is announced at the time of c7, and then the AT game is started.

Supplementing the processing of FIG. 88 (C), if the rare role that triggers the execution of the precursor game C is won during the execution of the precursor game A (Gase precursor), the number of precursor games determined in advance is determined. The precursor game A is continued without being changed, and after the precursor game A ends, the precursor game C is started. Specifically, for example, when the number of precursor games of precursor game A is determined to be 16, even if the player wins the rare role in the 10th game (6 games remaining), the precursor game A is the remaining 6 games. Will continue.

The processing example described with reference to FIG. 88C is an example of controlling the gaming state in the slot machine of the third embodiment, and shows the result of the expected effect (corresponding to the precursor effect or the continuous effect in the precursor game). It is not limited to this as long as it is possible to execute another expected effect triggered by the selection of an advantageous winning combination (highly expected role, rare role) while teaching. Hereafter, some other examples are shown.

First, if an opportunity leading to the execution of another expected effect is established during the execution of the expected effect (when the rare role that determines the execution of the precursor game C is won during the execution of the precursor game A), the precursor game C is executed. The number of precursor games to be played may be drawn by lottery in the established game of the opportunity as described in FIG. 88 (C), or the precursor game is completed when the previous expected production (precursor production of precursor game A) is completed. A number of lottery may be held.

Further, in FIG. 88 (C), when it is decided to execute another Gase precursor (precursor game C) when a high expectation role (for example, a rare role) is won during the Gase precursor (precursor game A). It is said that the precursor game C will be executed in such a way that the precursor is reset after the end of the previous precursor, but if the rare role is won multiple times during the gasse precursor, all rare roles are won (however,). If the precursor game (Gase precursor) is reset for the rare role that won the AT), the precursor game may continue indefinitely. In the slot machine of the third embodiment, in order to solve such a problem, if the precursor game (especially in the precursor of Gase) is won multiple times of high expectation, the precursor game (Gase precursor) is reset. You may try to limit the maximum number of times. As a specific processing example of limiting the maximum number of precursor games (gas precursors) that are reset when multiple high-expected roles are won in one precursor game (gas precursors), the maximum number of times is set. Until it is reached, it may be processed so that the reset of the precursory game is determined each time the high-expected combination is won, or the multiple winnings of the high-expected combination in one precursory game are collectively combined and the upper limit is reached. It may be processed to determine the number of precursor games to be reset within the number of times. The maximum number of times can be set arbitrarily, but since the Gase precursor teaches a disadvantageous result for the player that the AT is not won, the upper limit is to prevent the disadvantageous result from being repeatedly taught. It is desirable to set the number of times to the minimum of one.

Further, as another control example by the slot machine of the third embodiment, a high-ranking high-expected role (for example, a strong cherry, a strong watermelon, a strong chance eye, etc.), which has a particularly high expectation among the high-expected roles, is used during the sign of gassing. If the strong rare role) is won multiple times, the Gase precursor may be forcibly reset after the end of the current Gase precursor. Specifically, if a strong rare role is won multiple times in the middle of the precursor game A, even if the precursor game C is not decided by the precursor lottery based on each strong rare role winning, the precursor game is played. After the end of A, the precursor game C may be forcibly executed. The number of winnings of the high-ranking high-expected combination for forcibly resetting the precursor game can be set to any number between one and a plurality of times.

Further, according to the slot machine of the third embodiment, the effect mode in the precursor game (precursor game C) set after the end of the precursor game (precursor game A) is the same as that of the precursor game. However, it may be made to appear in a production mode that makes it possible to feel the relationship with the precursor game A.

For example, the precursor game C may be executed while making it appear as if the precursor game A is continuing. In such a case, by not deleting the number of games of the precursor game A and the precursor game C, the game period allocated to both precursor games can be respected, and the precursor game A looks more than usual. Since it can be seen as extended to a long number of games, it can be expected that the player's expectation will be maintained and improved as a special situation.

Further, for example, the result of the precursor game A may be displayed by continuous effect (which can be replaced with the precursor effect), and then the precursor game C may be started. In this case, the effect of determining the result of the precursor game A (continuous effect) is performed, so that the winning combination (internal lottery result) that triggered the execution of the precursor game A is important, and then. Since the effect (continuous effect) of determining the result of the precursor game C is performed at another timing, the winning combination that triggered the execution of the precursor game C can also be important. In the slot machine of the third embodiment, from the viewpoint of valuing the internal lottery result, this stage is more than the production mode shown in the previous stage (precursor game C as if the precursor game A is continuing). It is desirable to be controlled by the effect mode shown in (1) (which surely teaches the result of each precursor game).

Further, in the slot machine of the third embodiment, when the execution of the precursor game C is determined during the execution of the precursor game A as described above, the precursor game C is reset after the end of the precursor game A. However, the period from when the execution of the precursor game C is decided until the remaining number of games of the precursor game A is exhausted (for example, when the precursor game A is determined to be 16 games, in the 10th game) For the remaining 6 games for the precursor game A when the execution of the precursor game C is decided, the result display (whether or not AT transition is possible) shown in each precursor game A and C based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination is displayed. ) May be shortened to a predetermined extent within the range that does not hinder. In the above specific example, when the number of remaining games of the precursor game A is 6, it corresponds to changing the number of remaining precursor games so that the precursor game A is completed in 3 games. In such a case, according to the slot machine of the third embodiment, the expected effect (corresponding to the precursor effect appearing in the precursor game) based on each internal lottery result can be executed, and the result display is displayed. Can teach. Then, by shortening the running precursor game (precursor game A), the start time of the reset precursor game (precursor game C) can be accelerated, so that each of them can be performed in a shorter period of time than when the precursor game is not shortened. Expected production can enhance the interest of the player.

[13. Features and effects of each embodiment]
According to the slot machine 1 of the first to third embodiments according to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having the following technical ideas, and various things that could not be achieved by the conventional gaming machines by the technical ideas. It has a special effect.

[13-1. First technical idea]
According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, "in a gaming machine capable of performing an expected effect expected to shift to an advantageous game, the shift to an advantageous game is denied by the expected effect performed during a predetermined game period. Even if it is done, a gaming machine that can shift to a special gaming state (special mode) that is more advantageous than a plurality of types of normal gaming states in a relatively short game period after the predetermined game period (first technical idea). Is feasible.

The above "expected effect" corresponds to the "precursor effect" described in the instruction function process of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a "precursor effect" can be executed in order to suggest or teach the player whether or not to shift to the advantageous game (AT game), which will be described in step S624 of FIG. 58 and the like. As described above, the precursory game in which the precursory effect is performed includes a main precursor indicating that the game shifts to the AT game (AT winning) and a gasse precursor indicating that the game does not shift to the AT game (AT non-winning). Further, the precursor game can be said to be a continuous production game performed in a delay period from the game in which the lottery related to the transition to the AT game (AT first hit lottery) is performed to the game in which the result is displayed.

Then, according to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, even if the Gase precursor is executed after the AT first hit lottery is performed and the transition to the AT game is denied as a result, the special mode is subsequently performed. You can move to (special state). Specifically, it corresponds to the transition to the special mode (special state) when the special state transition lottery shown in step S644 of FIG. 58 is won. When the process of step S644 is performed, the slot machine 1 is in a state where the number of remaining games of the precursor game is 0 in a state where the AT has not been won (also not won internally). That is, it is possible to shift to the special mode when the sign of the ghost is performed and the mode is finished (see FIG. 74 for the lottery table).

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the special state controlled when winning in the special state transition lottery is another AT lottery gaming state (so-called normal gaming state) as described in FIG. 63 and the like. It is advantageous for the player in that the expectation of winning the first AT hit is higher than that of the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state). It can be said to be a mode (special mode). In the example of FIG. 63, if the winning combination is a "rare role" when controlled to a special state, there is a fairly high probability that the winning combination is at least about 84% (55000/65535) or more, and the AT first hit. You can win. However, in the first embodiment, the situation in which the game is played in the "special mode" is a non-AT state, and the superiority of the "special mode" is not as high as in the special gaming state (AT state).

The point that the period of transition to the special mode is "relatively short game period" is, for example, more special than the average number of staying games in the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state, which are the normal gaming states. It is based on the fact that the number of games controlled by the mode (the number of special state games) is small, but this detailed explanation will be described later.

From the above, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is described as "in a gaming machine capable of performing a precursory effect expected to shift to an advantageous game, even if the precursory effect denies the transition to the advantageous game. It is a gaming machine that can shift to a special mode that is advantageous to the player. " In a conventional gaming machine, if the result of the precursor effect ends in failure (AT non-winning), the game value spent to digest the gasse precursor in which the precursor effect is performed becomes useless for the player. This has the problem of increasing the player's sense of loss and causing a decline in interest. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as described above, the game value consumed by the Gase precursor can be compensated by being able to shift to the special mode which is advantageous to the player even after the Gase precursor. Since it can be compensated for) and the feeling of loss of the game value due to the precursor of the game can be suppressed, the player's motivation to play can be maintained.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, three types of AT lottery game states, a low probability state, a high probability state, and an ultra-high probability state, are listed as the AT lottery game states before the precursory game (precursor effect) is started. , Special states (special states 1 to 3) can be more advantageous with respect to AT than any of them (see FIG. 63). According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, even if the transition to the advantageous game is denied by the precursor effect, a special mode (for example, a special state) which is more advantageous than before the precursor effect is executed). It is possible to shift to, and it is possible to provide a game state with a high degree of expectation on the contrary due to the occurrence of a sign of slack. Originally, the Gase precursor could discourage the player by notifying the result that does not lead to an advantageous game (for example, an AT game), but according to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the Gase By connecting to a special mode with a high degree of expectation through the precursor, it is possible to provide an expected value that can supplement the game value consumed by the player due to the precursor of the disappointment.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the state related to the advantageous game (corresponding to the AT lottery game state) is performed even while the sign of the ghost that has the result of denying the transition to the advantageous game is being performed. A state transition lottery can be held. Specifically, it corresponds to the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. In this state transition lottery A, the state transition is drawn using the lottery tables illustrated in FIGS. 71 to 73 based on the AT lottery game state controlled at that time. Unless it is controlled to the highest ultra-high probability state at a time point, the promotion probability of moving to a more advantageous state than that time point is set higher than the demotion probability of moving to a state more disadvantageous than that time point. For example, in FIG. 71, since it is a state transition lottery from the lowest low probability state, it is not demoted. Further, for example, in FIG. 72, the rate of demotion to the low probability state is 600/65535 even when the non-rare role with the highest probability is won, while the rate of promotion to the ultra-high probability state is 63625/65535. The rate of promotion is overwhelmingly higher.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only can the state transition lottery be performed even while the precursor of the gassing is being performed, but also the advantage can be increased by the state transition lottery. Even if the precursor is executed and the transition to the advantageous game is denied, the transition to a highly advantageous state can be expected to compensate for the loss caused by the negative result, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. Has the effect of suppressing.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the AT lottery game state (low accuracy state, high accuracy state) that can be normally controlled in the specific game in which the number of remaining precursor games becomes 0 when the precursory sign is performed. Since it is possible to perform a lottery to shift to a special mode that is more advantageous than the state (state, ultra-high accuracy state), if the lottery is won, the lottery table (lottery table for special state) that is advantageous in the subsequent games will be used. It is possible to perform a transition lottery to an advantageous game (AT first hit lottery). Specifically, the transition lottery to the special mode corresponds to the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, and the subsequent transition lottery to the advantageous game is step S661 of FIG. 59. Corresponds to the AT first hit lottery. As shown in FIG. 105, the lottery table according to the AT lottery game state is used in the AT first hit lottery, and according to FIG. 105, any of the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state. It can be seen that the winning probability of the first AT hit is higher in the special states 1 to 3 than in the special states 1.

Further, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, it has been described that the special state transition lottery is performed when the number of remaining precursor games is 0, but in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, it has been described. The special state transition lottery may be performed when the number of remaining precursor games is 0, and the number is not limited to 0. By doing so, it is possible to execute the state transition lottery (special state transition lottery) even during the sign of the ghost, so that even during the sign of the ghost, the state is more advantageous than the current AT lottery game state. Even if the transition to (special mode) is possible and the Gase precursor that cannot be expected to shift to advantageous games is executed, all the investment in the game value (medals) required to digest the Gase precursor is wasted. It can be expected to have the effect of compensating for the investment.

In other words, the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment performs a lottery to shift to a special mode (for example, a special state) in which a good lottery table is used in a specific game during (or immediately after) a sign of a ghost. It has the feature that it can be done.

Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the period controlled by the special mode is a "relatively short game period (relatively short period)", and the game period is a normal game state (low accuracy). It is shorter than the period controlled by the state (state, high accuracy state, ultra high accuracy state). Specifically, as described in the state transition lottery A of the instruction function generation process (for example, step S638 of FIG. 58), when the lottery tables of FIGS. 49 and 71 to 73 are used, the low in the bonus internal state. The average number of staying games in the certain state is about 120 games, the average number of staying games in the high probability state is about 25 games, and the average number of staying games in the ultra-high probability state is about 36 games. On the other hand, the number of staying games in the special state (special state 1 to special state 3) is selected from between 2 games and 20 games (see FIG. 75 described later), so that the number of staying games is higher than that of each state in the normal gaming state. It's a short period. Then, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the precursor game advantageous to the player is a gasse precursor (that is, when the transition to the AT game is denied), such a game is performed for a relatively short period of time. Since it is possible to shift to a special state, even if the expected production in the precursor game ends in a failure result, the special state can give an opportunity for a re-chance. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a game playability different from the game playability in the conventional gaming machine in which the precursor state and the normal state are repeated, which causes the player to get bored. It has the effect of being difficult.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a rare combination that is a high expected combination (low winning combination from the viewpoint of winning probability) is selected as the winning combination in the above-mentioned special state, the probability is high (Fig. In the explanation of 59, the precursor game is started again at 100%), but if the precursor game ends in a failure result, the gaming state after the precursor game becomes a low probability state with a low advantage. It is forcibly dropped (see the state transition lottery C in step S690 of FIG. 59). Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, even if an advantageous precursor game ends in failure, it is a precursor by winning a high-expected combination (low-winning combination) in a relatively short period thereafter. Since the game can be controlled to an advantageous special mode such that it can reappear, it is possible to provide multiple (or continuous) situations that are advantageous to the player. However, on the other hand, in spite of the provision of such multiple advantageous situations, if those results end in failure (without shifting to the AT game), as a reaction to that, the subsequent gaming state is changed. Since it is forcibly dropped to a low probability state (the lowest gaming state in this example) with a low advantage, it is necessary to provide the player with a gaming machine that considers the interests of the hall side as well as a sweet gaming machine. Can be done.

Further, from the viewpoint of securing profits on the hall side, the special state is a gaming state that is advantageous (that is, disadvantageous to the hall side) for the player, so it is for the hall side that the period controlled by the special state is too long. Although not preferable, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the period controlled to the special state as described above is larger than the average number of staying games in the normal gaming state (low probability state, high probability state, ultra-high probability state). Since it is shortened, the disadvantage on the hall side can be suppressed.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the transition to the special mode (special state) is drawn by the special state transition lottery as described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59. The degree of expectation may be displayed as points or the like to suggest to the player. The timing of giving points and the like is not particularly limited. Further, such a suggestion effect may be performed not by the main substrate 409 but by a peripheral substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 510). And, when such a suggestion effect is performed, it can be expected to enhance the interest of the player.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the special mode as described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59 is performed after the end of the sign of gassing, a special effect (special state suggestion) suggesting that the special mode is in progress is performed. The production) may be executed. In the special state suggestion effect, for example, the content of the continuous effect (content of the precursor effect to return) that may occur when the rare role is won during the special mode may be suggested. Further, when the special state suggestion effect is executed, the continuous effect having a higher expectation may be easily selected from the plurality of types of continuous effects. Specifically, taking the lottery tables of FIGS. 81 and 82 as an example, when a special state suggestion effect is executed, a weak effect (weak story) occurs when a precursor effect (continuous effect) occurs thereafter. , Weak battle) makes it easier to select strong production (strong story, strong battle). By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player only by the appearance of the special state suggestion effect.

[13-2. Second technical idea]
According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, "a specific effect is executed in a gaming machine capable of executing any of a plurality of effects including a specific effect indicating a decision result regarding a transition to an advantageous game. In a later game, it is possible to realize a "game machine (second technical idea)" that makes it possible to execute a predetermined effect in a stage before the result of success or failure in a specific effect is shown.

The above "specific effect" corresponds to the "continuous effect" described in the instruction function processing of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and "in the game after the specific effect is executed, the result of success or failure in the specific effect is. The state in which the "predetermined effect before the indicated stage" is executed is executed again based on, for example, the "special mode" explained in the instruction function processing or the winning of the rare role in the "special mode". Corresponds to a precursory game (or continuous production within the precursory game) or the like.

More specifically, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as described in the instruction function processing, the advantageous game (AT game) is caused by the appearance of the "continuous effect" in the precursor effect performed in the precursor game. ) Can be taught to the player (see the description of step S624 and the like in FIG. 58). The precursory effect including the continuous effect is included in the present precursor indicating the transition to the AT game (AT winning) or the gasse precursor indicating not shifting to the AT game (AT non-winning). Therefore, the continuous production performed at the precursor of Gase does not show the transition to the advantageous game.

Further, the "continuous production" may be a mode in which one game is completed to teach whether or not the transition to the AT game is possible, but in most cases, a mode in which the continuous production is performed over a plurality of games is adopted. Further, when the "precursor effect" in the first embodiment is regarded as one of the "continuous effects", the effect is always performed over a plurality of games. Further, the "plurality of games" referred to here may be composed of a game in which an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed once for each game (so-called this game), or may be simulated during one game. It may be composed of a game (so-called pseudo game) that creates a mode of a plurality of games, or may be a mixture thereof.

Here, in a conventional gaming machine capable of displaying a continuous production during a precursory game, if the result of the continuous production denies the winning of an advantageous game, the player's interest for a while thereafter. There were not a few problems that the number continued to decline. To give a specific example, if a continuous production during a precursory game appears, such as winning a rare role in a high probability state of winning an AT, the player strongly expects the winning of the AT. When the continuous production ended in failure, the disappointment caused a sharp drop in expectations, and sometimes the diminished interest was not immediately restored.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, even if the result of the precursory effect (continuous effect) does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game (transition to AT) (that is, the precursory effect). (Even if it is a sign of a ghost), after the sign of a ghost is over, you can shift to a special mode that leads to the occurrence of the next sign game, so you can produce a stage before the failure result is shown in the first sign. It can be reproduced. In addition, since the precursory game can be executed again based on winning a high expectation role (rare role) during the special mode after the precursory sign, the precursory effect in such a precursory game can be used. It is possible to reproduce the production state of the previous stage than when the failure result is shown in the first precursor production.

Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment provided with such a second technical idea, the player's result is that the continuous production shows a negative result as in the case of the conventional gaming machine described above. Even if the continuous production shows the result of denying the winning of the advantageous game without continuously degrading the interest, the production of the previous stage can be reappeared before the winning / failing result of the advantageous game is shown. This has the effect of suppressing the decline in the interest of the player.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, after the result of denying the winning of the advantageous game in the "previous continuous production" is shown, the "previous stage production" appears. Even so, the winning result of the advantageous game is not always shown by the effect following the "previous stage effect" or the "previous stage effect", and the winning of the advantageous game may be denied. When the "previous stage effect" appears by shifting to the special mode after the end of the sign of the ghost, whether or not the winning result for the advantageous game is shown is done at the time of shifting to the special mode or during the special mode. It is decided based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, the winning combination).

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, if the "previous stage effect" is an effect that can suggest that the same effect as the "previous continuous effect" appears again. Often, it does not have to be the production included in the "sequential production". Then, even if the "previous stage effect" appears, whether or not the same effect as the "previous continuous effect" appears is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (for example, the winning combination).

Furthermore, the special state controlled in the special mode is characterized in that the degree of expectation for the advantageous game is higher than the state before the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the low probability state, the high probability state, and the ultra-high probability state). Therefore, according to such a slot machine 1, the degree of expectation for advantageous games is controlled to be different before and after the continuous production, so that the continuous production can be performed. Even if the result of the above does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game, the expectation of the player can be maintained even after the continuous production.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the continuous production that can be expected to shift to the advantageous game itself raises the expectation of the player, but when the result of the continuous production ends in failure (for example, AT is not won). Had the aspect that the degree of expectation dropped at once. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the result of the continuous effect does not indicate the winning of the advantageous game, and even if it is the continuous effect in the sign of the ghost, a special mode (for example, special) that can be controlled after that. Since the state) has a higher advantage than before the appearance of the continuous production, even if the result of the continuous production ends in failure, a higher expected state can be created after that. It works. In other words, the failure result of the continuous production is not just the end of the expected period, but it is a stepping stone to a more superior high expected period, thereby enhancing the interest of the player in multiple stages and expecting the player. It has the effect of maintaining the feeling for a long time.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition ratio of shifting to the special mode after the failure of the continuous effect may be different based on the effect mode of the continuous effect that has appeared. .. Specifically, for example, the higher the probability of transition to the special mode when the result of the continuous production ends in failure, the higher the probability that the continuous production with a low expectation appears (high probability). .. In such a case, if a continuous production with a low degree of expectation appears, the player's expectation that the result of the continuous production will be successful (winning the transition to an advantageous game) is relatively low. On the other hand, after that, the probability of shifting to the special mode, which has a higher advantage than before the appearance of the continuous production, is high, so that the player's expectation for the special mode is raised, and as a result, the player's long-term Expectations can be sustained.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the state transition lottery can be performed even during the execution of the continuous production, and in the specific game (for example, the final game) during the continuous production execution, the normal state transition lottery is performed. A state transition lottery can be performed using a better lottery table. Specifically, the state transition lottery A performed in step S649 of FIG. 58 corresponds to the state transition lottery performed during the execution of the continuous effect. Further, the special state transition lottery performed in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59 corresponds to a state transition lottery performed using a better table than the normal state transition lottery in a specific game during continuous production. .. According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, it is advantageous during the execution of the continuous production by enabling the state transition lottery having different advantages during the execution of the continuous production (including the end time). Not only can we expect a state transition related to a game (state transition lottery A), but in a specific game, we can expect a state transition related to an advantageous game (special state transition lottery) in a situation with a higher advantage. Therefore, while the continuous production is appearing, the player is expected not only to expect the result of the advantageous game transition shown by the continuous production, but also to be expected to win the future advantageous game due to the state transition. It can have the effect of maintaining the player's willingness to play.

In particular, when the specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed is the final game of continuous production, whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the superior special mode in the game when the transition to the special mode is performed. Not only can the player be entertained, but even in the game before the transition, the player is entertained whether or not to shift to an advantageous game (AT transition) depending on the result of the continuous production until the final game of the continuous production. Because it can be done, the interest of the player can be particularly enhanced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the state transition lottery may be performed at the start of the game of the next game of the final game in which the continuous effect is executed (for example, at the start operation of the start lever 210). good. Even in such a case, as in the case where the final game of the continuous production is a specific game in which the special state transition lottery is performed, the game shifts to an advantageous game depending on the result of the continuous production until the final game of the continuous production. While entertaining the player whether or not to (AT transition), even if the continuous production ends in failure, a special state transition lottery that can transition to a special state is performed after that, which is advantageous. Since it is possible to entertain the player whether or not to win the transition to the advantageous game in the special mode, it is expected that the expectation of the player will be maintained for a long period of time and the interest will be particularly enhanced.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, it is executed before the transition to the special mode by displaying a screen such as "Preparing for continuous production" or "Now, if you draw a rare role?" During the special mode. Even if the continuous production in the precursory game ends in a failure result, the player can be greatly expected that the precursory game or the continuous production will occur again, so that the player's disappointment due to the previous failure result can be disappointed. It can be suppressed.

In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment that realizes the second technical idea, the "special mode" is not a mere production mode, but a winning probability related to a special game or a special state (for example, AT first). This is a mode in which the probability of winning is given preferential treatment. For example, in the case of the instruction function processing described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like, if the winning combination is a "rare role" in the "special mode", preferential treatment such as winning the first AT hit is always made. Is provided. Also, in the "special mode", the probability that the precursory effect (which may be read as continuous effect here) will reoccur is set high, so the expectation for AT winning due to the reoccurrence of continuous effect can be increased. can. Regarding the gaming state controlled in such a "special mode", the following cases can be considered in the case of the AT instruction function processing described in the first embodiment.

The first case is a case of setting a state in which the transition is possible only when a specific condition is satisfied and a state in which the selection is made using a dedicated lottery table. Specifically, it is "special mode 1 to 3" shown in FIG. 63 and the like. As described in the description of FIG. 63 and the like, the "special states 1 to 3" are states that can be transferred only when a specific condition in the precursor game is satisfied, and are selected by using a dedicated lottery table. It is an AT lottery game state. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when a dedicated special gaming state is set in the "special mode" as described above, a dedicated gaming state that is not selected in other situations can be used. It is possible to make the superiority of the game played in the "special mode" extremely high.

The second case is not limited to when a specific condition is satisfied, but is a case where any of the states that can be transferred from the normal time is set. Specifically, for example, the "ultra-high accuracy state" shown in FIG. 63 can be mentioned. The "ultra-high-accuracy state" is an AT lottery game state in which a transition from a normal time to a low-accuracy state and a high-accuracy state is possible. It is also preferable as the AT lottery game state controlled in the "special mode". When the "ultra-high accuracy state" is selected by the state transition lottery performed in the predetermined game of continuous production, the game in the "special mode" is started. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, by setting a specific gaming state that can be transferred from the normal time in the "special mode" in this way, a new dedicated gaming state is prepared for the memory. A wide range of playability can be realized while suppressing an increase in the required area and suppressing the amount of processing by the CPU 1110.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a predetermined lottery (specifically, the special state transition lottery of step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59) is performed, so that the special mode is performed after the continuous production. However, the degree of expectation for whether or not to shift to the special mode may be displayed by points or the like to suggest to the player. The timing of giving points and the like is not particularly limited. Further, such a suggestion effect may be performed not by the main substrate 409 but by a peripheral substrate (for example, an effect control substrate 510). Then, when such a suggestion effect is performed, it can be expected that the player's interest in the transition to the special mode will be enhanced.

Then, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the processing flow after winning the special state transition lottery shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the special state transition lottery is performed at the end of the continuous production of the sign of gassing, and the special state transition lottery is performed. When the control of the state (that is, the transition to the special mode) is determined, the transition to the special mode is immediately performed after the end of the continuous effect. Further, as described above, in the special mode, the state is controlled to be different (more dominant state) from that before the execution of the continuous effect. By immediately shifting to the special mode after the continuous production in this way, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the degree of expectation in the game can be changed before and after the execution of the continuous production, and the expectation of the player can be changed. The decrease can be suppressed. In particular, when the degree of expectation is higher after the execution of the continuous production than before the execution, the expectation of the player can be strongly maintained.

Further, in step S644 of FIG. 58 and step S684 of FIG. 59, a processing example of performing a special state transition lottery when the number of remaining precursor games at the time of the precursory sign is 0 has been described. Since continuous production (a part of precursor production) is always performed inside, the situation where the number of remaining precursor games is 0 means the final game of continuous production. According to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, the transition control to the special mode is determined in the final game of continuous production, but in this case, the transition to the special mode is performed before the final game ( That is, since the loss due to the continuous production) is not confirmed and displayed, the player can enjoy the possibility of winning the result (AT transition winning) by the continuous production.

[13-3. Third technical idea]
According to the slot machine of the second embodiment, "to an advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed under any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations. The decision is made when the transition is drawn and the expected effect is determined to be executed in the gaming machine in which the expected effect indicating the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous gaming state is executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the lottery. It is possible to realize a "game machine (third technical idea) that makes it possible to change the appearance ratio of the expected effect so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect" in the subsequent games.

The above-mentioned "advantageous gaming state" corresponds to the "AT state" in the instruction function processing of the slot machine of the second embodiment, and similarly, the "expected effect" corresponds to the "precursor effect". In the slot machine of the second embodiment, the hell state flag is turned ON when the start of the precursor game period in which the precursor effect is performed is determined (steps S666 and S674 in FIG. 59). By S670), it is controlled to the hell state during the precursory game. When it is controlled to the hell state, the winning of the new AT first hit is suppressed (see Fig. 63), so the precursory effect that the execution is decided (even if it is not strictly decided, the precursory game) When the start is decided, it is also decided that the precursory effect is always executed). It is possible to suppress the influence on the execution mode. That is, since the appearance of a new precursor game is also suppressed by suppressing the winning of a new AT first hit in the hell state, the appearance ratio of the precursor effect is made variable in the direction of being suppressed. As a result, the precursory effect related to the precursory game being executed can be displayed in the execution mode at the time of the execution decision without generating a new precursory game during the precursory game.

Further, to more specifically show the third technical idea expressed by the slot machine of the second embodiment, "under one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations". A game in which a transition to an advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed is drawn, and an expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is appropriate is executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the lottery. When it is decided to execute the expected effect on the machine, the lottery state is controlled to the low expected state among a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations at a predetermined timing thereafter, and the transition to the advantageous gaming state is suppressed. By doing so, it can be said that it is a gaming machine that makes it possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the expected production regardless of the winning role in the subsequent games. At this time, the "low expectation state" corresponds to the "hell state".

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when a continuous production over a plurality of games is executed, the player's attention is focused on the production, so that the inside of the winning combination performed in each game during the production is performed. There was a tendency to be ignorant of the results of the lottery.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed even while the continuous production is performed, but depending on the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery (for example, a high expectation winning such as a rare role). (When a role is selected), the current production will be canceled due to the generation of another new production, or the current production will not be generated in order to continue the current production, etc. There is a problem that the execution mode of continuous production may be affected, and the player's expectation regarding these productions may change (mainly decrease).

More specifically, when the previous effect is canceled, it is known that the previous effect is a lost result at that point, and the player's expectation is lowered. In addition, if the subsequent production does not occur, it is presumed that the high-expected winning combination was selected but the lottery for transition to an advantageous game such as AT was lost, so that the player's expectation is also felt. Decreases. In addition, when the previous production is rounded up in the middle and the later production occurs, there is a strong tendency for the result display by the rounded up destination to be rounded down, so even the player's expectation is cut off. There is a risk that it will end up.

However, according to the slot machine of the second embodiment having the third technical idea as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that carefully handles the result of the internal lottery in each game. Explaining with specific processing, when the execution of the precursor game (especially the precursor game) is decided, a low probability state (hell state) is performed at a predetermined timing thereafter (for example, the timing when the precursor game flag is turned ON). By dropping to), the result of the internal lottery performed during the precursory game can be prevented from leading to the expectation for the special game. This is to provide a game situation (directing situation) that does not confuse the development contents based on each lottery result by a plurality of lottery opportunities, and thus has the effect of treating the result of the internal lottery in each game carefully. Can be done.

In the slot machine of the second embodiment having the third technical idea, "predetermined timing for dropping into a low-probability state (hell state)" can be classified as follows, and each has an effect. You can expect it.

First, if the game immediately after the execution of the Gase precursor is decided, or if the predetermined timing is to drop the start game of the Gase precursor to a low probability state (hell state), during the subsequent games (before shifting to the Gase precursor). No matter what winning combination is won (including the case where some preparation period is provided), the expectation for the special game by the winning combination can be suppressed, and it became a judgment factor of the running ghost sign. It is possible to secure the importance to the winning combination, and also to secure the expectation of the player for the result of the running Gase precursor.

In addition, if the predetermined timing is to drop somewhere during the execution of the mortgage to a low-probability state (hell state), at least the winning combination in the internal lottery after dropping to the low-probability state will be applied to the running precursor effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player's expectation from changing, it is possible to contribute to ensuring the execution of the production with an emphasis on the result of the internal lottery in each game. Here, it is possible to interweave "roughness production" and "normal production" in addition to "continuous production (or precursor production)" in the explanation of the second embodiment as the production pattern of the sign of the game. However, for example, if these three types of effects are performed in the Gase precursor, the player may not be able to detect that the game is a precursor game at the stage when the "normal effect" appears, but " Even before the "continuous effect (or precursor effect)" appears, it can be inferred that the game is a precursor game when the "rough effect" appears. However, if the player can guess that it is a precursor game and then drop it to a low probability state, the player's expectation may decrease if he wins a rare role in the meantime. When a predetermined timing for dropping somewhere in the inside to a low-probability state is set, it is preferable to set at least the time when the "roughness effect" appears.

Further, in the slot machine of the second embodiment having the third technical idea, the degree of expectation of the gaming state is lower than usual in order to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect (precursor effect) to be executed. There is a period during which you are forced to drop into a low probability state (hell state). In the case of forcibly dropping to a low probability state in this way, the ball ejection rate generally drops, so that in the slot machine of the second embodiment, the drop rate is offset by a high probability state (for example, high probability state). You can increase the period / probability of (probability state or ultra-high probability state), improve the probability of first hit when you draw a rare role, or improve the probability of winning a rare role in the first place. .. Thus, according to the slot machine of the second embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that carefully handles the result of the internal lottery, and to raise and strengthen the situation advantageous to the player. In addition, since the ball output rate can be sharpened, the playability can be improved.

Further, in the slot machine of the second embodiment having the third technical idea, in order to make the appearance ratio of the expected effect variable so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect (precursor effect) to be executed. As described above, the process is not limited to forcibly dropping to a low probability state (hell state) with a lower expectation than usual for a predetermined game period, but the predetermined game period. Other methods may be used that make it difficult to win the advantageous gaming state (AT). Specifically, for example, during the predetermined game period, the winning probability may be changed (the game state itself is changed) by changing the lottery table used for the lottery, or the game is performed during the predetermined game period. Regarding the game, the number of executions of the internal lottery may be suppressed by making it appear that a plurality of games are being played by simulated games. Furthermore, other processing may be used that makes it difficult to establish a rare role that easily leads to winning of the expected production. Even when such processing is performed, the appearance ratio of the expected effect can be made variable so as to suppress the influence on the execution mode of the expected effect in the game after the execution of the expected effect is determined. The slot machine of the second embodiment can have the same effect as the case of controlling the hell state for a predetermined game period.

[13-4. Fourth technical idea]
According to the slot machine of the third embodiment, "to an advantageous gaming state in which an advantageous game advantageous to the player is executed under any one of a plurality of lottery states having different winning expectations. In a gaming machine in which a transition is drawn and an expected effect indicating whether or not the transition to the advantageous gaming state is successful is executed over a plurality of games based on the result of the lottery, the advantageous gaming state is executed when the expected effect is executed. When an advantageous winning combination (for example, a rare role) that is easier to win than other winning combinations is selected as the winning combination, the advantageous winning combination is selected while teaching the result of the expected production. It is possible to realize a "game machine (fourth technical idea)" that makes it possible to execute another expected production triggered by the above.

The above-mentioned "advantageous game state" corresponds to the "AT state" in the instruction function processing of the slot machine of the third embodiment, and similarly, the "expected effect" is a "precursor effect", a "continuous effect" or a "precursor game". Is equivalent to. In the slot machine of the third embodiment, when the expected effect (for example, the precursor game A) is executed based on the internal lottery result (the lottery result of the winning combination), the high expectation combination is won during the execution of the expected effect. When the execution of another expected effect (for example, the precursor game C) is selected by being selected as a role, the precursor game A is continuously executed, and the precursor game C is executed after the precursor game A is completed. Then, the slot machine of the third embodiment teaches the result of the expected effect (precursor game A), and makes it possible to separately execute the expected effect (precursor game C) due to the selection of the high expected combination. Therefore, it is possible to realize control that respects both the previous expected production and another expected production, and it is possible to achieve the effect of maintaining the expectation for the internal lottery result that triggered the execution of each expected production.

In a conventional gaming machine, when continuous production over a plurality of games is executed, the internal lottery of the winning combination is performed even while the continuous production is being performed, but the result of the winning combination in the internal lottery is used. (For example, when a high-expected winning combination such as a rare role is selected), another continuous production will be generated and the current continuous production will be canceled or the current continuous production will be continued. Processing such as cancellation of another continuous production was performed. In a gaming machine in which such processing is performed, the result of each continuous production is not sufficiently taught because a part of the continuous production that could have occurred in each of them does not appear, which reduces the interest of the player. There was a risk of causing it. In addition, there is also a problem that the result of the internal lottery that triggered the execution of the continuous production is disregarded because a part of the continuous production that could occur is not displayed.

On the other hand, according to the slot machine of the third embodiment having the fourth technical idea as described above, it was performed during the "previous expected production" and the "previous expected production" that are already being executed. By executing both expected effects and teaching the results of each expected effect to the player regarding the "later expected effect" determined based on the internal lottery result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. It has the effect of respecting not only the expected production but also the result of the internal lottery.

Further, according to the slot machine of the third embodiment, as described above, even if another precursor game is won during the precursor game (Gase precursor), control can be performed with respect for both precursor games. In order to realize such control, it is not necessary to forcibly change the lottery state (AT lottery game state) related to the special game state during the execution of the precursor game. In other words, by making it possible to execute the precursor game in the same lottery state as the normal time before the start of the precursor game, the player feels the expectation for AT winning and precursor production (continuous production) when the player wins the high expectation role. Can be maintained. Then, by not forcibly changing the lottery state regarding the special game state during the precursory game as described above, the period during which it is extremely difficult to win the special game state is reduced as compared with the first and second embodiments. Can be done.

Further, in the slot machine of the third embodiment, after the "posterior gastric precursor" is executed after the end of the "previous gassing precursor", as in the first and second embodiments, more than before. Since the mode is immediately shifted to the special mode in which the expectation for the special gaming state is high, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest and maintain or improve the player's expectation for a relatively long period of time. That is, even if the signs of disappointment occur continuously and the result of the AT transition is taught, the player is transferred to the special mode with a higher advantage after that, and the player is at least until the special mode ends. You can keep expecting. In addition, if the rare role is won in the special mode, the precursor game is started again, and the expectation of the player can be further increased.

Further, as shown in the derivative example, the slot machine of the third embodiment suppresses the number of Gase precursors that are set when a high-expected combination is frequently won during the precursory game (Gase precursor). be able to. According to the slot machine of the third embodiment, the player's interest is reduced by avoiding a series of redundant precursors while enabling control that respects a plurality of expected effects (precursor effects). It can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in the derivative example, the slot machine of the third embodiment can forcibly set the Gase precursor when the high-ranking high expectation combination is won a predetermined number of times during the precursor game (Gase precursor). can. According to the slot machine of the third embodiment, the ratio of starting the precursory game can be increased for the high-ranking high-expected role that originally has high expectation, so that the internal lottery result of winning the high-ranking high-expected role can be obtained. It is possible to provide the player with a cherished production.

Further, in the slot machine of the third embodiment, as shown in the derivative example, if the high-expected combination is won multiple times during the precursor game (especially during the precursor game), the precursor game (gas precursor) is reset. You may limit the maximum number of times (middle). According to the slot machine of the third embodiment, when the winning of the high-expected role is won multiple times in a short period of time during the precursory game, the precursory game is repeatedly reset and the precursory game is excessive. Since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game continues for a long period of time, it can be expected to enhance the interest of the player over a moderate long period of time.

[14. Chance continuous production]
The slot machine 1 according to the present invention has a continuous chance effect in which the degree of expectation regarding an advantageous state advantageous to the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "advantageous expectation degree" for the sake of brevity) is suggested over a plurality of games. .. In the following, such a continuous chance production will be described in detail.

As described above, the slot machine 1 is equipped with an AT game as a special game advantageous to the player, and the following suggests the degree of expectation (advantageous expectation degree) to hit the AT game for the first time by continuous production of chances. Explain that it will be done. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the "advantageous state" that is the target of the degree of advantage expectation suggested by the continuous production of chances may be any gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and is limited to the first AT hit. is not. Specifically, for example, the number of AT games and the number of AT sets may be added, or the higher AT game may be won (so-called special zone winning). When the slot machine 1 is a gaming machine provided with an ART game or an RT game, the advantageous state may be replaced with the ART game or the RT game. The chance continuous effect can be executed in any of the slot machines 1 of the first to third embodiments described above.

In principle, the continuous chance production suggests the degree of expectation regarding the "advantageous state" that is advantageous to the player, but as a result, the "advantageous state" is achieved by avoiding the "advantageous state" that is disadvantageous to the player. In exceptional cases, it may suggest the degree of expectation regarding the "disadvantageous state".

Then, in the chance continuous production according to the present embodiment, it occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, and the final game of the chance continuous production over a plurality of games (or a game at a predetermined timing after the chance continuous production is completed). ), The "advantageous state win / fail lottery" is performed, and based on the degree of advantage expectation finally suggested by the chance continuous production, the advantageous state wins (in this example, the AT game wins, but as described above). , The number of AT games and the number of AT sets may be added), which is characterized by a one-shot lottery.

In addition, the continuous production executed in the chance continuous production is selected from a plurality of types of continuous productions that suggest different degrees of advantage and expectation, but the continuous production to be executed is promoted (ranked up) at a predetermined opportunity. there is a possibility. Then, at the time of rank-up, the chance continuous production is overwritten or added by the continuous production suggesting a higher degree of advantage expectation than the present, so that the winning expectation in the final "advantageous state winning / failing lottery" can be increased.

[14-1. Control processing of continuous chance production]
Here, the main control processes related to the continuous production of chances will be described. In the chance continuous effect in the present embodiment, whether or not the chance continuous effect can be executed and the execution effect are determined mainly by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110). The content of the determination by the main board 409 is appropriately notified to the effect control board 510 by a command or the like, and the effect control board 510 (particularly CPU1118 or VDP1124) that receives the command displays a predetermined effect image on the effect screen of the image display body 500. Control to make it.

[14-1-1. Whole processing]
FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of an overall processing procedure in the chance continuous production. The process shown in FIG. 89 is performed after the execution of the internal lottery process shown in step S3 in the basic one-game processing procedure described with reference to FIG. 54, and is mainly executed by the main board 409 (particularly CPU 1110). To.

First, in step S801, the number of various games is subtracted by "1". The various game numbers referred to here are a general term for a plurality of types of games related to continuous chance production, and these are held in the main board 409 (for example, RAM 1114). Specifically, there are a "waiting game number" indicating the number of games until the start of the chance continuous production is waited, and a "continuous production game number" indicating the number of games in which the chance continuous production is executed. Further, it is assumed that the main board 409 holds, for example, a "state flag" in the RAM 1114 that can identify the gaming state related to the chance continuous production. Specifically, for example, when the chance continuous effect is not being executed and the future execution is not confirmed, a value indicating "normal state" is set in the state flag, and the chance continuous effect is not executed yet and in the future. When the execution is confirmed, the value indicating "continuous effect standby state" is set in the state flag, and the value indicating "continuous effect state" is set in the state flag during the execution of the chance continuous effect.

Then, in the subtraction of the number of various games in step S801, the various games are subtracted by "1" based on the current state indicated by the state flag. For example, when the state flag indicates "normal state", since the number of games related to the chance continuous production is not set, no special processing is performed. In addition, when the chance continuous production is executed on condition that the predetermined number of games is exhausted (so-called ceiling function is provided), the number of games up to the ceiling is subtracted by "1" even in the normal state. do. Further, for example, when the state flag indicates "continuous production standby state", the number of standby games is subtracted by "1" without subtracting the number of continuous production games. Further, for example, when the state flag indicates "continuous production state", the number of continuous production games is subtracted by "1".

Next, in step S802, the state determination is performed. This can be determined by referring to the value of the "state flag" as described in step S801. In the case of the "normal state", the process proceeds to the process of step S803, and in the case of the "continuous production standby state". The process proceeds to the process of step S805, and in the case of the "continuous effect state", the process proceeds to the process of step S807.

In step S803, a process (continuous effect lottery process) regarding whether or not the chance continuous effect can be executed is performed. The details of the continuous production lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 and the like. After that, in step S804, the mode transition process is performed, and the entire process related to the chance continuous production is completed. In the mode transition process in step S804, for example, a low probability mode in which the degree of advantage expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of AT winning) is set to be low as a whole and a degree of advantage expectation higher than the low probability mode are set as a whole. It is assumed that processing related to mode transition is performed between the high accuracy mode and the high accuracy mode. The handling of such a high-accuracy mode and a low-accuracy mode is the same as that of a general gaming machine. It is assumed that the transition to the high-accuracy mode will be performed at the time of winning or when the specified number of games is exhausted.

In step S805, a process (rank-up process) relating to a change (promotion) of the continuous effect executed in the chance continuous effect is performed. The details of the rank-up process will be described later with reference to FIG. 95 and the like. In the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, the rank-up process is mainly a process for performing promotion during continuous production execution, but by performing the rank-up process even in the continuous production standby state as in step S805, chances are continuous. When a predetermined opportunity arrives while waiting before the production starts (for example, when a rare role is established), the continuous production performed in the future chance continuous production can be promoted. Then, in step S806, a process relating to the transition from the continuous effect standby state to the continuous effect state (continuous effect transition process) is performed, and then the entire process related to the chance continuous effect is terminated. The details of the continuous effect transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98 and the like.

In step S807, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of continuous production games subtracted in step S801 is other than "0". If the value of the number of continuous production games is other than "0" (YES in step S807), it means that the execution game of the chance continuous production remains, so the rank-up process is performed in the same manner as in step S805. (Step S808), the entire process related to the continuous chance production is completed. On the other hand, when the value of the number of continuous production games is "0" (NO in step S807), it means that the game is the end game of the chance continuous production, that is, the game in which the "advantageous state winning / failing lottery" is performed. Processing related to the execution of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery (processing at the end of continuous production) is performed (step S809), and then the entire processing related to the chance continuous production is terminated. The details of the processing at the end of the continuous effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 99 and the like.

As described above, by performing the processes shown in steps S801 to S809 of FIG. 89 in each game, the main board 409 can control the chance continuous effect. In the following, the main processing in the chance continuous production will be described in detail. As described in [10-1-1] and the like, in the slot machine 1, most of the gaming states are controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state, and the AT game is one of the advantageous states (special states). Is feasible in either the general state or the bonus internal state. Therefore, in the following description, the processing of the chance continuous production in the bonus internal state will be specifically described. However, the chance continuous production of the present embodiment can be executed even in the general state as a matter of course, and the following description regarding the chance continuous production can be appropriately read when the chance continuous production is executed in the general state.

[14-1-2. Continuous production lottery processing]
The continuous effect lottery process shown in step S803 of FIG. 89 will be described in detail. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure example of the continuous effect lottery process.

First, the main board 409 performs a continuous production winning / failing lottery to determine the winning or losing of the chance continuous production (step S811). FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery table (continuous winning / failing lottery table) used in the continuous winning / failing lottery. The continuous winning / failing lottery table shown in FIG. 91 is an example of a lottery table that is referred to when performing a continuous effect winning / failing lottery in the bonus internal state and the low probability mode. The lottery table for the winners in the bonus internal state is illustrated in FIG. Further, the low accuracy mode is as described in the mode transition process shown in step S804 of FIG. 89.

In the slot machine 1, different continuous effect winning / failing lottery tables may be prepared according to the gaming state. At this time, for example, the continuous effect winning / failing lottery is performed in the general state (see FIG. 49) and in the high accuracy mode. In that case, a dedicated continuous production winning / failing lottery table is referred to. Further, a lottery table for different distributions may be used depending on the setting of the slot machine. The fact that different lottery tables and distribution tables can be used based on the game state and settings is not limited to the continuous production winning / failing lottery table, but is also the same for other lottery tables and distribution tables described later. Can be applied to.

According to FIG. 91, the winning or losing of the chance continuous production is drawn based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery of the game, and the winning probability (or the number of places) is a value different depending on the winning combination. In the example of FIG. 91, if the result of the internal lottery is a strong rare role (strong watermelon, strong cherry, strong chance eye, strongest) or a miss, the winning combination is always won while the winning combination is pushed. If it is a forward bell (AT1 to AT10), the chance continuous production will not be won. In FIG. 91, as the overall tendency of placement of the number, the winning combination with a low winning probability in the internal lottery (including the loss) is relatively easy to win the chance continuous production, and the winning combination with a high winning probability in the internal lottery is It is difficult to win the chance continuous production.

In step S812, the main board 409 confirms whether or not the chance continuous production has been won in the continuous production winning / failing lottery performed in step S811, and if it wins, proceeds to the process of step S813. If the winner has not been won, the continuous production lottery process ends.

In step S813, the main board 409 sets the state flag related to the chance continuous effect to the "continuous effect standby state".

Next, in step S814, the main board 409 performs a base level lottery that determines the overall expectation degree (base level) of the chance continuous production won in step S811. The base level determined in step S814 is stored in the RAM 1114 and is held until the target chance continuous effect is completed (more strictly, at least until the advantageous state winning / failing lottery described later is executed).

FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery table (base level lottery table) used in the base level lottery. In the chance continuous production of this embodiment, the basic expectation level (base level) of the entire production is set to three types, "low", "medium", and "high" in ascending order of the degree of expectation, and which base level is used. Even if the same continuous production appears in the subsequent chance continuous production, the suggested "advantageous expectation degree" is different depending on whether or not is selected. The types of such base levels are not limited to three types, and if a plurality of types of base levels are not prepared, the process of step S814 becomes unnecessary. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 92, the possibility that the base level “low” is selected is the highest at about 77%, and the possibility that the base level “medium” is selected is about 20%, which is the most advantageous degree. There is a 4% chance that a high base level "high" will be selected.

Next, in step S815, the main board 409 performs an initial stage lottery to determine the continuous effect (initial stage) initially selected when the chance continuous effect won in step S811 is executed. The initial stage determined in step S815 is stored in the RAM 1114, and is held until the initial stage is updated by the rank-up process or the chance continuous production ends as the initial stage. When the continuous effect selected by the rank-up process is updated, the information indicating the updated continuous effect (in the case where the update is performed multiple times, "the continuous effect selected in the latest state") is displayed. It is held until the end of the chance continuous production. Such "continuous production selected in the latest state" is hereinafter referred to as "latest continuous production" or "current stage".

FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery table (initial stage lottery table) used in the initial stage lottery. In FIG. 93, the continuous production numbers “0” to “7” correspond to a plurality of types of continuous productions that may be executed as chance continuous productions, and in this example, a total of eight types of continuous productions are performed. Is prepared. The specific contents of these continuous effects will be described later with reference to FIG. 101 and the like. As an outline, the smaller the continuous effect number, the lower the degree of advantage expectation, and the larger the continuous effect number, the more advantageous expectation. It will be a continuous production with a high degree.

According to FIG. 93, the initial stage is determined based on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery in the game. If the replay that is relatively easy to win by the internal lottery is the winning combination, the initial stage with a low degree of advantage expectation (specifically, the continuous production of "0" is always selected). In addition, if a rare role that is harder to win by internal lottery than replay is a winning role, there is a possibility that a continuous production other than "0" will be selected as the initial stage, and the winning role is the strongest. In that case, the continuous production of No. 7 having the highest degree of advantageous expectation is always selected.

By performing the initial stage lottery using the table as shown in FIG. 93, the initial stage of the continuous chance production can be changed depending on the winning combination of the game. In particular, when a rare role with a low winning frequency is a winning role, there is a high possibility that a continuous production with a relatively high degree of advantage expectation will be selected for the initial stage as a benefit of winning the rare role. That is, according to the present embodiment, when the rare role is won, not only the winning of the chance continuous production (the continuous production winning / failing lottery of step S811) can be expected, but also the selection of the initial stage with a high degree of expectation (step S815). Since it can be expected from the initial stage lottery), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, in step S816, the main board 409 uses a predetermined lottery table (waiting game number lottery table) in order to determine the number of waiting games to be set until the execution of the chance continuous effect won in step S811 is started. ) To draw a lottery for the number of waiting games.

FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining an example of a waiting game number lottery table. In the table example of FIG. 94, the number of standby games to be determined is divided into any of "3 games (3G)" to "5 games (5G)", and the ratio of selecting 3 games is the highest.

In the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, as described in step S805 of FIG. 89, since the rank-up process capable of promoting the continuous production executed in the chance continuous production is performed even in the continuous production standby state, step S816 is performed. The longer the number of waiting games determined by, the more chances of ranking up in the continuous production waiting state, which is advantageous for the player. Note that FIG. 94 is only an example of the waiting game number lottery table, and a longer waiting game number may be set or the waiting game number may not be set (allocated to the waiting game number of 0G).

Then, in step S817, the main board 409 sets the number of standby games determined in step S816 to a predetermined flag (standby game number flag), and ends the continuous effect lottery process.

As described above, by performing the processes of steps S811 to S817 shown in FIG. 90, the success or failure of the chance continuous production and the execution content of the chance continuous production when the winner is won are determined.

[14-1--3. Rank up process]
The rank-up process shown in steps S805 and S808 of FIG. 89 will be described in detail. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing procedure of the rank-up process. As described in FIG. 89, in the present embodiment, not only the rank-up process is performed while the chance continuous effect is being executed (continuous effect state), but also the rank is ranked while waiting for the chance continuous effect to be executed (continuous effect standby state). By performing the up processing, the promotion opportunity of the continuous production executed in the chance continuous production is enhanced.

In the rank-up process, first, the main board 409 performs a rank-up lottery for determining the degree of promotion (number of rank-ups) from the continuous production currently being executed or waiting (step S821).

FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery table (rank-up lottery table) used in the rank-up lottery. The rank-up lottery table shown in FIG. 96 is an example of a lottery table referred to in the bonus internal state and the low probability mode, similar to the continuous win / fail lottery table illustrated in FIG. 91. According to FIG. 96, the number of rank-ups is selected based on the winning combination selected by the internal lottery in the game. As an overall tendency, in the case of a winning combination that is relatively easy to win, the rank is not increased (the number of rank-ups is "0") or is suppressed to a small degree (for example, the number of rank-ups is "1"). On the other hand, in the case of a winning combination (rare role) or a loss, which is relatively difficult to win, the degree of rank up is set to a large extent. For example, in the case of FIG. 96, one or more rank-ups are guaranteed at the time of winning a rare role or a loss. And, when the weak watermelon, weak cherry, and weak chance are won, the number of rank-ups is divided up to 3 levels, while the strong rare role, strong watermelon, strong cherry, and strong chance. At the time of winning the bell regardless of the order of eyes and pushes, the number of rank-ups is distributed up to 7 levels. Furthermore, at the time of the strongest winning, 7 levels of rank up are always selected.

Next, in step S822, the main board 409 determines whether or not the number of rank-ups determined by the rank-up lottery in step S821 is other than "0". When it is determined that the number of rank-ups is "0", that is, no rank-up is performed (NO in step S822), the rank-up process is terminated without performing any special processing. If the number of rank-ups is other than "0", that is, if it is determined that the rank is increased by several stages (YES in step S822), the process proceeds to step S823. In the following description, the fact that the number of rank-ups determined in the rank-up lottery is other than "0" is expressed as "winning the rank-up lottery".

In step S823, the main board 409 refers to the information indicating the "latest continuous effect" stored in the RAM 1114, and adds the number of rank-ups determined in the rank-up lottery of step S821 to the destination. Determine the continuous production (transition destination stage).

Here, a specific rank-up example will be described with respect to step S823. As a first example, the chance continuous production is won in the continuous production winning / failing lottery (step S811 in FIG. 90), and the continuous production number "4" is selected as the initial stage in the initial stage lottery (step S815 in FIG. 90). Suppose. In such a situation, if the rank-up lottery of step S821 is performed and the rank-up number "2" is selected, the transition destination stage is promoted by two stages from the current stage "4" and the continuous production number. It will be a continuous production of "6".

Further, as a second example of specific rank-up, it is assumed that the rank-up number "5" is selected as a result of the rank-up lottery, assuming that the current stage is the same until the continuous production number "4" is continuous production. .. At this time, as in the first example, if the number of rank-ups is simply added to the current stage, the transition destination stage becomes "9". However, in this example, only the chance continuous productions from the continuous production numbers "0" to "7" are prepared, and the upper limit "7" is internally exceeded. In the present embodiment, when the transition destination stage exceeds the upper limit in this way, it is determined that the special situation (winning confirmation status) in which the winning of the advantageous state is confirmed is determined, and the winning process of the advantageous state is immediately executed. I am doing it.

That is, in step S824, the main board 409 determines whether or not the winning confirmation status has been reached in the determination of the transition destination stage performed in step S823, and if it is determined that the winning confirmation status has been reached (step S824). YES), an advantageous state (for example, AT first hit) winning process is executed (step S825). In the AT first hit process in step S825, predetermined internal processes (for example, determination of the initial number of AT games, determination of the AT game start time, etc.) required for starting the AT game are performed. Further, when the process of step S825 is performed, it is not necessary to perform the effect related to the chance continuous effect after that, so that the main board 409 clears (initializes or deletes) the values of various games related to the chance continuous effect. At the same time, after setting the status flag to "normal status", the rank-up process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S824 that the winning confirmation status is not indicated by the determination of the transition destination stage (NO in step S824), the main board 409 redetermines the number of games to be executed for the chance continuous production, and the chance It is set to "the number of continuous production games", which is one of the number of various games related to continuous production (step S826). The "number of continuous production games" is held in the RAM 1114 as one of the various games related to the continuous production of chances, and when the state flag is in the "continuous production state", it is decremented by 1 for each game in step S801 of FIG. To.

Here, FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining an example of a distribution table (continuous production game number distribution table) used for determining the number of continuous production games. According to FIG. 97, the number of continuous production games is divided into 3 to 6 games based on which continuous production is selected as the transition destination stage, and the degree of advantage expectation corresponding to the continuous production is high (continuous production number). Is larger), the larger the number of games is given.

Here, as described in the waiting game number lottery (step S816 in FIG. 90), in the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, the opportunity of rank up is given during the continuous production standby or the continuous production, and the chance of rank up is given. The greater the number, the more advantageous the player. Then, as described above, in the determination of the number of continuous production games in step S826, the higher the degree of advantage expectation of the transition destination stage (the larger the continuous production number), the larger the number of continuous production games is given. Therefore, in the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, the more the rank-up is repeated and the destination stage is promoted, the larger the number of continuous production games to be reset (overwritten, added) after that is likely to increase. Can provide a favorable situation for.

In step S826, the number of continuous production games is set based on the transition destination stage after the rank up, and various methods can be adopted for this setting method. For example, the remaining number of continuous production games up to the rank up may be carried over after the rank up and set in addition to the new number of continuous production games determined based on the transition destination stage. In this case, the number of new continuous production games accompanying the rank up is added to the number of remaining games. Further, instead of the addition method, the number of remaining games in the number of continuous production games up to the rank up may be rounded down, and only a new number of continuous production games determined based on the transition destination stage may be set. In this case, the number of continuous production games is overwritten each time the rank is increased. Further, as the number of continuous production games determined based on the transition destination stage at the time of rank up, a fixed value based on the transition destination stage may be selected as shown in FIG. 97, or from within a predetermined range. The variable value may be drawn by lottery.

As described above, by performing the processes of steps S821 to S826 shown in FIG. 95, it is possible to realize the rank-up process for promoting the execution effect in the chance continuous effect based on the winning combination. In addition, in the chance continuous production of this embodiment, the predetermined opportunity for the rank-up to be executed is not necessarily limited to the winning combination by the internal lottery. In addition, for example, it is based on the result of a lottery different from the internal lottery of the winning combination (specifically, for example, a combination lottery in a pseudo game using freeze control). You may do it.

[14-1--4. Continuous production transition processing]
The continuous effect transition process shown in step S806 of FIG. 89 will be described in detail. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure example of the continuous effect transition process. The continuous effect transition process is a process executed in a situation where the state flag of "continuous effect standby state" is set, and when the number of games for the number of waiting games is exhausted, the chance continuous effect is executed. Get ready to start.

First, in step S831, the main board 409 refers to the value of the number of waiting games, which is one of the number of games related to the continuous chance production, and determines whether or not the number of waiting games is "0". If the number of waiting games is other than "0" (NO in step S831), the condition for starting the execution of the chance continuous effect is not satisfied, so that the continuous effect transition process is terminated.

When the number of standby games is "0" in step S831 (YES in step S831), the main board 409 releases the "continuous effect standby state" set in the state flag, and sets the state flag to "continuous". Set to "Production state" (step S832).

Next, the main board 409 sets the number of execution games of the chance continuous production to start execution to the "number of continuous production games" which is one of the various games related to the chance continuous production (step S833). If the "number of continuous production games" has been set by the setting of the number of continuous production games in the rank-up process (step S826 in FIG. 95) by the time the process of step S833 is performed, the process of step S833 is performed. The "number of continuous production games" will not be set again. If the "number of continuous production games" has not been set by the time the process of step S833 is performed, that is, the rank is raised even once after winning the chance continuous production in the continuous production winning / failing lottery (step S811 in FIG. 90). If is not performed, the number of continuous production games corresponding to the initial stage is set.

The number of continuous production games corresponding to the initial stage can be determined by using the continuous production game number distribution table exemplified in FIG. 97, for example, in the same manner as in step S826 of FIG. Further, the number of continuous production games corresponding to the initial stage is not set for the first time in step S833, but may be set in advance at any timing of steps S813 to S817 in FIG. 90, for example. It should be noted that both the number of continuous production games corresponding to the initial stage and the number of continuous production games in the rank-up process do not necessarily have to be selected from the number of games having a fluctuation range using the distribution table, and are determined in advance. A fixed number of games may be set. Specifically, for example, if 3 games are always set instead of being set between 3 games and 6 games as illustrated in the continuous production game number distribution table of FIG. 97, the continuous production game The small number is a disadvantage for the player. However, as much as the number of continuous production games is suppressed, other lottery in the chance continuous production (specifically, continuous production success / failure lottery, base level lottery, initial stage lottery, waiting game number lottery, rank-up lottery, or advantageous state Since it can be used for the distribution of the winning / failing lottery), it is possible to give profits to the player in the above other lottery.

As described above, by performing the processes of steps S831 to S833 shown in FIG. 98, when the standby game is digested in the continuous effect standby state, the preparation for starting the execution of the chance continuous effect is prepared.

[14-1-5. Processing at the end of continuous production]
The process at the end of the continuous effect shown in step S809 of FIG. 89 will be described in detail. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of a processing procedure for processing at the end of continuous production. As described in step S809 of FIG. 89, in the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, the continuous production executed last (“latest continuous production”) while the processing at the end of the continuous production is performed in the end game. The advantage state winning / failing lottery is executed based on the degree of advantage expectation suggested by.

First, in step S841, the main board 409 is in a predetermined advantageous state (for example, AT first hit) using a dedicated lottery table based on a predetermined trigger accompanied by the operation of the player (for example, the starting operation of the starting lever 210). Win / fail lottery (advantageous state win / fail lottery). As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 100, the above-mentioned dedicated lottery table (advantageous state winning / failing lottery table) has a different winning probability set depending on the "latest continuous production" in the chance continuous production, and the "latest". The higher the continuous production (in other words, the continuous production with a large value of the continuous production number), the easier it is to obtain the winning result. Information indicating the "latest continuous production" is stored in the RAM 1114. Explaining the advantageous state winning / failing lottery in a more specific process, the main board 409 acquires a random number value at the timing when the starting operation of the starting lever 210 is performed, and applies the acquired random number value to the advantageous state winning / failing lottery table. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the first AT hit is correct. Therefore, in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery in the present embodiment, the winning probability changes depending on what kind of advantageous state winning / failing lottery table is used, but whether or not the winning result can be obtained depends on the operation of a predetermined opportunity. It has the characteristic that the operation of the player is directly related to the winning result.

FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery table (advantageous state winning / failing lottery table) used in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery. In FIG. 100, a combination of a continuous effect number corresponding to each of a plurality of continuous effects that can be executed in a chance continuous effect and a base level (see step S814 in FIG. 90) is used to determine the number of winnings and wins in an advantageous state. The probability is shown.

Here, the features of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery when the lottery table of FIG. 100 is used will be described. First, when comparing between the same base levels, the number is distributed so that there is a possibility of winning in all continuous productions regardless of the base level, and the larger the continuous production number, the higher the winning probability. It is designed to be. For example, when the base level is "low", the winning probability when the continuous production number "0" is selected is only about 0.39%, and it can hardly be expected to win the advantageous state, but the continuous production number "6". The winning probability when the number is selected is about 50.78%, and about half can be won in an advantageous state. Further, in the lottery table of FIG. 100, the winning probability is 100.00% when the continuous production number "7" is selected when the base level is "high", so that the winning is always advantageous. There is also a special situation to do.

Next, when the characteristics of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery when the lottery table of FIG. 100 is used are compared between the base levels, even if the same continuous production number is selected, the base levels are "low", "medium", and The numbers are sorted so that the winning probability increases in the order of "high". For example, when the continuous production number "0" is selected, the winning probability when the base level is "low" is about 0.39% (about 1/256), and while the winning in an advantageous state can hardly be expected. The winning probability at the base level "medium" is as high as about 1.17% (about 1/85), and the winning probability at the base level "high" is about 3.91% (about 1/26). By increasing to, a low but realistic winning probability that can be expected to win an advantageous game is given.

Also, when comparing between base levels, it is better when the lower (lower) continuous effect number is selected at the higher base level than when the higher (higher) continuous effect number is selected at the lower base level. The probability of winning in an advantageous state may be high. Specifically, for example, when the base level is "low" and the continuous effect number "3" is selected, the winning probability is about 11.72%. On the other hand, if the base level is "high", the winning probability is about 15.63% even when the continuous effect number "2" is selected, which exceeds the above-mentioned about 11.72%.

A specific display example will be described later in [14-2-2], but in the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, the continuous production corresponding to the selected continuous production number is an image display body that can be recognized by the player. While it is executed at 500, the base level is not specified to the player in principle. From the above, according to the chance continuous production of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the lower continuous production (continuous production with a relatively small continuous production number) is displayed, the base level selected internally. If is higher, it is possible to create a situation in which a higher-ranked continuous effect (a continuous effect with a higher continuous effect number) can be expected to be won in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery. That is, even when the lower continuous effect is displayed, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating and to have a sense of expectation for the advantageous state winning / failing lottery.

The lottery table in FIG. 100 is an example of an advantageous state winning / failing lottery table, and the distribution of the number of placements can be changed at the time of design. For example, when the lowest continuous effect (continuous effect number "0") is selected, a case may be prepared in which the advantageous state cannot be won by not distributing the number. Further, for example, not only the base level "high" but also the winning probability in the case of the continuous production number "7" even if the base level is "low" or "medium" is set to 100%, which is an advantageous state. A case may be prepared in which the player can recognize the situation in which the winning is confirmed. At this time, specifically, when the continuous effect of the continuous effect number "7" is executed on the image display body 100, the player can recognize that the winning of the advantageous state is promised. ..

Further, the predetermined opportunity to execute the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is not limited to the starting operation of the starting lever 210 as long as it involves an operation by the player, for example, a pressing operation of the MAX input button 206, the reel stop button 211, or the like. May be a predetermined opportunity. Further, when the operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200 is separately provided with an effect button that can affect the effect by being operated in a predetermined situation, the operation of the effect button is performed by a lottery for winning or losing an advantageous state. It may be a predetermined opportunity to execute.

After the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is performed in step S841 in this way, the main board 409 determines whether or not the advantageous state winning / failing lottery has been won (step S842). If it is determined in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery (YES in step S842), the main board 409 performs a winning process in an advantageous state (for example, AT first hit) (step S843), and then proceeds to the process of step S844. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S842 that the lottery for winning or losing the advantageous state has not been won (NO in step S842), the main board 409 proceeds to the process of step S844 without performing the winning process of the advantageous state. Since the winning process of the advantageous state in step S843 is the same as the AT first hit process described in step S825 of FIG. 95, the description thereof will be omitted.

Then, in step S844, the main board 409 releases the "continuous effect state" set in the state flag, sets the "normal state", and ends the process at the end of the continuous effect.

As described above, by performing the processes of steps S841 to S844 shown in FIG. 99, at the end of the chance continuous effect, an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous state (for example) based on the degree of advantage expectation associated with the last executed continuous effect). Winning of AT first hit) will be drawn. In other words, it is possible to realize an advantageous state winning / failing lottery using the degree of advantage expectation acquired in the chance continuous production through the chance continuous production executed over a plurality of games while being given the opportunity to rank up.

As described above in [14], the execution timing of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery in the present embodiment is not limited to the final game of the chance continuous production over a plurality of games as in the above example, and the chance continuous production is performed. It may be generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied after execution. Specifically, for example, after the continuous chance production is completed, an effect of waiting for the execution of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is executed for several games, and the predetermined number of games is exhausted and a specific symbol combination is displayed in advance. When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, the advantageous state winning / failing lottery may be executed.

[14-2. Example of continuous production of chances]
Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous chance production will be described.

As described above, in the chance continuous effect in the present embodiment, the control process as described in [14-1] and subsequent steps is performed by the main board 409 (particularly CPU 1110), so that the chance continuous effect can be executed or not. Etc. are decided. Then, the display control is performed by the effect control board 510 (particularly CPU1118 or VDP1124) that receives the determined content by the main board 409 by a command or the like, so that the effect screen related to the chance continuous effect is displayed on the effect screen of the image display body 500. Will be executed. Therefore, in the following description of the effect mode, the flowcharts, tables, and the like exemplified in the following description of [14-1] will be used.

The continuous effect executed in the chance continuous effect of the present embodiment is selected from a plurality of types of continuous effect suggesting different degrees of advantage and expectation, and the executed continuous effect is promoted (ranked up) at a predetermined opportunity. there is a possibility. For example, in the tables shown in FIGS. 93, 97, and 100, continuous production numbers "0" to "7" were used as the numbers corresponding to each of the plurality of types of continuous production. First, a specific example of the content of the continuous production of these plurality of types will be shown.

[14-2-1. Contents of each continuous production]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production content of the continuous chance production. The continuous production numbers "0" to "7" shown in FIG. 101 correspond to the continuous production numbers shown in FIGS. 93, 97, and 100, respectively. The degree of expectation of advantage of winning in the lottery (specifically, for example, the winning probability of the first AT) becomes high.

Each item summarized in FIG. 101 will be described.

First, the "color" shown in FIG. 101 is an example of an aspect configuration for allowing the player to recognize the advantageous expectation degree suggested by each continuous production by a relatively wide expectation degree division, and is an example of the aspect configuration of FIG. 101. In that case, "blue", "green", and "red" are available.

Next, the "mark" shown in FIG. 101 is an example of an aspect configuration for allowing the player to recognize the advantageous expectation degree suggested by each continuous production by the expectation degree classification narrower than the expectation degree classification described above. Therefore, images related to the production contents of each continuous production are prepared.

A specific display example will be shown later (see FIG. 103), but in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of types of display modes using "colors" and "marks" corresponding to each continuous effect. The image object is displayed in a predetermined display area (display area 501 in FIG. 103) of the image display body 500. Further, among the plurality of types of image objects displayed in this display area, the image object corresponding to the continuous effect currently being executed by the image display body 500 is highlighted by light emission, enlargement, or the like. It is preferable that the image object that is not highlighted is displayed inconspicuously (non-highlighted) by reducing the brightness of the image or the like.

That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of image objects suggesting different degrees of advantage and expectation due to a plurality of types of continuous effects are displayed in a predetermined display area (display area 501) of the image display body 500, and are currently present. The image object corresponding to the running continuous effect is highlighted. Then, the display mode of each image object is configured by using "color" (first mode) and "mark" (second mode). Since such an image object is an image corresponding to each continuous effect (stage), it may be referred to as a "stage icon" in the following description.

FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining a configuration example of the stage icon. FIG. 102 shows an example of the “mark” pattern and “color” constituting each stage icon for the stage icons displayed corresponding to the continuous production numbers “0” to “7”. There is. The stage icon displayed in a predetermined area of the image display body 500 (display area 501 in FIG. 103) is configured to have a “mark” pattern in a circular outer shape, and the inside of the outer shape is “color”. Is colored by. The "abbreviation" shown in FIG. 102 is an abbreviation for the "mark" pattern. For convenience of illustration, in FIGS. 103 to 106 below, the "mark" of the stage icon is indicated by an "abbreviation", and the "color" is omitted.

Further, the "number of stars" shown in FIG. 101 is for suggesting the degree of advantageous expectation suggested by each continuous production by a display method different from the image object (stage icon), and is displayed. The degree of advantage expectation of each continuous production is suggested by the magnitude of the number of stars (third aspect). The "number of stars" is displayed on the image display body 500 in a predetermined display area (display area 502 in FIG. 103) different from the stage icon. In addition, in the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, since the degree of advantage expectation of the continuous production can be suggested if at least the stage icon is displayed, the display by "the number of stars" may be excluded.

Further, the "title" shown in FIG. 101 is a title given to each continuous production. And, the outline of the production content of each continuous production is summarized in "Production content". With reference to the title and effect content of FIG. 101, it can be seen that the "mark" is associated with each continuous effect.

[14-2-2. Screen transition of continuous chance production]
FIGS. 103 to 106 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 4) for explaining an example of screen transition in the chance continuous production. The screen transition of the effect screen in the image display body 500 when the chance continuous effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106.

First, an example of the screen configuration of the image display body 500 will be described. FIG. 103A shows a display screen of the image display body 500, in which the display area 501 is divided near the bottom, the display area 502 is located near the lower right, and the display area 503 is divided near the center. ing. It should be noted that the arrangement of these display areas 501 to 503 is only an example, and for example, they are arranged in other positional relationships, or, for example, the display position or display range is changed with the transition of the chance continuous production. May be good.

A plurality of stage icons are displayed in the display area 501. For example, in the case of FIG. 103 (A), eight types of continuous effects corresponding to the continuous effect numbers "0" to "7" are prepared as continuous effects that can be executed in the chance continuous effect. Stage icon is displayed. Then, as described above, among the eight stage icons, the stage icon corresponding to the continuous effect currently being executed (or will be executed) is highlighted by light emission or enlargement or the like. In FIG. 103, the highlighted stage icon has the outer circumference drawn with a solid line, and the unhighlighted stage icon has the outer circumference drawn with a broken line.

Since the "mark" of the stage icon is an image related to the effect content of the continuous effect, when the highlighting is performed, the player can perform the effect from the "mark" of the stage icon on which the highlighting is performed. You can guess the contents. In addition, the "color" of the stage icon suggests an approximate degree of expectation of advantage.

Further, when the display of the plurality of stage icons is arranged as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the degree of advantage expectation suggested by the stage icons is lower toward the left side of the display area 501 and toward the right side of the display area 501. It gets higher. Therefore, it is possible to easily give the player an image of the high and low degree of advantage expectation from the position of the stage icon highlighted in the display area 501, and it is possible to enhance the effect of suggesting the degree of advantage expectation.

The display of the stage icon in the display area 501 continues from the game in which the chance continuous production is started to the game in which the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is executed through the chance continuous production. However, control may be performed so that the stage icon is temporarily not displayed at the timing such as displaying the cut-in on the entire display screen of the image display body 500 in the middle of the chance continuous production.

In the display area 502, an image of a plurality of stars is displayed as an image corresponding to the "number of stars" shown in FIG. 101. Then, by making the image filled with stars by the number corresponding to the "number of stars", the "number of stars" is clearly shown and the degree of expectation of advantage is suggested to the player. In addition, although the number of stars such as "1.5" and "2.5" is also shown in FIG. 101, in such a case, "0.5" stars are displayed by filling half of the stars. .. The display by "the number of stars" in the display area 502 has an effect that the degree of advantage expectation can be clearly suggested as compared with the stage icon in the display area 501.

In the display area 503, the central effect image of the continuous effect executed by the chance continuous effect is displayed. The central effect image of the continuous effect is, for example, an image that is displayed according to the “title” and the “effect content” described with reference to FIG. 101. The display destination of the effect image, which is the center of the continuous effect, is not limited to the display area 503 of the image display body 500, and is displayed in other display areas regardless of the inside or outside of the image display body 500. (For example, a liquid crystal display device (sub liquid crystal) may be separately provided in addition to the image display body 500 to display the image).

Next, an example of the effect screen shown in FIG. 103 will be specifically described. In FIG. 103, it is assumed that the continuous production (kite board confrontation) of the continuous production number “0” is selected by the number of continuous production games “3 games” at the start of the chance continuous production.

FIG. 103 (A) is an example of a display screen when a predetermined number of medals (for example, three) are bet after the BET process is completed in the game (first game) in which the continuous chance production is started. Specifically, in the BET process, three bets are completed by the player's operation by inserting a medal from the insertion slot 203 or pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (may be one insertion button 205), or the previous game. It is established when the processing of the automatic bet accompanying the winning of the re-game combination is completed, but for the sake of simplicity of explanation, after that, "the operation of pressing the MAX input button 206 is performed". It is assumed that the BET process is completed.

As an example of the display screen when the BET process of the first game is completed, in FIG. 103 (A), the continuous production (kite board confrontation) of the continuous production number “0” is started by displaying the title. Is shown to the player. More specifically, in the display area 501 of FIG. 103 (A), the leftmost stage icon with the "kite" mark is highlighted. Further, in the display area 502, "1" stars corresponding to the continuous effect are displayed. Then, in the display area 503, the decorative character "Kite board confrontation!", Which is the title of the continuous production, is displayed.

When the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed after the BET process of the first game is completed, the internal lottery of the first game is performed and the rotations of the reels 301a to 301c are started. FIG. 103B shows an example of a display screen immediately after the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed in the first game. In FIG. 103 (B), in the display area 503, an image (start image) indicating that the kiteboard confrontation has started is displayed instead of the title display of FIG. 103 (A).

After that, the corresponding reels 301a to 301c are stopped by pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. FIG. 103 (C) shows an example of a display screen while the reel 301 is stopped while the reel 301 is stopped in the first game. In FIG. 103 (C), an image (in progress image) showing that the kiteboard confrontation is in progress is displayed in the display area 503. This in-progress image is displayed until the first game ends and the BET process of the second game is completed. Then, when the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed in the second game, an internal lottery is performed and the rotations of the reels 301a to 301c are started as in the first game.

Here, in the case of the specific example shown in FIGS. 103 to 106, it is assumed that in the rank-up process (see FIG. 95) performed at the timing of the second game, the rank-up lottery is won in two stages. That is, by raising the rank by two steps from the continuous production number "0", this chance continuous production is overwritten by the continuous production (swimming confrontation) of the continuous production number "2". In addition, referring to the continuous production game number distribution table of FIG. 97, the number of continuous production games of 3 games is set again after the rank is increased (see also step S826 of FIG. 95). At this time, the effect control board 510 receives a command from the main board 409 of the content of the rank-up winning, and controls the image display body 500 to display the effect image (rank-up image) corresponding to the rank-up.

FIG. 104 (A) is an example of a display screen when the rank-up is won in the second game. For example, immediately after the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed in the second game, the rank-up image is displayed in the display area 503. Is displayed. According to FIG. 104 (A), the decorative character "RANK UP!" Is displayed in the display area 503 to teach the player that the rank-up has been won. The rank-up image is displayed until the second game is completed and the BET process of the third game is completed.

In the rank-up process performed based on the start operation of the start lever 210 in the second game, if the rank-up lottery is not won, FIG. 103 until the stop operation of the third reel is performed in the second game. An in-progress image as illustrated in (C) is displayed, and a "fan image" of the kiteboard confrontation is displayed at the timing when the stop operation of the third reel is performed. Then, in the next third game, after the effect screen associated with the execution of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is displayed, the execution result of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is displayed. The “fan image” will be described later in FIG. 105 (C), and the effect screen associated with the execution of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery will be described later in FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (C). In such a development, the advantage state winning / failing lottery will be performed with the degree of advantage expectation associated with the kite board confrontation with the continuous production number "0", so the possibility of winning the advantage state is extremely low and winning. It will be an unfortunate development where you can hardly expect the result. According to the advantageous state winning / failing lottery table of FIG. 100, the winning probability is only about 0.39% at the base level “low” and about 3.91% even at the base level “high”.

The continuation of FIG. 104 (A) will be described. The rank-up image of FIG. 104 (A) is said to be displayed until the BET process of the third game is completed after the second game is completed, but other than that until the BET process of the third game is completed. An appropriate effect image (for example, an image image related to the rank-up winning) may be displayed. Even if the rank-up image is displayed in the display area 503, the stage icon of the kiteboard confrontation is highlighted in the display area 501 and the kiteboard confrontation is performed in the display area 502 until the BET process of the third game is completed. The corresponding "1" stars are displayed. As shown in FIG. 104 (A), at the stage where the rank-up winning is decided but the transition destination is not taught, the highlighting of the stage icon in the display area 501 may be temporarily canceled, and further. A display that changes the highlighting target at high speed, such as a rotating roulette wheel, may be performed. By performing such display control, it can be expected to have the effect of increasing the player's interest in the transition destination stage by increasing the rank.

Next, FIG. 104 (B) is an example of a display screen when the BET process of the third game is completed. In the internal processing of the slot machine 1, it has been decided that the chance continuous production will be ranked up to the continuous production number "2" continuous production (swimming confrontation) when the rank-up processing of the second game is completed. The content of this determination is transmitted from the main board 409 to the effect control board 510 by a command. Therefore, the effect control board 510 displays the title of the swimming confrontation after the rank up, triggered by the timing when the BET process of the third game is completed. According to FIG. 104 (B), in the display area 501, the stage icon of the swimming confrontation is highlighted instead of the kite board confrontation so far (the stage icon surrounded by the solid line is changed from "ka" to "ring". ), In the display area 502, "1.5" stars corresponding to the swimming confrontation are displayed. Further, in the display area 503, a decorative character "Swimming confrontation!" Is displayed as a title display.

When the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed after the BET process of the third game is completed, the internal lottery of the third game is performed and the rotation of the reels 301a to 301c is started. FIG. 105A shows an example of a display screen immediately after the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed in the third game. In FIG. 105 (A), a start image showing that the swimming confrontation has started is displayed in the display area 503. Note that FIG. 105A shows a case where the rank-up lottery was not won in the rank-up process performed in the game (third game). If the rank-up lottery has been won in the game, the process of the rank-up image is repeated based on the winning content of the re-rank-up.

FIG. 105B is an example of a display screen after the start operation of the start lever 210 is performed in the third game. Following the display of the start image of the swimming confrontation in FIG. 105 (A), in FIG. 105 (B), an in-progress image showing the progress of the swimming confrontation is displayed in the display area 503. In this in-progress image, for example, in the fourth game after the third game is completed (the second game after the continuous production of the swimming confrontation by rank-up is started), the stop operation of the third reel is performed and the player's image is displayed. It is displayed until just before the hand leaves the reel stop button 211. In this case, it is assumed that the rank-up lottery was not won even in the rank-up process based on the start operation of the start lever 210 in the fourth game.

Next, FIG. 105 (C) is an example of a display screen when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 by performing the stop operation of the third reel in the fourth game. As mentioned above, this "4th game" corresponds to the 2nd game after the continuous production by the rank-up winning (swimming confrontation of all 3 games) started, so unless further rank-up winning occurs. , In the next game, a lottery will be held to win or lose the advantageous state. Therefore, in FIG. 105 (C), an image (fanning) showing that the continuous production by the swimming confrontation has reached the climax at the timing when the player's hand is separated from the reel stop button 211 due to the stop operation of the third reel. The image) is displayed in the display area 503. The fanning image shown in FIG. 105 (C) shows a situation in which the goal is imminent in the swimming competition between the main character and the rival, and it is not known which one will come first, and such a fanning image is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel that the continuous production is about to be settled, and to enhance the interest in the subsequent game development.

Further, FIG. 106 (A) shows an example of a display screen when the BET process of the fifth game is completed after the end of the fourth game as an example of the display screen following FIG. 105 (C). In the situation where the BET process is completed, when the starting operation of the starting lever 210 is performed next, the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is executed by satisfying the "predetermined opportunity". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), by displaying the decorative character "Hit the lever!" In the display area 503, the player is instructed that the starting operation of the starting lever 210 is an important trigger. are doing. As described in step S841 of FIG. 90, in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery, the advantageous degree of expectation is provided depending on the selected base level and the last continuous production (“swimming confrontation” in this example). A state winning / failing lottery table is used, and the winning / losing is determined based on the operation of the player corresponding to a predetermined opportunity. Therefore, the player who sees the display of "hit the lever!" In FIG. 106 (A) can have a strong interest in the starting operation of the starting lever 210 by himself / herself.

In the fifth game, after the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is performed triggered by the starting operation of the starting lever 210, the winning result is taught to the player. FIG. 106 (B) is an example of a display screen in the case of winning in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery, and FIG. 106 (C) is an example of a display screen in the case of losing in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery.

In FIG. 106 (B), in addition to the decorative character "WIN", an image showing that the main character has reached the goal before the rival in the swimming confrontation is displayed in the display area 503. After being instructed in FIG. 106 (B) that the winning or losing lottery for the advantageous state has been won, the start screen of the AT game is displayed after waiting for the establishment of the predetermined conditions until the start.

In FIG. 106 (C), in addition to the decorative character "LOSE", an image showing that the rival has reached the goal before the main character in the swimming confrontation is displayed in the display area 503. After being instructed in FIG. 106 (C) that the lottery for winning or losing the advantageous state has been lost, the continuous chance production ends, so that the normal game screen display is restored.

As an example, the timing at which the display screens of FIGS. 106 (B) and 106 (C) are displayed is such that the stop operation of the third reel is performed in the fifth game and the player's hand is pressed from the reel stop button 211. When you leave, In such a timing, the winning result is not taught until the player's operation in the final game of the chance continuous production (in this case, the fifth game) is completed, so that the winning result is not taught throughout the multiple games in which the chance continuous production is executed. It can be expected that the game interest of the player will continue to be enhanced.

As described above, as illustrated in FIGS. 103 to 106, in the slot machine 1, the effect image accompanying the progress of the chance continuous effect is displayed on the display screen (for example, the image display body 500) that can be visually recognized by the player. In particular, the stage icon in the display area 510 and the number of stars in the display area 520 teach (suggest) to the player the degree of advantage expectation due to the continuous production currently being executed. In the meantime, it is possible to entertain the game that the player expects to improve the degree of advantage expectation.

The transition of the effect screen due to the continuous effect of chance is not limited to the transition example of FIGS. 103 to 106, and the type and display timing of the effect image displayed by the effect control board 510 can be appropriately changed. ..

For example, in FIG. 104 (A), the display timing of the rank-up image "RANK UP!" Is ranked up immediately after the start operation of the start lever 210 of the winning game (for example, the second game). It is conceivable to change the timing when the stop button of the third reel is released. When the display timing of the rank-up image is delayed in this way, if the rank-up image is not won, the fanned image is displayed at the timing when the stop button of the third reel is released, and the advantageous state winning / failing lottery is performed in the next game. It is possible to switch to a development that is advantageous for the player, such as displaying a rank-up image, where it leads to a development that ends up. As a result, the player can expect the rank-up winning until the stop button of the third reel of the game (for example, the second game) is released, and the game entertainment can be greatly enhanced.

Further, for example, when a relatively long number of continuous production games is selected (for example, when 4 or more games are selected in the table of FIG. 97), a special production that is not displayed in the normal number of continuous production games (3 games). An image may be added and displayed, and by displaying such a special effect image, it is possible to make the player expect an advantageous situation (high degree of advantageous expectation) and enhance the interest. ..

[14-3. Supplement of continuous chance production]
Regarding the continuous chance production of the present embodiment, the control processing example has been specifically described in [14-1] and below, and the production example has been specifically described in [14-2] and below. Is not limited to the above example, and may have a form as shown below.

In the chance continuous production, the continuous production winning / failing lottery (step S811 in FIG. 90), the rank-up lottery (step S821 in FIG. 95), and the advantageous state winning / failing lottery (step S841 in FIG. 99) are the winning results (winning combination) of the internal lottery. ) Is not limited to the lottery, and may be based on other predetermined opportunities. Specifically, for example, it may be an operation for a button such as the MAX input button 206 or the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, an operation for the start lever 210, or a reel operation by freeze control.

In addition, even if the rank-up lottery is performed based on the winning result of the internal lottery, it is not always necessary to perform the rank-up lottery in all the games in which the continuous production related to the continuous production of chances is being executed, and the specific conditions are satisfied. The rank-up lottery may be performed only in the game section. Such restrictions on the rank-up lottery may be applied to either the continuous effect standby state or the continuous effect state, or may be applied to both. By limiting the chances of receiving the rank-up lottery in this way, it is possible to create a period in which the player's expectation is particularly high during the execution of multiple games related to continuous chance production, and it is possible to give a sharp impression to the game. can.

Further, the timing for generating the chance continuous effect is not limited to the normal game state (general state or bonus internal state), and may be during the bonus. Further, it may be possible to generate it during an AT game, an ART game, or a precursory effect. If the freeze control occurs during the execution of the chance continuous effect, the execution of the chance continuous effect may be stopped at the time of occurrence, and a privilege (for example, AT winning) by the freeze control may be given.

Further, in the rank-up lottery table illustrated in FIG. 96, a common number is set for the distribution of the number of rank-ups regardless of the type of continuous production currently being executed. A rank-up lottery table in which distributions of different rank-up numbers are set may be used. By doing so, it is possible to add diversity to the transition destination stage by the rank-up lottery, and it is expected that the playability will be enhanced.

Further, the output destination of the chance continuous effect is not limited to the image display body 500, and may be displayed on another display (for example, a sub liquid crystal display or a 7-segment display). Further, the output of the effect by the continuous effect of chance is not limited to the image, but may be sound, light, movement of an accessory, or the like, and these may be combined. By diversifying the output form of the continuous chance production in this way, it is possible to realize the continuous chance production with various gaming machines.

Further, in the display screen examples of FIGS. 103 to 106, the degree of advantage expectation suggested by the continuous effect being executed in the chance continuous effect is only suggested by the stage icon, the star, the effect content, etc. The degree may be clearly indicated by a number or the like. As for the display at the time of winning the rank-up, not only teaching the transition of continuous production as shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (B), but also clearly indicating how much the degree of advantage expectation has increased by numbers or the like. You may try to do it. For example, if the rank-up is won when the advantage expectation degree of "30%" is displayed, the increase value of the advantage expectation degree of "+ 20%" is displayed, and after the rank-up, "50%" is displayed. be able to. By performing such a display, the player can be made to recognize the degree of advantage expectation more clearly, and it can be expected that the player's sense of security is enhanced.

Further, in the above example, there are eight types of continuous effects included in the chance continuous effect, but in order to realize the chance continuous effect of the present embodiment, at least two types of continuous effects may be prepared.

In addition, when the rank is raised in the chance continuous production, in the above example, the highlighted stage icon is moved to another stage icon corresponding to the destination stage, but in addition, for example, it was highlighted. The transition destination stage may be indicated by changing the stage icon itself. Furthermore, when the stage icon highlighted with rank up changes (including when the same icon changes), the size of the stage icon or mark may change, and in general, the size of the stage icon or mark may change. It can be suggested that the larger the stage icon or mark, the higher the degree of advantage expectation.

Further, when the stage icon highlighted with the rank up changes, the player may be notified that the stage icon has changed due to sound, light, or the like. Further, when the highlighted stage icon changes, it is preferable to display that the player can recognize that the degree of advantage expectation has not decreased (at least is maintained). For example, by displaying the character decoration "UP", it is possible to inform the player that the degree of advantage expectation has increased.

Further, in FIG. 103 and the like, the display of the stage icons in the display area 501 is arranged in a horizontal row in the order of increasing the degree of advantageous expectation suggested from left to right, but the arrangement of the plurality of stage icons is not necessarily the degree of expectation. It does not have to be in the order of, and it does not have to be in a row.

In the above example, the degree of expectation of advantage by the stage icon was suggested by the display mode including "color" and "mark". Of these, the "mark" is an image related to the production content of the corresponding continuous production, but more strictly speaking, the "thing (for example, the face of the character)" that appears in the continuous production. , Whole body, tools, etc.) ”. By using such an image of "things" as a "mark", it is possible to make the player surely recognize the correspondence between the stage icon and the continuous production, so that the improvement of the game entertainment by the continuous production of chances is said. Contributes to ensuring that the effect is given to the player.

In addition to this, decorative characters such as "heat", "iron plate", and "opportunity" can be displayed as a method of suggesting the degree of advantage expectation during the execution of continuous chance production. By displaying such a character notation together with the stage icon, the number of stars, and the like, the suggestion pattern of the degree of advantage expectation can be further diversified.

Further, in the above example, the eight types of continuous effects included in the chance continuous effect suggest different degrees of advantage expectations (see, for example, FIG. 101), but some of the plurality of types of continuous effects are advantageous. Expectations may be the same or substantially the same. For example, suppose that two types of continuous effects having the same degree of advantage expectation are provided, and stage icons corresponding to each continuous effect are prepared. Then, if a rank-up lottery is performed and the number of rank-ups is "0" while one of the continuous series is being executed, the stage icon is highlighted by shifting to the other continuous production at a fixed rate. Move ahead as well. When such processing is performed, the degree of advantage expectation does not change, but the number of continuous production games is reset. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an advantageous state of adding the number of execution games of the chance continuous production. can.

Further, among the plurality of types of continuous effects included in the chance continuous effect, a continuous effect having an advantageous expectation degree of 100% (always won in the advantageous state winning / failing lottery) may be provided at the highest level. If a continuous production as such a definite production is prepared, it can be seen that a privilege (for example, the first hit of AT) is always given when the rank is raised to the highest continuous production, so that the player feels at ease. In addition to giving, it is possible to prevent a drastic decline in the interest of losing the prize in the advantageous state success / failure production even though the rank has been raised to the highest continuous production.

[14-4. Summary of continuous chance production]
The typical features of the continuous chance production by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are summarized below.

[14-4-1. First feature]
First, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a continuous effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning an advantageous state (for example, AT first hit) is executed over a plurality of games, and the expectation suggested by the continuous effect in the final game. It is possible to continuously produce a chance to display the winning result of the advantageous state (the winning result of the advantageous state winning / failing lottery) determined based on the degree.

Then, at the start of the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, a low expectation continuous production suggesting a low expectation degree that is difficult to win can be executed from among a plurality of types of continuous productions suggesting different expectations. Here, "low expectation continuous production" corresponds to, for example, continuous production of continuous production number "0", and the degree of expectation is continuous production of continuous production number "0" when the base level is "low". The winning probability is only about 0.39% (see FIG. 100), which is a low expectation that it is difficult to win.

In addition, in the chance continuous production, in each of the games in which any of the plurality of continuous productions is executed, the promotion of the continuous production is determined based on a predetermined opportunity (rank-up process), and the rank-up is won. When displayed on the display device (image display body 500), the "continuous effect after rank-up" suggesting a higher degree of expectation than the continuous effect executed in the game is started from the next game. For example, in FIG. 104 (A), it is shown that the rank-up image is displayed in the second game, and in FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (C), the swimming confrontation after the rank-up is executed in the third game. The situation is shown.

Therefore, according to such a continuous production of chances, by performing the rank-up as described above, the advantage state winning / failing lottery performed in the final game of the continuous production of chances has the degree of expectation suggested by the continuous production after the rank-up. Since it is performed based on the above, it is possible to avoid a development that is disadvantageous to the player that the winning result of the advantageous state based on the above-mentioned low expectation degree is displayed.

That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment provides such a chance continuous production, so that even if a continuous production with a low expectation degree that is difficult to win is started, a continuous production having a high expectation degree by rank-up is achieved. By giving an opportunity to overwrite, the player is expected to escape from the unfortunate development that the winning lottery in an advantageous state is performed with the low expectation degree, and the continuous production with the low expectation degree is executed. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player due to the above.

[14-4-2. Second feature]
Further, in the chance continuous production by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined continuous production is executed over a plurality of games, and a plurality of continuous productions having different expectations for granting a privilege (for example, AT first hit) regarding an advantageous state. However, it is prepared as a plurality of transition destination continuous effects that can be executed by migrating from the above-mentioned predetermined continuous effects. Here, the predetermined continuous effect is a continuous effect selected at the start of the chance continuous effect, and specifically corresponds to, for example, the continuous effect number "0". The plurality of transition destination continuous productions that can be executed by shifting from the predetermined continuous production are continuous productions that are candidates for the transition destination stage from the continuous production of the continuous production number “0”, and the continuous production is shown in FIG. 96. With reference to the above, it corresponds to the continuous production of the continuous production numbers "1" to "7".

Then, in the chance continuous production, a plurality of image images reminiscent of the respective production contents in the plurality of transition destination continuous productions are displayed in a predetermined display area. For example, in FIG. 103 (A), eight stage icons are displayed in the display area 501. Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 101 and 102, the "mark" of each stage icon is an image reflecting the effect content of the corresponding stage, and is an image image reminiscent of the effect content of the corresponding stage.

In such a chance continuous production, if a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the above-mentioned predetermined continuous production (winning of the rank-up lottery), the degree of expectation is raised more than the present by the rank-up, and the subsequent predetermined opportunity. Based on (for example, the start of the next game), a transition destination continuous effect suggesting the increased degree of expectation is executed. Explaining with a specific example, in FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (C), the continuous production of the continuous production number “0” is executed in the first game, and then in the second game, the rank-up winning is performed. Two levels of rank up are decided, and the internal expectation of winning is increased by two levels (see Fig. 100). Then, in the next third game, the continuous production of the rank-up destination is executed as shown in FIGS. 104 (B) and 105 (A) to 105 (C).

According to such a chance continuous production, a plurality of image images (stage icon "marks") reminiscent of the production contents of each continuous production are displayed in a predetermined display area (for a plurality of continuous productions that can be executed in the chance continuous production. By displaying the image in the display area 510), it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner what kind of continuous production is expected to proceed. Then, when the specific condition of winning the rank up is satisfied during the execution of the continuous production, the degree of expectation is increased, and the continuous production suggesting the increased degree of expectation is selected from the above-mentioned plurality of continuous productions and executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that he / she has succeeded in promoting (ranking up) the degree of expectation.

That is, according to the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, a plurality of candidates for the continuous production that may be transferred are visually presented to the player, and when the degree of expectation is promoted, the promotion content is presented to the game. By notifying in a manner that is easy for the person to recognize, even if a continuous production with a low degree of expectation appears, the game that is expected to be promoted to the degree of expectation is entertained without giving the player a feeling of giving up. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[14-4-3. Third feature]
Further, in the continuous chance production by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, at least one of a plurality of types of image objects is displayed in a predetermined display area in a display mode suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous state (for example, AT first hit). (Corresponding to the stage icon displayed in the display area 501 in FIG. 103 (A)).

The image object (stage icon) has a plurality of first aspects (for example, "color") for indicating the degree of expectation suggested by the image object in a relatively wide expectation degree category, and a plurality of expectations according to the first aspect. It is shown in a display mode using a specific first aspect and a specific second aspect from among a plurality of second aspects (for example, "marks") for showing in an expectation degree category narrower than the degree category. .. In a specific example, referring to FIGS. 101 to 103, the "color" constituting the stage icon corresponds to the first aspect, and the "mark" constituting the stage icon corresponds to the second aspect. .. According to FIG. 101, three types of "color" are shown in order from the one with the lowest expectation degree, "blue", "green", and "red", and there are eight types of continuous effects in which each shows a different degree of expectation. In view of this, it can be said that the mode is based on a relatively wide expectation classification. Further, according to FIG. 101, the "mark" is associated with eight types of continuous effects on a one-to-one basis, and therefore, it can be said that the mode has a narrower expectation degree classification than the "color".

Then, in the chance continuous production, a rank-up lottery (see step S821, FIG. 96, etc. in FIG. 95) is performed as a lottery for changing the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous state, and if the rank-up is won, an image object (see step S821, FIG. 96, etc.) is performed. It has the feature of changing the display of the stage icon).

The change in the display of the image object due to the change in the degree of expectation due to such rank-up is realized by changing the combination of the first aspect (color) and the second aspect (mark) described above. To explain with a specific example, for example, assuming that the continuous production of the continuous production number "0" is ranked up by 5 levels, the highlighted stage icon is "blue" corresponding to the continuous production of the continuous production number "0". "+" Kite "changes to" green "+" ship "corresponding to the continuous production of the continuous production number" 5 ". In this case, both the first aspect (color) and the second aspect (mark) will change (see FIG. 101). According to FIG. 100, the range of change in the degree of expectation in this case is a relatively large 38.67 points (39.06-0.39) when the base level is “low”.

On the other hand, when the range of change in the degree of expectation due to rank-up is relatively small within a predetermined range (for example, within 10 points), the display mode of the image object is the first without changing the first mode. Only two aspects change. To give a specific example, in the transition of the effect screen illustrated in FIGS. 103 to 106, the continuous effect number “0” is ranked up by two stages by the rank-up winning. However, the change of the stage icon highlighted at this time is from "blue" + "kite" to "blue" + "buoy", and the first aspect "color" remains "blue" and does not change. .. According to FIG. 100, the range of change in the degree of expectation in this case remains at 7.42 points (7.81-0.39) when the base level is “low”.

When the change range of the degree of expectation is relatively small as described above, if the display mode of the stage icon does not have the second mode and has only the first mode (color), the degree of expectation from the player It's not easy to know the changes. However, according to the continuous chance production of the present embodiment, even with such a small change in the degree of expectation, the improvement in the degree of expectation can be recognized by the player. And even if there is no change due to the first aspect showing a relatively wide expectation classification (even if it remains the same color), if it changes to a higher stage icon among them, it may be expected to some extent. It is possible to make the player feel that there is no such thing, and even if the production with a low expectation is executed, it can be expected to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

It should be noted that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be provided with a plurality of stages of base levels in the continuous production of chances. In such a case, as compared with the winning probability between the base levels in FIG. 100, the lower (lower) at the higher base level than when the higher (higher) continuous production number is selected at the lower base level. When the continuous effect number is selected, the winning probability of the advantageous state may be higher. Therefore, by setting the base level and the winning probability so that such a situation can occur, in the chance continuous production of the present embodiment, even if the image object has a display mode showing a low expectation degree, it is internal. If the target base level is high, the expectation level equal to or higher than that of the higher display mode can be expected. Specifically, assuming that the continuous production number "2" is selected at the base level "high", the display mode of the stage icon is "blue" + "shoes" while having an expectation of 15.63%. However, this degree of expectation is higher than 11.74% when the continuous production number "3" is selected if the base level is "low". That is, when the slot machine 1 provides such a continuous chance effect, even if the display mode of the stage icon in the display area 501 seems to be a low expectation of "blue" + "shoes". Depending on the base level, there is a possibility that the player has a higher degree of expectation than "blue" + "floating ring", which is one level higher, so even if a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, the player's You can be interested in the production until the final winning result is displayed without degrading the interest.

[15. Slot machine 1A]
So far, the slot machine 1 has been used as a gaming machine for explaining the embodiment of the present invention, but thereafter, the slot machine 1A will be used as the gaming machine for explaining the embodiment of the present invention. The slot machine 1A is an example of a slot machine suitable for explaining the features of the gaming machine according to the present invention described below, and has some differences from the slot machine 1 but also has some common points. many. Therefore, regarding the slot machine 1A, the members and internal processing common to the slot machine 1 shall be taken over, and the embodiments described using the slot machine 1 shall be diverted unless otherwise specified. It shall be.

107 and 108 are front views (No. 1 and No. 2) of a main part of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 107 illustrates the slot machine 1A when the moving display body 522, 523 and the shutter accessory 524 are in the normal position (standby position), and FIG. 108 shows the moving display body 522, 523 and the shutter accessory 524 in the operating position. A slot machine 1A at one time is illustrated. The appearance difference from the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to the slot machine 1A illustrated in FIGS. 107 and 108.

First, the fixed display body 521 and the moving display body 522, 523 are mentioned as structural differences when the slot machine 1A (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is compared with the slot machine 1 (see FIG. 3). In the slot machine 1, an image display body 500 capable of displaying an arbitrary image used for production or the like is arranged above the symbol display window 401, but in the slot machine 1A, instead of the image display body 500, the image display body 500 is arranged. , A fixed display body 521 and a moving display body 522, 523, each of which has a display screen (specifically, a liquid crystal screen, for example) capable of displaying an image, are arranged.

Similar to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1, the fixed display body 521 is fixedly arranged above the symbol display window 401, and has a main liquid crystal display 5211 capable of displaying an image. The main liquid crystal 5211 plays a central role in the effect display in the slot machine 1A, and can display image data stored in advance in the ROM 1120 under the control of the effect control board 510 (more specifically, VDP1124 or CPU1118). ..

The moving display body 522 is a moving accessory arranged on the left side of the fixed display body 521 in front view, and has a sub liquid crystal display 5221 capable of displaying an image. The moving display body 522 normally functions as a vertically long image display body in the normal position (standby position) (see FIG. 107), while when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the moving display body 522 rises while rotating 90 ° to the right from the standby position (see FIG. 107). It may rotate 90 ° completely and then rise) to move to the operating position, and at the operating position, it functions as a horizontally long image display body (see FIG. 108). It is assumed that the movable control of the moving display body 522 is performed by, for example, the effect control board 510, but since general conventional techniques can be applied to the power source, the moving mechanism, and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the sub liquid crystal display 5221 can display the image data stored in advance in the ROM 1120 under the control of the effect control board 510 like the main liquid crystal 5211, and the predetermined effect can be executed by this image display. In the later chapter [16], "treasure ball production" will be described in detail as an example of the production using the sub liquid crystal display 5221.

The moving display body 523 is a moving accessory arranged on the right side of the fixed display body 521 in front view, and has a sub liquid crystal display 5231 capable of displaying an image. The moving display body 523 normally functions as a vertically long image display body in the normal position (standby position) (see FIG. 107), while when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the moving display body 523 rises while rotating 90 ° to the left from the standby position (see FIG. 107). It may rotate 90 ° completely and then rise) to move to the operating position, and at the operating position, it functions as a horizontally long image display body (see FIG. 108). It is assumed that the movable control of the moving display body 523 is performed by, for example, the effect control board 510, but since general conventional techniques can be applied to the power source, the moving mechanism, and the like, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the sub liquid crystal 5231 can display the image data stored in advance in the ROM 1120 under the control of the effect control board 510 like the main liquid crystal 5211, and the predetermined effect can be executed by this image display. In the later chapter [17], the "trial ball production" will be described in detail as an example of the production using the sub liquid crystal 5231.

Next, as a structural difference when the slot machine 1A (see FIGS. 107 and 108) is compared with the slot machine 1 (see FIG. 3), there is a shutter accessory 524.

The shutter accessory 524 is a movable accessory that can move up and down between the normal position (standby position) and the operating position, and its operation is controlled by the effect control board 510. Since the conventional technique can be used for the drive mechanism and the like, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 107 illustrates a shutter accessory 524 in a normal position (standby position). When the shutter accessory 524 is in the normal position (standby position), at least continuous 3 for each reel 301 (left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) arranged behind the symbol display window 401. A vertical width (so-called three upper, middle, and lower lines) is secured so that the individual symbols can be viewed from the front through the symbol display window 401.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108, the shutter accessory 524 descends (or falls) from the standby position to the operating position in front of the symbol display window 401 when a predetermined condition is satisfied or the like. At this time, a part of the symbol display window 401 is shielded by the shutter accessory 524 that has reached the operating position, and the visible range of the reel 301 that the player can see through the symbol display window 401 is reduced. Specifically, when the shutter accessory 524 moves to the operating position, the upper half of the upper line and the upper half of the middle line are shielded by the symbol display window 401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the shutter accessory 524 is a substantially circular lens capable of magnifying and displaying the rear side in the vicinity of the center thereof (the position corresponding to the middle reel 301b in the front view). Part 5241 can be provided. When such a lens component 5241 is provided, even if the shutter accessory 524 is lowered to the operating position and the upper line and the middle line of the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c are shielded as shown in FIG. 108, at least the middle line is provided. Only the symbol stopped on the upper line of the reel 301b can pass through the lens component 5241 and be enlarged and displayed to the player. In the enlarged display by the lens component 5241, the player may be able to visually recognize all of the enlarged and displayed symbols, or a part of the enlarged and displayed symbols (1/2 of the total area). It may be difficult (or invisible) to see (a part smaller than). In the later chapter [21], "catching effect" will be described in detail as an example of the effect using such a shutter accessory 524. However, in each of the effects described in chapters [16] to [20], since the shutter accessory 524 is not involved in the effect, the configuration of the shutter accessory 524 is omitted even when the slot machine 1A is shown. ..

The lens component 5241 in the shutter accessory 524 may be fixed to the shutter accessory 524, or may be configured to be movable independently of the shutter accessory 524. As a usage method in the case of a movable configuration, for example, in the catching effect described later, only when the degree of expectation of a "success result" is high, the lens component 5241 is also linked with the shutter accessory 524 and the design display window 401. The lens component 5241 moves the shutter accessory 524 to the front operating position of the symbol display window 401 when the degree of expectation of a "success result" is low. It is possible to perform an effect such as leaving it on standby. At this time, the game entertainment for the catching effect can be changed depending on whether or not the lens component 5241 is operated.

Further, in FIGS. 107 and 108, the effect button 206A is arranged on the right side of the MAX input button 206 in the operation unit 202. The effect button 206A is a button that can affect the effect by being operated in a predetermined situation. The effect button 206A is not necessarily indispensable for the slot machine 1A of the present embodiment, but by appropriately adding an effect process triggered by the operation of the effect button 206A, the effect is produced in each effect executed by the slot machine 1A. It can be expected to have effects such as expanding the range of development and enhancing the interest of games.

[16. Jewel production]
This chapter describes an example of a characteristic effect that can be executed in the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The series of productions explained in this chapter is tentatively called "treasure ball production".

The jewel effect is an effect that is executed during a specific game period (for example, normal time or chance zone), and a privilege factor is acquired based on the winning combination, and a predetermined advantageous privilege (for example) is acquired based on the acquisition situation. It is a production that can be taught the granting of AT, ART, etc.). In addition, the above-mentioned "chance zone" is more advantageous than normal, such as a state in which predetermined advantageous benefits (for example, AT, ART, etc.) are more likely to be given than in normal times, and a state in which push order navigation is executed. The same definition applies to the chance zones described below. Then, as the role of the processing related to the jewel production, the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110) performs an internal lottery for the winning combination, a lottery for acquiring a privilege factor, a lottery for granting a predetermined advantageous privilege, a predetermined advantageous privilege, and the like. conduct. Then, the effect control board 510 (mainly CPU 1118 or VDP1124) causes the image display body (main liquid crystal 5211 or sub liquid crystal 5221) to display the effect screen of the jewel effect based on the result of the processing by the main board 409.

In the specific explanation of the jewel effect below, the privilege factor acquired in the jewel effect is called "treasure ball", and the predetermined advantageous privilege that can be given is "AT". And, to the "AT" that can be given through the jewel production, "normal AT (also simply referred to as AT)" and the AT game are added with a higher expectation level than the normal AT, which is a privilege than the normal AT. It is assumed that a "high-ranking AT (for example, a specialized zone)" having a high degree of advantage is prepared. However, as a matter of course, these are only specific examples of the jewel production, and the privilege factor is given a name other than "treasure ball", and the predetermined advantageous privilege is applied with the advantageous privilege other than AT (for example, ART, RT, etc.). Needless to say, it's okay.

As described above, in the jewel effect of the present embodiment, the effect screen is displayed on the image display body (main liquid crystal 5211 or sub liquid crystal 5221) by the effect control board 510, and the effect development is performed by the main board 409. Since it is based on the result of the processing, first, the processing performed by the main board 409 will be described.

[16-1. Main processing for jewel production]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart for explaining a processing procedure performed by the main board regarding the jewel effect. The series of processes (steps S901 to S910) shown in FIG. 109 are processes executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110) in the "internal lottery process" shown in step S3 of FIG. 54, and are related to the jewel effect. Only characteristic processing is shown.

The flowchart illustrated in FIG. 109 is an example of a processing procedure when the jewel effect is executed in a normal time. The "normal time" here is not only a general state in which the bonus is not won, but also a gaming state in which the degree of expectation for AT or ART is relatively high, not an advantageous gaming state such as AT or ART. It also means that it is not (a game state called a so-called "chance zone"). However, the jewel effect according to the present embodiment is not feasible only in the above-mentioned "normal time", and may also be executed, for example, when controlled in a predetermined "chance zone". It may be an effect that can be executed during AT or ART.

First, in step S901, the main board 409 draws a winning combination from a plurality of combinations (winning combination lottery). Next, it is determined whether or not the winning combination selected in step S901 is a bonus combination (step S902), and if the winning combination is not won (NO in step S902), the process proceeds to step S903 to proceed to the bonus. If the winning combination is won (YES in step S902), the process proceeds to step S910.

In step S910, since the grant of the privilege (bonus game) is confirmed by winning the bonus role, the opportunity of granting the predetermined privilege accompanying the treasure ball production (AT grant by the treasure challenge in step S907 described later) is unnecessary. , The game record related to the jewel production accumulated in the previous games is reset. Specifically, the value of the treasure ball parameter (see step S905 described later) that has been counted up in the previous game is reset to the initial value of 0. After the value of the jewel ball parameter is reset in step S910, the process returns to return.

In step S903 when the bonus combination is not won in the winning combination lottery of step S901, the acquisition of jewels is drawn based on the winning combination selected in step S901 (jewel acquisition lottery). The lottery method for the jewel acquisition lottery is not particularly limited, but an example will be described in detail.

First, it is assumed that a plurality of types of "jewel A" and "jewel C" are prepared as jewels that can be acquired by the jewel acquisition lottery. "Treasure ball A" and "Treasure ball C" are privilege factors having different expectations for giving advantageous benefits (AT, etc.) by the jewel production, and "Treasure ball A" has a higher degree of expectation than "Treasure ball C". Specifically, for example, as the degree of expectation that a normal AT is given (normal AT winning expectation), "treasure ball A" has a winning expectation of 5 points (5%) per piece, and "treasure ball B". Has a winning expectation of 3 points (3%) per piece (see also FIG. 110).

Then, in the treasure ball acquisition lottery, if the winning combination of the winning combination lottery is the so-called "rare role", one "treasure ball A" is acquired, and if the winning combination of the winning combination lottery is the "replay role". It is assumed that one "Treasure Ball C" is acquired. Here, the "rare role" means a group of predetermined low-winning roles that are relatively difficult to win by internal lottery as described above in Chapter [11], and specifically, the watermelon role, the cherry role, and the like. It corresponds to the chance role and the strongest role (see FIGS. 49 to 53 for the winning combination). The "replay role" is a high-winning role with a higher probability of winning than the "rare role". The correspondence between the "rare role" and the "replay role" and the jewel is only an example, and other winning combinations may be associated with each other.

Further, although the details will be described later, a display effect (jewel acquisition effect) relating to the acquisition of the jewel is executed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 or the sub liquid crystal display 5221 based on the lottery result of the jewel acquisition lottery in step S903.

Next, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the jewel has been acquired in the jewel acquisition lottery in step S903, and if the jewel is acquired (YES in step S904), the process proceeds to step S905. If the jewel is not acquired (NO in step S904), the processing of the main board 409 related to the jewel production in the game is completed, and the game returns to return.

In step S905, the main board 409 (CPU1110) counts up the value of the jewel ball parameter based on the acquisition result of the jewel ball acquisition lottery in step S903. The jewel parameter is a parameter held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and is used to grasp the number of acquired jewels. The initial value of the treasure ball parameter is set to 0, and the count is sequentially increased until the value is reset (a subtractive method may be used in which the initial value is set to 10 and the count is down). In this example, since two types of jewels, jewel A and jewel C, are used, the parameter value of the jewel parameter is held so that the number of acquired jewels A and C can be grasped. In addition, in this example, the number of jewels to be acquired at one time is one, but when multiple jewels are acquired at one time, the value of the jewel parameter is counted up by the number of acquired jewels. To.

Next, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the value of the jewel parameter (cumulative number of jewels acquired) updated in step S905 has reached the specified number, and when the value of the jewel parameter has reached the specified number ( YES) in step S906 proceeds to the process of step S907, and if the number is less than the specified number (NO in step S906), the process returns to return. Here, in the "specified number", a different specified number may be set for each type of jewel, or a specified number may be set for the total number of various jewels. In this example, a total of 10 pieces will be described as a specified number.

In step S907, whether or not to grant a predetermined advantageous privilege (in this example, "normal AT" or "upper AT") when the cumulative number of jewels acquired reaches the specified number (10 in total). Perform a lottery process to decide (treasure challenge). In the following explanation, the case where the grant of the predetermined advantageous benefit is determined in the process is referred to as "successful in the treasure challenge", and the case where the grant of the predetermined advantageous benefit is not determined is "failed in the treasure challenge". Called.

Various lottery methods can be adopted in the treasure challenge, but in this example, an example of a lottery method using any one of a plurality of types of lottery tables based on predetermined conditions will be described using FIG. 110. do.

FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery table used in the treasure challenge. In this example, every 10 treasure balls are collected, the treasure challenge is performed once using the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 110 (A) or FIG. 110 (B), and more specifically, until the treasure challenge is successful. During the first treasure challenge, the lottery table of FIG. 110 (A) is used, the second treasure challenge uses the lottery table of FIG. 110 (B), and thereafter, the lottery tables are alternately used. And.

The distribution of the lottery table shown in FIG. 110A will be described in detail.

First, as a basic rule regarding the degree of expectation that a normal AT will be granted (normal AT winning expectation), when the number of jewels A acquired is 1 to 5 (in other words, the number of jewels C acquired is 9). (In the case of up to 5 pieces), "Treasure ball A" has a winning expectation of 5 points (5%) for each piece, and "Treasure ball B" has a winning expectation of 3 points (3%) for each piece. Have a degree. This corresponds to the fact that "Treasure Ball A" is a privilege factor with a higher degree of expectation than "Treasure Ball C" as described above. Therefore, in such a combination of jewels, the higher the number of jewels A acquired, the higher the expectation of winning the normal AT.

Next, when the number of jewels A acquired is 6 or more (when the number of jewels C acquired is 4 or less), as a special case, the normal AT winning expectation is 100%, and the normal AT is always I am trying to be granted.

Furthermore, when the number of jewels A acquired is 7 or more (when the number of jewels C acquired is 3 or less), the winning of the normal AT is confirmed, and the lottery of the higher AT is also performed. The privilege is added. At this time, the higher the number of jewels A acquired, the higher the degree of expectation that the higher AT will be given (the degree of expectation of winning the upper AT) is set so that the number of jewels A acquired is 10 (the number of jewels C acquired is 10). In the case of 0), it is set to win both the normal AT and the upper AT with a 100% probability as a premier treatment.

As described above, in the treasure challenge using the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (A), when the number of treasure balls A acquired is 1 or more (when the number of treasure balls C acquired is 9 or less), the treasure ball A is acquired. The larger the number (the smaller the number of treasure balls C acquired), the higher the degree of expectation for the grant of AT (normal AT, higher AT). Further, by gradually increasing the expectation of winning these ATs according to the number of jewels A acquired, the effect of eliminating the feeling of loss due to the wasteful acquisition of jewels A (wasteful deduction of the rare role) is also achieved.

Therefore, in the jewel effect according to the present embodiment, as many jewels A as possible can be acquired during the game period until the treasure challenge is executed (the game period until the total number of jewels acquired reaches 10). You can entertain the player with the expectation (so that you win as many rare roles as possible).

However, in the treasure challenge using the lottery table of FIG. 110 (A), a special case contrary to the above-mentioned principle that "the more the jewel A is acquired, the more advantageous" is provided. Specifically, only when the number of jewels A acquired is 0 (when the number of jewels C acquired is 10), the expectation of winning the AT is usually 100%. According to the above-mentioned basic rule about the normal AT winning expectation, the normal AT winning expectation in the combination of 0 jewels A and 10 jewels C is 30% (calculation formula is 5 × 0 + 3). The place where only × 10 = 30) is set to 100% as a special case, and the privilege is given more than when the number of jewels A acquired is large (specifically, when 1 to 5). A "favorable" situation is created.

By providing such a special case, in the jewel effect of this embodiment, the jewel C is selected over the jewel A when the acquisition status of the jewel before the execution of the treasure challenge is "specific situation" ( In other words, winning the replay role rather than the rare role) is more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to create a situation in which the values of the jewels A and C are reversed.

Specifically, the "specific situation" is when the total number of jewels acquired is 5 or more and the number of jewels A acquired is 0. In this case, all the remaining jewels acquired are jewels A. Even so, the maximum expected value of AT winning is only 40% (when there are 5 jewels A and 5 jewels C), but if all the remaining jewels won are jewels C, the normal AT is won. The degree of expectation is 100% (when there are 0 jewels A and 10 jewels C), and acquiring the jewels C brings about a more advantageous game development for the player. Therefore, for example, if the number of jewels A is 0 and the number of jewels C is 9, the player expects to win the replay role that can acquire the jewel C rather than the rare role that can acquire the jewel A. The game will be played, and a novel playability of reversing the value will be provided.

Most of the distribution of the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (B) is the same as the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (A), and therefore, the treasure using the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (B). The features and effects of the challenge are the same as those of the treasure challenge using the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (A).

However, in the lottery table of FIG. 110 (B), the normal AT winning expectation is 50% in the above-mentioned "special case" combination in which the number of jewels A acquired is 0 and the number of jewels C acquired is 10. However, it is different from FIG. 110 (A), which is set to 100%. In the case of FIG. 110 (B) like this, even if all the 10 jewels acquired are jewels C, the grant of the normal AT is not always confirmed, and the effect of exciting the player until the end when the result is taught. Can be expected. In addition, even if the expectation of winning the AT is usually 50%, it is still a special case compared to the case where the number of jewels A is 1 to 5 (when the number of jewels C is 9 to 5) in the breakdown of the acquisition of jewels. Since the combination usually has a higher AT winning degree, the feature that acquiring the jewel C is more advantageous to the player than acquiring the jewel A in the "specific situation" to which the special case can be applied is shown in FIG. 110 (A). ) Is the same as when using the lottery table.

The lottery method in the treasure challenge is not limited to the above example. For example, until the treasure challenge is successful, the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (A) is used for the first treasure challenge, and the lottery table shown in FIG. 110 (B) is used for all the second and subsequent treasure challenges. good. Further, regardless of the success or failure of the treasure challenge, the lottery tables of FIGS. 110 (A) and 110 (B) may be alternately used each time the treasure challenge is performed. Further, the treasure challenge may be performed using only one type of lottery table, or the treasure challenge may be performed using any one of three or more types of lottery tables based on predetermined conditions. You may do it.

Further, it is not preferable that the lottery table used in the treasure challenge is changed to a different lottery table depending on the acquisition status of the jewels. If a lottery table that differs depending on the acquisition status of jewels is used, the impression that the appearance rate of the production and the winning display is intentionally manipulated according to the result determined by the internal processing becomes stronger, and it depends on the player's own power. This is because the sense of accomplishment may diminish. Therefore, by using the same lottery table regardless of the acquisition status of jewels, the specification that a predetermined advantageous privilege is decided based on the winning combination selected by the operation of the player (with a sense of self-help). Since it is a game, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the treasure challenge. However, even when such a restriction is provided, it is not restricted to change the lottery table used in the treasure challenge according to the gaming state such as the high probability state or the low probability state.

Further, when the internal lottery of the treasure challenge is performed in step S907, the value of the treasure ball parameter counted up by step S907 is reset, and specifically, it is rewritten to the initial value of 0.

Then, after the internal lottery of the treasure challenge is performed in step S907, the main board 409 (CPU1110) determines whether or not the lottery result is a winning of a predetermined advantageous privilege (normal AT or higher AT) (step). S908). If the predetermined advantageous privilege is won (YES in step S908), the process for granting the winning privilege is performed (step S909), and then the return is returned. If the predetermined advantageous privilege is not won (NO in step S908), the process returns to the return without any special processing.

As described above, by performing the processes of steps S901 to S910, the main board 409 (CPU1110) draws the acquisition of jewels, which is a privilege factor, based on the result of the winning combination lottery, and the number of jewels acquired reaches the specified number. In that case, a treasure challenge can be performed to draw a lottery for granting a predetermined advantageous privilege, and a predetermined advantageous privilege can be granted based on the result of the lottery.

[16-2. Screen display of jewel production]
In the image display body (main board 5211 or sub liquid crystal display 5221), a jewel effect controlled by the effect control board 510 is executed corresponding to a series of processes by the main board 409 exemplified in FIG. 109.

FIG. 111 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of a screen display of a jewel effect. FIG. 111 shows an example of a screen display on the sub liquid crystal display 5221 of the moving display body 522 as an example of the effect screen displayed during the game until the total number of jewels acquired reaches the specified number in the jewel effect. ..

In FIG. 111, in the display area 5222 of the display area of the sub liquid crystal display 5221, the acquisition status of the jewel A or the jewel C is displayed in a mode in which the acquisition order can be identified. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 111, each time a jewel is acquired in the jewel acquisition lottery (step S903 in FIG. 109), nine circular areas arranged along the circumference of the great circle are at 12 o'clock on the clock. It is filled clockwise from the area, and when the last 10 jewels are acquired, the circle area placed in the center of the great circle is filled ("A" means the acquisition of jewel A). , "C" means the acquisition of the treasure ball C).

Further, in the display area of the sub liquid crystal display 5221, the total number of jewels A acquired is displayed in the display area 5223, and the total number of jewels C acquired is displayed in the display area 5224. Then, in the display area 5225, the remaining number of jewels required to receive the treasure challenge is displayed. In the case of FIG. 111, since the treasure ball A is 2 pieces and the treasure ball C is 2 pieces, a total of 4 pieces have been acquired. ..

In the slot machine 1A according to the present embodiment, as in the sub liquid crystal display 5221 illustrated in FIG. 111, the acquisition status of the jewels in the jewel effect is displayed in an easily identifiable manner, so that the player can see what kind of jewels. You can always keep track of whether the game is progressing toward the treasure challenge based on the acquisition status of. As a result, while expecting different game developments in each game depending on the acquisition status of jewels (for example, in the normal acquisition situation, we expect to acquire jewel A by winning the rare role, but in the above "specific situation", the replay role. Expect to win the jewel C by winning, etc.) You can enjoy the game.

Further, even if the player is not familiar with the game specifications of the jewel effect in the slot machine 1A, the remaining number of jewels required to receive the treasure challenge is displayed in the display area 5225. It is possible to predict that something will happen when the number of displays in the display area 5225 decreases. Therefore, by displaying the number of remaining acquisitions in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from being stopped when the treasure challenge is near, and to suppress the disadvantage of the player due to not receiving the treasure challenge.

The display of the acquisition status of the jewels by the sub liquid crystal display 5221 of the moving display body 522 illustrated in FIG. 111 continues to be displayed over a specific game period (for example, normal time or chance zone) in which the jewel effect is executed. In the slot machine 1A, apart from such a display, in each game, an effect display related to the jewel effect can be displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 of the fixed display body 521.

As an example of the effect display related to the jewel effect by the main liquid crystal 5211, there is an effect of teaching whether or not the jewel is acquired.

This effect displays a predetermined effect screen in a game that can be expected to acquire the jewel A or C, and teaches whether or not the jewel A or C can be acquired along with the progress of the game. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display 5211, the treasure box is displayed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, and the effect of opening the treasure box at an appropriate timing by operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is displayed, and the contents thereof are displayed. Teach whether or not to acquire a jewel. The instruction of the type of acquired jewels may be given at the same time as whether or not the jewels can be acquired when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated, or later, for example, when a medal for the next game is inserted ( Alternatively, when the MAX input button 206 or the like is pressed), it may be specified whether the jewel A or the jewel C is used. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the player in multiple stages regarding the acquisition of jewels and their types. In addition, when teaching the result that the jewel could not be obtained when the treasure box was opened, the screen brightness of the main liquid crystal display 5211 is set to the normal time when the player's hand is released from the third stop button of the reel stop button 211. It may be possible to insert an effect that makes it darker than that, and it is possible to visually and clearly teach that such an effect resulted in a disappointing result.

Further, in this effect display, a common image effect (for example, a brown treasure box as a common color) may be used in which it is not possible to determine which of the jewel A and the jewel C can be expected to be acquired at the timing when the start lever 210 is operated. , Image effects with different expectations (for example, red or silver treasure chests, etc.) may be used to suggest the acquisition of jewels with a high degree of advantage. Further, an image effect (for example, a golden treasure chest) may be prepared in which the acquisition of a jewel with a high degree of advantage is confirmed. This "acquisition of a jewel with a high degree of advantage" means, in principle, the acquisition of a jewel A. However, as described in detail in the previous Treasure Challenge, if the acquisition status of the jewel is a "specific situation" that can be expected to be distributed as a "special case" in the treasure challenge, the jewel C will be acquired as a highly advantageous jewel. Cases may be included. Rather, from the viewpoint of advantage for the player, when the golden treasure chest is displayed, it is preferable to raise the degree of expectation to acquire the treasure ball C. In this way, the processing content of the main board 409 is changed (change of the lottery table to be used, etc.) by adjusting the target meaning of "highly advantageous jewel" on the production side according to the acquisition status of the jewel. It is possible to display a natural effect without any discomfort.

Then, after teaching whether or not the jewel is acquired on the main liquid crystal 5211, the acquisition result is reflected on the display of the sub liquid crystal 5221, whereby the jewel effect is executed on the sub liquid crystal 5221. Throughout the period, it is possible to clearly indicate the acquisition status of jewels.

In addition, as another example of the effect display related to the treasure effect by the main liquid crystal 5211, there is an effect of teaching whether or not a predetermined advantageous privilege (normal AT or higher AT) can be given when performing a treasure challenge. Be done.

FIG. 112 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a screen display example of the jewel effect. FIG. 112 shows an example of a screen display on the main liquid crystal display 5211 of the fixed display body 521 as an example of an effect screen based on the treasure challenge of the treasure effect. The screen transitions shown in FIGS. 112 (A) to 112 (E) will be briefly described.

First, FIG. 112A is an example of a screen display when a medal is inserted (or a MAX insertion button 206 or the like is pressed) after the total number of jewels acquired has reached 10 in the previous game. At this time, the main liquid crystal display 5211 displays a screen notifying the start of the treasure challenge.

Next, in FIG. 112 (B), a plurality of treasure chests are displayed as a screen display example immediately after the start lever 210 is operated. At this time, by giving variation to the number of treasure chests displayed, it is possible to suggest whether the degree of expectation for the winning result is high or low. In addition, by giving variations to the display colors and decorations of the displayed treasure chests, it is possible to suggest the high and low levels of expectations for each treasure chest. Specifically, as in the above-mentioned "directing to teach whether or not a jewel is acquired by the main liquid crystal 5211", a "silver treasure box" with a high degree of expectation and a "golden treasure box" for which a hit is confirmed are used. May be good.

Next, in FIG. 112C, the character drawn on the main liquid crystal display 5211 selects the treasure box as the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c to stop the reels 301a to 301c.

Then, after the third stop of the reel stop button 211c is performed (for example, at the timing when the player's hand is released from the third stopped reel stop button 211), FIG. 112 (D) or FIG. 112 (E). As shown in, the winning of the treasure challenge is taught. FIG. 112 (D) is a display example when the treasure challenge is successful, and "AT acquisition" is taught. At this time, it may be specified whether it is a normal AT or a higher AT, or it may be specified which AT is at a subsequent timing (for example, when a medal for the next game is inserted). On the other hand, FIG. 112 (E) is a display example when the treasure challenge fails, and shows that the contents of the treasure box are empty. Before transitioning to the display of FIG. 112 (E), an effect of making the screen brightness of the main liquid crystal display 5211 darker than usual when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 of the third stop is inserted. You may do it like this.

As described above, the image display body (main liquid crystal 5211, sub liquid crystal 5221) of the slot machine 1A can execute various effect displays related to the jewel effect. Further, although not shown in the above example, the sub liquid crystal display 5231 may be used, or the effect may be executed on the main liquid crystal display 5211.

However, in the effect display on the image display body (main liquid crystal 5211, sub liquid crystal 5221, etc.) related to the jewel effect, the "specific situation" that can be expected for the above-mentioned "special case" distribution is also a "specific situation". It is possible to restrict the player from notifying the player. In this case, specifically, in the "specific situation" where the number of jewels A acquired is 0 and the number of jewels C acquired is 9, the normal AT is confirmed if the jewel C is acquired next. Do not notify. The distribution of "special cases" in the above "specific situation" is applied only in the internal processing performed by the main board 409 (CPU1110), and is such a "specific situation" for the player. By not notifying that, when the grant of a predetermined advantageous privilege (normal AT) is decided by the "special case", the effect of giving surprise and joy to the player can be expected.

In addition, by not notifying the "specific situation", the advantageous privilege is given when the jewel A is 1 and the jewel C is 9 than when the jewel A is 0 and the jewel C is 10. Since it seems that the degree of expectation is high, even in the former case where the player feels that the degree of expectation is low (0 jewels A and 10 jewels C), advantageous benefits are given, so the degree of expectations is higher. Even in the latter case (1 treasure ball A and 9 treasure balls C), which seems to be high, advantageous benefits may be given, and the effect of giving a sense of expectation even in a low expectation situation. Can also be expected.

Even if the player is not notified of the "specific situation" in this way, the fact that the "special case" is applied in the treasure challenge itself is suggested or notified to the player. You may. Specifically, when the treasure challenge is entered with 0 treasure balls A and 10 treasure balls C, the character color of "Treasure Challenge!" (See Fig. 112 (A)) displayed on the main LCD 5211. The background color may be displayed in a manner different from that of a normal treasure challenge, or special light emission by a light emitter or the like provided on the housing may be controlled. Further, as a matter of course, even if the character color, the background color, and the light emitting mode of the illuminant are changed from the normal mode based on the acquisition status of the jewels A and C and the result of the lottery as to whether or not to grant the advantageous privilege. good. In such a case, it goes without saying that the expectation that the advantageous privilege will be given is higher when the display is performed in a mode different from the normal mode.

[16-3. Supplement to the jewel production]
Although an example of the jewel effect has been described in detail through [16-1] and [16-2], the jewel effect according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above example, and the slot machine 1A is as shown below. Various derived patterns may be replaced with or combined with the above-mentioned jewel effect as appropriate.

(1)
For example, regarding the jewel acquisition lottery, the jewel acquisition lottery may not be executed in a specific game state (for example, AT, ART, bonus game, etc.). Specifically, in the flowchart of FIG. 109, the jewel ball acquisition lottery is not performed at the time of winning the bonus, and the processing procedure in which the value of the jewel ball parameter is reset (step S910) is shown. The jewel acquisition lottery should not be held. The same applies during AT and ART.

(2)
Further, when the jewel acquisition lottery shifts to a specific game state (for example, AT, ART, bonus game, etc.), the jewel acquisition state (jewel stock) acquired so far may be cleared. Specifically, the flowchart of FIG. 109 shows a processing procedure in which the jewel ball acquisition lottery is not performed at the time of winning the bonus and the value of the jewel ball parameter is reset (step S910). However, even when the jewel stock is cleared at the time of transition to a specific gaming state, it is preferable to perform a process of adding another advantageous state after the specific gaming state is completed. Specifically, even if the jewel stock is cleared by winning the bonus, it corresponds to granting AT or ART after the end of the bonus game.

(3)
Further, when the jewel acquisition lottery shifts to a specific gaming state (for example, AT, ART, bonus game, etc.), the stock may be carried over until the specific gaming state ends. Specifically, by excluding the process of resetting the jewel ball parameter (step S910 in FIG. 109), the value of the jewel ball parameter can be carried over when the bonus is won. Then, after the end of the bonus game, the value of the jewel ball parameter can be carried over and the jewel ball acquisition lottery can be restarted.

(4)
Regarding the jewel acquisition lottery, in the above example, it is assumed that jewels (jewel A, jewel C) will always be acquired according to the predetermined winning combination (rare role or replay role), but a lottery table corresponding to the winning combination may be used. You may set the acquisition rate of jewels. Further, at this time, the acquisition rate of the jewels may be different depending on the gaming state (for example, the high probability state and the low probability state). In addition, a lottery table may be used in which a plurality of or a plurality of types of jewels can be acquired at the time of winning by one jewel acquisition lottery. By using such a lottery table, the acquisition situation of jewels may progress at once, so that the player can always enjoy the game while expecting to reach the jewel challenge.

(5)
Further, the opportunity to acquire a jewel is not limited to the jewel acquisition lottery based on the winning combination (condition device), and other acquisition opportunities may be prepared. Specifically, for example, a push order effect (correct answer) is given to give a chance to acquire a jewel based on the digestion of a predetermined number of games, or to make the player guess the stop order (may be the stop position) of the reels 301a to 301c. It is also conceivable to perform an effect that teaches the push order) and give an opportunity to acquire a jewel based on the success or failure.

(6)
Further, which of the plurality of types of advantageous benefits is given when the treasure challenge is successful may be made to depend on the breakdown of the acquired privilege factors (jewels A and C). Specifically, when the number of jewels A with high expectations alone is large, it is easy to choose to grant a high-ranking AT, which is a highly advantageous advantage, and acquisition of jewels C with low expectations alone. If the number is large, a treasure challenge may be performed using a lottery table in which the granting of a normal AT, which is a low-advantageous advantage privilege, is easily selected. However, even when such a lottery table is used, if the "special case" is applied (when the number of treasure balls C is 10,) the high advantageous privilege (that is, the higher AT) is distributed so as to be selected.

(7)
Further, in the jewel production described so far, it has been said that when the number of acquired jewels, which is a privilege factor, reaches a specified number, a treasure challenge is performed to determine the granting of a predetermined advantageous privilege. In the jewel production, the arrival of the specified number does not necessarily have to be the trigger for executing the treasure challenge. Specifically, for example, when a specific game period in which a jewel effect is performed meets a specified condition (for example, 10 game digestion), a treasure challenge is executed based on the total acquisition result of the jewel until the specified condition is satisfied. You may do it. When the specified condition is the number of games, the number of games is not limited to a plurality of games and may be one game.

Further, the prescribed conditions may be set in multiple stages so that a lottery for granting predetermined advantageous benefits may be performed. Specifically, each time the first specified condition (for example, one jewel is acquired) is satisfied, the treasure challenge is executed, and those games satisfy the second specified condition (for example, 10 game digestion). In this case, a treasure challenge or the like (including a lottery of the same type as the treasure challenge that determines the granting of predetermined advantageous benefits) may be separately executed. Furthermore, a third rule condition (for example, a total of 5 jewels is acquired) is set so that the above treasure challenge or the like is executed even before the second rule condition is met or when the third rule condition is met. You may do it. These multiple specified conditions can be set in combination as appropriate, and by providing multiple specified conditions in this way, it can be expected that predetermined advantageous benefits will be granted in multiple stages, which will have the effect of further enhancing the entertainment interests of the game. You can expect it.

As described above, when the slot machine 1A according to the present embodiment is not in an advantageous gaming state such as a bonus game, AT, ART, etc. by being able to execute a jewel effect in a specific gaming period (for example, normal time or chance zone). Even so, while expecting the granting of a predetermined advantageous privilege (treasure challenge), it is possible to enjoy collecting the privilege factors (acquisition of jewels) and play the game, and the player can enjoy the game. It is a game machine that has been devised so that it can be executed.

[17. Trial ball production]
This chapter describes an example of a characteristic effect that can be executed in the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The series of productions explained in this chapter is tentatively referred to as "trial ball production".

In the trial ball production, every time a specific condition is satisfied, a lottery right to receive a lottery for granting advantageous benefits is acquired, and when the number of lottery rights acquired reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number of lottery rights are individually given. It is a production that digests and receives a lottery to grant advantageous benefits and teaches the result. Although a specific example will be described later, the specific condition for acquiring the lottery right is based on the winning combination, such as acquiring the lottery right with a probability of 50% when the rare role is won.

As the role of the process related to the trial ball production, the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110) performs an internal lottery for the winning combination, a lottery for acquiring the lottery right, a lottery for granting the advantageous privilege, and the granting of the advantageous privilege. Then, the effect control board 510 (mainly CPU 1118 or VDP1124) causes the image display body (main liquid crystal 5211 or sub liquid crystal 5231) to display the effect screen of the trial ball effect based on the result of the processing by the main board 409.

In addition, in explaining the trial ball production concretely below, the lottery right acquired in the trial ball production is called "trial ball", and the lottery for granting advantageous benefits is performed by digesting the lottery right. Is called the "trial ball challenge". Then, for example, "mode up", "chance zone", "normal AT (AT)" and "upper AT (specialized zone)" are prepared as advantageous benefits that can be given when the trial ball challenge is won. Here, in "mode up", a plurality of game states (low probability state, normal state, high probability state, etc.) with different expectations for various game developments that are advantageous to the player are prepared. Among them, it means a transition to a higher gaming state than the current one (a transition to a higher level or a transition to the highest level). The "chance zone" is a game state in which the game is executed over a specific period, and the expectation of winning a specific advantageous privilege (bonus, AT, ART, etc.) is set higher than usual. Since the "normal AT" and the "upper AT" are the same as those described in the jewel production in Chapter [16], the description thereof will be omitted again.

The trial ball production will be explained with a concrete example.

113 and 114 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) showing an example of screen display of the trial ball effect. FIG. 113 shows the effect screen of the trial ball effect that can be executed by the slot machine 1A until the trial ball challenge is started, and FIG. 114 shows the effect screen during the trial ball challenge. .. In the trial ball production illustrated in FIGS. 113 and 114, the acquisition status of the trial balls is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 5231, and when a predetermined number (specifically, three) of the trial balls are accumulated, the trial ball challenge is performed on the main liquid crystal 5211. The production is executed. A detailed description will be given along the flow of FIGS. 113 and 114.

First, regarding the display of the acquisition state of the trial balls in the sub liquid crystal 5231, referring to FIG. 113 (A), the display area of the sub liquid crystal 5231 shows circular display areas 5232 to 5234 imitating three trial balls. (In order, they are called the first to third trial ball displays). In these first to third trial ball displays, one trial ball is displayed each time a trial ball is acquired. In this example, as the trial balls having different expectations for winning, a trial ball with an expectation degree of "A", a trial ball with an expectation degree of "B", and a trial ball with an expectation degree of "C" are used. The high degree of expectation is A> B> C. Then, the expected degree (A to C) of the acquired trial balls is indicated on the first to third trial ball displays.

FIG. 113A shows the state of the slot machine 1A when the first trial ball is acquired. In the symbol display window 401, the reels 301a to 301c are stopped, and the symbol combination of the weak watermelon combination (condition device number 86 in FIG. 53) is displayed. Then, "Trial ball acquisition!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211, and "B" is shown on the display area 5232 of the sub liquid crystal display 5231. That is, in FIG. 113 (A), it is shown that in the game in which the winning combination of the weak watermelon is won, the trial ball having the expectation degree “B” is acquired as the first trial ball.

Here, I will supplement the lottery for winning trial balls. Various specific conditions can be set as an opportunity to acquire the trial ball, but in this example, the main board 409 (CPU1110) is set according to the winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery. Based on the rate, a lottery will be drawn to acquire trial balls with expectations of "A" to "C". When the result of acquiring the trial ball is obtained in the lottery, the main board 409 holds the acquired trial ball and its expectation levels "A" to "C" until the lottery in the trial ball challenge described later is performed. It is held as data in RAM 1114 or the like. In addition, it is assumed that the trial ball acquisition lottery is not executed in a predetermined advantageous gaming state (for example, during a bonus).

FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a lottery for acquiring trial balls. FIG. 115 shows an image example of a lottery table used for a lottery for acquiring trial balls, and shows the degree of expectation (acquisition expectation) for acquiring trial balls with expectations A to C for each winning combination. There is. In addition, in FIG. 115, “weak rare” is a general term for a weak watermelon role, a weak cherry role, and a weak chance role among the winning roles exemplified in FIG. 49, and “strong rare” is exemplified in FIG. 49. Among the winning roles, it is a general term for the bell role, strong watermelon role, strong cherry role, strong chance role, and strongest role in any order. Then, when the bonus combination (for example, the 2 types BB in FIG. 49) is won, the trial ball acquisition lottery is not performed. These also apply to FIG. 116.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 115, when the winning combination is a high-frequency combination with a relatively high frequency of winning, such as a missed combination, a replay role, or a push order bell role, the acquisition expectation that the acquisition of the trial ball cannot be expected so much. The degree is set. On the other hand, when the winning role is a low-frequency role with a low winning frequency, such as a weak rare role or a strong rare role, the expected degree of acquisition that can be expected to acquire the trial ball is set (acquisition in the weak rare role). Expectation is 60%). In particular, if the winning role is a strong rare role, one of the trial balls can always be acquired, and the most expected trial ball "A" can also be expected to be acquired (acquisition expectation 25). %).

It should be noted that the trial ball acquisition lottery may use a lottery table in which different acquisition expectations are set according to the current gaming state (low probability state, normal state, high probability state, etc.). For example, if the lottery table of FIG. 115 is a lottery table corresponding to a normal state, it is preferable that the lottery table corresponding to a low probability state is set to have a low acquisition expectation as a whole, and conversely, it corresponds to a high probability state. It is preferable that the lottery table is set with a high degree of expectation of acquisition as a whole. By using the lottery table with different acquisition expectations depending on the game state in this way, in a more advantageous game state, it becomes easier to acquire the trial ball, and the advantage that the trial ball challenge is easy to approach is realized.

After acquiring the first trial ball as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the game proceeds while the display of the acquisition status is maintained on the sub liquid crystal display 5231. Then, a trial ball having an expectation degree of "C" is acquired as a second trial ball in a later game (see the display area 5233 in FIG. 113 (B)), and a third trial ball is acquired in a later game. ..

FIG. 113B shows the state of the slot machine 1A when the third trial ball is acquired. In the case of FIG. 113 (B), the reels 301a to 301c are stopped in the symbol display window 401, and the symbol combination of the strong watermelon combination (condition device number 92 in FIG. 53) is displayed. Then, "trial ball MAX!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 indicating that a predetermined number (three in this example) of trial balls have been collected, and "A" is displayed in the display area 5234 of the sub liquid crystal display 5231. The notation is shown. That is, FIG. 113 (B) shows that in the game in which the winning combination of the strong watermelon was won, the trial ball having the expectation degree “A” was acquired as the third trial ball.

FIG. 113C shows the state of the slot machine 1A immediately after the start of the next game of the game shown in FIG. 113B (immediately after the operation of the start lever 210). Since the number of trial balls acquired has reached a predetermined number of three at the time of FIG. 113 (B), the trial ball challenge performed by digesting the three trial balls is started from the game. In this example, the start of the trial ball challenge is notified in the game (first game), and then a lottery of advantageous benefits is performed in a manner of consuming one trial ball in one game. That is, the games in which the lottery of advantageous benefits using the trial balls is actually performed are the second to fourth games. As another effect development, the lottery of advantageous benefits may be started from the first game, but in such a case, the start lever 210 is operated in the first game after the trial ball MAX. In the meantime, it is preferable to perform an effect of notifying the start of the trial ball challenge on the main liquid crystal display 5211 or the like.

In FIG. 113 (C), the first to third trial ball displays on the sub liquid crystal display 5232 are empty, but this means that the trial ball challenge is performed using the three acquired trial balls. For example, by displaying an effect screen in which the three acquired trial balls move into the main liquid crystal display 5211, the relationship between the acquired trial balls and the trial ball challenge is more strongly suggested. You may try to do it. Further, in the main liquid crystal display 5211 of FIG. 113 (C), the feature of the trial ball challenge (for example, a lottery is performed for each game and is executed for a total of 3 games, and the winning combination is expected to be an advantageous privilege. (The degree changes, etc.) may be taught. By giving such teaching, it becomes clear what the player should expect in the trial ball challenge, and it can be expected to have an effect of enhancing the game interest.

FIG. 114 (A) is an example of an effect screen following FIG. 113 (C), and is a slot when a lottery of advantageous benefits (first trial ball challenge) performed by digesting the first trial ball is performed. The state of the machine 1A is shown. FIG. 114 (B) shows the state of the slot machine 1A when the lottery of advantageous benefits (second trial ball challenge) performed by digesting the second trial ball is performed, and FIG. 114 (C) shows the state of the slot machine 1A. ) Shows the state of the slot machine 1A when the lottery of advantageous benefits (third trial ball challenge) performed by digesting the third trial ball is performed. The lottery of advantageous benefits performed by digesting the trial balls is determined based on the result of the winning combination lottery in each game, in which the first to third trial ball challenges are independently performed.

Here, we will supplement the lottery of advantageous benefits in the trial ball challenge. In this example, the main board 409 (CPU 1110) draws a lottery on whether or not to grant advantageous benefits based on the expected degree (A to C) of the trial balls to be consumed and the winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery.

FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining a lottery in the trial ball challenge. FIG. 116 shows an image example of a lottery table used for the lottery of advantageous benefits in the trial ball challenge, and the winning expectation of the advantageous benefits by the combination of the expected degree of the trial balls to be consumed and the winning combination ( Victory expectation) is shown.

According to the lottery table of FIG. 116, in the lottery using the trial ball with the expectation degree "C", the winning expectation degree of 50% (although the numerical value in the figure is an image example) is secured on average for all the winning combinations. There is. However, looking at each winning combination, if the winning combination is a high-frequency role (especially a missed role or a replay role), it is not expected to win a favorable privilege so much. On the other hand, a lottery with a trial ball with an expectation level of "B" has a total victory expectation of 70%, and a lottery with a trial ball with an expectation level of "A" has a very high victory expectation of 90%. .. In particular, in the case of the expectation level "A", no matter which winning combination is selected in the winning combination lottery (including the loss), the winning expectation level of 75% or more is set, so it is strong in granting advantageous benefits. You can expect it.

Further, in the lottery table of FIG. 116, a distribution is also set in which an advantageous privilege is always given (wins) by a combination of a trial ball having a predetermined degree of expectation and a predetermined winning combination. For example, in the case of a trial ball with an expectation level of "A", if it is a winning role of a weak rare role or higher, it will always be won. By providing such a definite pattern, the player can enjoy the winning result with peace of mind when the winning combination is won. And, as a whole, if the winning role is a low frequency role (weak rare role, strong rare role), there is a tendency that the winning expectation is high, so these low frequency roles in the game where the trial ball challenge is performed. The player will have high expectations for the game, and the interest in the game result can be greatly increased.

As described in the lottery table in the trial ball acquisition lottery in FIG. 115, the lottery table used for the lottery in the trial ball challenge is also in the current gaming state (low probability state, normal state, high probability state, etc.). Depending on the situation, a lottery table with different winning expectations may be used. For example, the winning expectation of a trial ball having an expectation degree of "C" is set to 30% in a low probability state, 50% in a normal state, and 70% in a high probability state.

By using the lottery table as illustrated in FIG. 116, the main board 409 executes the lottery of the advantageous privilege in the trial ball challenge a total of three times. The main board 409 holds the lottery result in each round, and determines the advantageous privilege to be given by the total number of winnings (number of wins) when all three rounds are completed.

Specifically, in this example, when the total number of winnings is 1 (1 win), "mode up to a high probability state" is given as a privilege, and when the total number of winnings is 2 times. For (2 wins), a "predetermined chance zone (CZ)" will be given as a privilege, and if the total number of winnings is 3 (3 wins), "normal AT and higher AT (specialized zone)" will be given. It will be a grant privilege. As for the privilege granted by the total number of winnings (number of wins), any advantageous privilege can be set in advance, but it is required that the more the total number of winnings is, the more advantageous the privilege is set for the player. Therefore, in the above example, the chance zone is more advantageous to the player than the mode up, and the AT is positioned as a privilege more advantageous to the player than the chance zone. Further, in the case of even one win in the trial ball challenge of the present embodiment, it is preferable that some advantageous privilege is always given.

The explanation will be continued by returning to the effect screen of FIG. 114 (A). In FIG. 114 (A), the symbol combination of the replay combination (condition device number 103 in FIG. 53) is displayed in the symbol display window 401. Here, since the expected degree of the trial ball used for the first trial ball challenge is "B" (see FIG. 113), using the lottery table of FIG. 116, the first trial ball challenge wins 40%. It will be the degree of expectation. Then, based on the result of the lottery performed by the main board 409, the effect control board 510 displays the result on the main liquid crystal display 5211. In FIG. 114 (A), the fact that "failure" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 indicates that the trial ball challenge has failed. In FIG. 114 (A) and the like, three squares are prepared in the upper right part of the main liquid crystal display 5211, which displays the result of the trial ball challenge to be performed three times. By performing such a display, the history of the trial ball challenge can be clearly shown to the player.

Next, FIG. 114 (B) shows the state of the second trial ball challenge. The second trial ball challenge is performed by digesting the trial ball with the expectation degree "C", and according to the display of the symbol display window 401, the winning combination is the weak cherry combination (condition device number 42 in FIG. 53). .. Therefore, using the lottery table of FIG. 116, the second trial ball challenge has an 80% victory expectation. In FIG. 114 (B), when "success" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211, it is taught that the trial ball challenge was successful (winned).

Similarly, FIG. 114 (C) shows the state of the third trial ball challenge. The third trial ball challenge is performed by digesting the trial ball with the expectation degree "A", and the symbol display window 401 is won because the bell zero eye (condition device number 17 in FIG. 53) is displayed. The role is the push order bell role. Therefore, using the lottery table of FIG. 116, the third trial ball challenge has a 95% victory expectation. In FIG. 114 (C), the fact that "success" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 indicates that the trial ball challenge was successfully succeeded (winned). In FIGS. 114 (A) to 114 (C), it is not clear which lottery table is used for the lottery for the trial ball challenge. For example, in the upper right part of the main liquid crystal display 5211 described above. Even if an image suggesting the lottery table to be used is displayed in the three squares (instead of "?", "B" is displayed when a lottery table with an expectation degree of "B" is used, etc.). good.

Next, FIG. 116 (D) shows the state of the slot machine 1A after the three trial ball challenges are completed. The main liquid crystal display 5211 in FIG. 116 (D) shows that the overall result of the trial ball challenge was successful twice in total (2 wins). Then, as described in the supplement using FIG. 116, in this example, in the case of two wins, a "predetermined chance zone (CZ)" is given as an advantageous privilege, so that the main liquid crystal display 5211 is "rushed into the CZ". The reward is taught.

Then, in the next game (which may be after a predetermined precursor period or preparation period), the main board 409 shifts the game state to a predetermined chance zone, so that the advantageous privilege determined in the trial ball challenge is actually given. To.

As a matter of course, the 1st to 3rd trial ball challenges are performed with the consumption of the 3 trial balls acquired so far, so after the trial ball challenge is completed, regardless of the result of the win, The number of trial balls acquired will be 0.

As described above, according to the slot machine 1A in which the trial ball effect is executed, when the lottery rights (trial balls) acquired each time a specific condition is satisfied are accumulated up to a predetermined number, a plurality of accumulated lottery is accumulated. As the rights are exhausted, you can expect to receive advantageous benefits (Trial Ball Challenge).

As described above, in the trial ball production according to the present embodiment, a lottery for granting advantageous benefits (trial ball challenge) is performed by collecting trial balls as lottery rights, but acquisition of trial balls is performed. In itself, it is characteristic that it is merely the acquisition of lottery rights in the lottery for granting advantageous benefits in the future (trial ball challenge). That is, in the trial ball production according to the present embodiment, although the winning expectation of the trial ball challenge regarding the granting of advantageous benefits is determined as the expectation degree "A" to "C" at the time of acquiring the trial ball, the trial is performed. It is not possible to actually receive a lottery for granting advantageous benefits just by acquiring balls, but it is said that the trial ball will be activated only after collecting a predetermined number (3 in this example), and you will be able to receive a lottery for granting advantageous benefits. It is based on the slot machine 1A (which can also be executed by the slot machine 1 if the effect display in the main liquid crystal 5211 and the sub liquid crystal 5231 is combined into one image display body 500), which has features and can execute such a trial ball effect. For example, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a novel expectation effect.

In addition, in the trial ball production, the acquired trial balls are held until a predetermined number is accumulated in principle, but when the gaming state shifts to the predetermined gaming state, the acquired amount up to that point is extinguished. do. Specifically, for example, if the AT (or ART, bonus, etc.) is won before the predetermined number of three trial balls are collected, the main board 409 eliminates the acquired trial balls (inside the RAM 1114, etc.). (Clear the data of the number of acquired trial balls, etc.), and the trial ball display on the sub liquid crystal 5231 is also cleared. The disappearance of the trial ball can be said to be a disadvantage for the player in that the lottery right in the trial ball challenge disappears, but the game characteristics change (become an advantageous game state) due to the transition to the AT game, etc. Consciousness is also considered to be suitable for the game, and it is difficult for players to regard it as a major disadvantage. In addition, when the advantageous privilege of the AT game (or ART game, bonus game, etc.) is given, or when the gaming state shifts while the replay probability is maintained in a high probability state, the advantageous privilege is in the future. Even if the trial ball, which is positioned as a lottery right, disappears, it does not attract the attention of the player so much, and there is little possibility that the player feels a sense of loss or discomfort.

On the other hand, by providing the condition for extinguishing the trial ball as described above, the slot machine 1A can suppress an excessive increase in the ball ejection rate triggered by the trial ball effect. If the ball ejection rate triggered by a specific effect such as a trial ball effect becomes too high, it will be difficult for the hall to secure profits. In addition, as a manufacturer of slot machine 1A, in order to adjust the overall payout rate, there is no choice but to design to suppress the payout rate triggered by other effects, and the effect balance of the entire gaming machine. In addition, there is a risk that the ball ejection balance will deteriorate (the game balance will be lost). Therefore, by providing a condition (the game state has shifted to a predetermined game state) to extinguish the element (trial ball as a lottery right in the trial ball challenge) that leads to the ball ejection opportunity as described above, the player loses. It is possible to overcome the problems on the hole maker side by suppressing an excessive increase in the ball output rate while avoiding feelings and discomfort.

Based on the above, the slot machine 1A of the present embodiment capable of executing the trial ball effect gives a lottery right (trial ball) when a specific condition is satisfied, but the lottery right is given unless a special condition is satisfied. It can be said that it is a game machine that can extinguish. "Special conditions" are equivalent to winning the Trial Ball Challenge. "When the special conditions are not met" means that the trial ball challenge fails, or the transition to the "predetermined game state" in which the trial ball disappears before reaching the trial ball challenge. At this time, the lottery right (trial ball) is extinguished as described above.

Then, according to such a trial ball production, after collecting a plurality of lottery rights (trial balls with expectations "A" to "C") individually given the degree of expectation for granting advantageous benefits, they are put together. Since the lottery of advantageous benefits (trial ball challenge) is held, even if the expectation is weak if it is an individual lottery right, multiple lottery rights are held in succession, and the expectation as a whole is played. Can be given to a person.

In addition, the trial ball acquired based on the winning combination while the normal game progress is performed can be regarded as an additional privilege in the game. According to the trial ball production, by collecting such additional benefits, a lottery for granting advantageous benefits can be received, so that the player can be given a so-called “profitable feeling”. On the other hand, as described above, it is possible to set a condition for extinguishing the lottery right while not causing the player to feel uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress the increase in the rate and adjust the game balance.

In the trial ball effect according to the present embodiment, the following derivative patterns may be appropriately replaced with or combined with the above-mentioned trial ball effect.

(1)
First, in FIG. 113 (A) and the like, when the trial balls are acquired, the expected degrees “A” to “C” of the acquired trial balls are shown in the display areas 5232 to 5234 of the sub liquid crystal 5231. , The display method of the trial ball is not limited to this, and may be another display method. Specifically, in the display areas 5232 to 5234, the acquired trial balls may be displayed in a display mode that only suggests the degree of expectation, instead of clearly indicating the degree of expectation. For example, when suggesting a low degree of expectation, it may be displayed with a blue trial ball, and when suggesting a high degree of expectation, it may be displayed with a red trial ball. Further, instead of the notation such as the expectation degree "A" to "C", a specific winning probability may be shown. For example, if the lottery table shown in FIG. 116 is used, the average winning expectation in the trial ball challenge is 90%, 70%, and 50%, respectively, for each trial ball having the expectation degree "A" to the expectation degree "C". be. When this is applied to FIG. 113 (B), the notation of the display areas 5232 to 5234 of the sub liquid crystal 5231 may be "70", "50", and "90" in order. By clearly indicating the degree of expectation numerically in this way, the player can more clearly understand how much he / she can expect to grant advantageous benefits in the trial ball challenge, which has the effect of increasing interest and reliability in the production. Play.

(2)
Further, in the example of the trial ball acquisition lottery described with reference to FIGS. 113 (A) and 113 (B) and FIG. 115, the number of trial balls that can be acquired in one acquisition lottery is one, but one time. You may prepare a distribution that can acquire a plurality of trial balls in the acquisition lottery. At this time, the distribution of the expected degree of each trial ball may be arbitrarily set. Specifically, for example, by preparing a distribution such as acquiring 3 trial balls when a special rare role (for example, the strongest role) is won, it is possible to immediately connect to the trial ball challenge from the acquisition of the trial balls. It will be possible to provide a special game development that enhances the game entertainment. And in such a special game development, it is advantageous to make a special design such as raising the expectation of the three trial balls acquired at once (for example, making all the trial balls of expectation "A"). You may also try to enhance the special feeling regarding the granting of benefits. For example, using the lottery table shown in FIG. 116, if all three are trial balls with an expectation of "A", the best result of 3 wins can be obtained with a high probability of 72.9% (once). Calculated based on the average winning expectation of 90%).

(3)
Further, when the advantageous privilege given as a result of the success of the trial ball challenge has already been obtained, the advantageous privilege one step higher than the advantageous privilege may be given. Specifically, for example, when the advantageous privilege given when the total number of winnings in a series of trial ball challenges is 1 (1 win) is "mode up to a high probability state", the gaming state is already in place. If it is in a high probability state, it is meaningless that the mode up is performed as a reward for finishing the trial ball challenge with one win, and the player is discouraged. Therefore, in such a case, the advantageous privilege (“predetermined chance zone (CZ)” in the above-mentioned example) given when the total number of winnings by the trial ball challenge is 2 times (2 wins) By granting, it is possible to reliably grant advantageous benefits to the player. Similarly, if a trial ball challenge is held in a predetermined chance zone and the result is 2 wins, the advantageous privilege given when 3 wins are given (in the above-mentioned example, "normal AT and upper AT". (Specialized zone) ”) may be added.

(4)
Further, in the above-mentioned specific example, when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state, the trial balls that have been acquired and accumulated up to that point are extinguished, but from the viewpoint of protecting the interests of the player, Even when the game state has changed to a predetermined state, the acquired trial balls may be carried over.

Further, when the gaming state shifts to a predetermined gaming state, it may be determined by lottery or the like whether or not the trial balls that have been acquired and accumulated up to that point will disappear. Specifically, for example, when the player shifts to a predetermined gaming state, the player is requested to press the MAX input button 206, and the main board 409 is tried using a random number acquired at the timing when the pressing operation is performed. It is conceivable to decide whether or not the ball disappears. In this case, since the disappearance of the trial ball is determined based on the player's own operation, even if the trial ball disappears, the effect of alleviating the player's dissatisfaction can be expected.

[18. Double navigation production]
This chapter describes an example of a characteristic effect that can be executed in the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The series of productions explained in this chapter is tentatively called "double navigation production".

The double navigation effect is a form of instruction effect that requires the player to execute the game operation indicated by the predetermined instruction mode by presenting any predetermined instruction mode among a plurality of instruction modes prepared in advance. However, it has characteristics different from the conventional general instruction and production. The game operation in which the double navigation effect requires the player to execute is specifically, for example, corresponding to the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c for the reels 301a to 301c. An instruction mode regarding the stop operation is presented.

The double navigation effect according to the present embodiment has the following features, which are different from the conventional general instruction effect. That is, in the double navigation effect, at the stage immediately after the effect is started, the predetermined instruction mode finally presented in the effect is displayed in a display mode that cannot be discriminated by the player, and after the display. In the stage of, the predetermined instruction mode (predetermined instruction mode finally presented) is displayed in a display mode recognizable by the player without showing other instruction modes included in the plurality of instruction modes. ..

FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a screen display example of a double navigation effect. FIG. 117 shows an example of a double navigation effect using the configuration of the image display body peculiar to the slot machine 1A described in Chapter [15]. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display 5211 of the fixed display body 521. In addition to the image display, the double navigation effect is developed by interlocking the moving display bodies 522 and 523 provided with the sub liquid crystals 5221 and 5231.

First, FIG. 117 (A) shows that the start lever 210 is operated as an example of the start trigger of the double navigation effect. As described above with reference to FIG. 55 and the like, in the slot machine 1A, if the operation is performed while the operation of the starting lever 210 is enabled, the winning combination lottery or the like is performed by the main board 409, and the wait is performed. When the timer is timed up, the rotation of the reels 301a to 301c is started. Then, when the effect control board 510 selects the execution of the double navigation effect based on the success or failure of the winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery and other execution conditions, the effects after FIG. 117 (B) are performed. In the case of FIG. 117, it is assumed that the winning combination (temporarily called the BAR combination) that allows the stop of the symbol combination in which the BAR symbols are lined up in the upward-sloping line is won by the winning combination lottery, and the symbol combination of this BAR combination is won. Supposes that a predetermined advantageous privilege (for example, a bonus game or a pseudo-bonus game) is given.

First, in FIG. 117 (B), the rotation of the reels 301a to 301c starts after the start lever 210 is turned on, and the operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be accepted. This is an example of the effect screen to be executed. As shown in FIG. 117 (B), the moving display body 522 and the moving display body 533 move from the standby position to the operating position, respectively, thereby shielding a part of the upper display area of the main liquid crystal display 5211. Then, different symbols (specifically, a cherry symbol and a BAR symbol) are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 5221 of the moving display body 522 and the sub liquid crystal 5231 of the moving display body 523, and the main liquid crystal 5211 indicates these two symbols. "Which one !?" is displayed in the mode. By displaying the effect by the entire image display body (main liquid crystal display 5211, sub liquid crystal display 5221, 5231), the player is notified in FIG. 117 (B) that a stop operation aiming at either symbol is required. However, the player cannot determine the instruction mode that is finally presented in the double navigation effect.

In the effect screen of FIG. 117 (B), the display of "Which one !?" is displayed in a large size on the main liquid crystal display 5211 so that the player does not overlook the occurrence of the double navigation effect. Further, the display timings of the display on the main liquid crystal display 5211 and the display on the sub liquid crystal displays 5221 and 5231 do not have to be simultaneous. For example, after "Which one !?" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211, the moving image bodies 522, 523 may be moved to the operating position to display each symbol on the sub liquid crystal displays 5221 and 5231. When the display timing is shifted as described above, the player cannot even recognize the candidate of the instruction mode at the stage where the display is performed on the main liquid crystal display 5211.

As shown in FIG. 117 (B), the display of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c by "white" is a state in which the pressing operation cannot be accepted (a state until the reel can be accepted after rotation, and a reel). It means that it is the state after the stop operation is accepted). Further, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), the display of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c by "shading" means that the pressing operation can be accepted. These display rules are the same for FIGS. 113 and 114 described above and FIGS. 122 to 124 and 129 described later.

Next, FIG. 117 (C) shows an example of an effect screen executed at a timing after the effect screen of FIG. 117 (B) is displayed and before the operation of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c becomes acceptable (valid). Is. As a change from FIG. 117 (B), the moving image body 522 remained in the operating position and the display of the cherry pattern on the sub liquid crystal display 5221 disappeared, while the moving image body 523 was shielded by returning to the standby position. The display area of the main liquid crystal 5211 is opened so that the player can see it, and the BAR symbol is displayed in the opened display area of the main liquid crystal 5211.

The effect screen of FIG. 117 (C) is displayed at a timing before the player can perform the reel stop operation with respect to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. That is, the player can determine the instruction mode (aiming at the BAR symbol) finally presented in the double navigation effect by showing the effect screen of FIG. 117 (C) before performing the reel stop operation. can do. As shown in FIG. 117 (C), when it is shown that the BAR symbol is aimed at, the display is not performed with respect to another instruction (in this example, aiming at the cherry symbol).

FIG. 117 (D) shows an example of an effect screen when the player presses the reel stop button 211c corresponding to the right reel 301c at a timing when the BAR symbol can be pulled in. As described in FIG. 117 (A), in the game, it is allowed to stop the BAR-aligned symbol combination on the upward-sloping line, so that when the reel stop button 211c is pressed at an appropriate timing. The BAR symbol stops on the upper stage of the right reel. According to FIG. 117 (D), even when the right reel 301c is stopped, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are still rotating, so that the image display body points to the "BAR symbol" and "aims". The effect screen of "!" Is continued as in FIG. 117 (C).

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 117 (E), the stop operation is performed at the timing when the BAR symbol can be pulled into the upward-sloping line for all the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, and all the reels 301a to 301c are stopped. Then, the symbol combination of the BAR symbol matching is stopped on the upward-sloping line. At this time, since it is no longer necessary to display the instruction mode by the double navigation effect, the moving image body 522 remaining in the operating position is also returned to the standby position. Then, on the main liquid crystal display 5211, an effect screen congratulating that the BAR pattern alignment has stopped is displayed.

By executing the double navigation effect as described above, the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine 1) sets the player in the instruction effect indicating one of the plurality of instruction modes prepared. It is possible to teach the player an appropriate instruction mode with clear instructions without making them wait and without causing confusion or misunderstanding.

More specifically, first, in the above-mentioned double navigation effect, an effect of showing an instruction mode (other instruction mode) other than the final instruction mode is sandwiched between the transition from FIG. 117 (B) to FIG. 117 (C). not. In other words, the display of the final instruction mode in FIG. 117 (C) is a so-called immediate branch instruction display. Specifically, the "instruction display by immediate branching" is, for example, when there are three types of instructions, "aim at cherry", "aim at BAR", and "aim at red 7". As the first step, the production is focused on two types, "Aim for BAR" and "Aim for Red 7," and then the production is focused on one type, "Aim for Red 7." It is not an instruction display that gradually narrows down the instruction content with the passage of time, but an instruction display that suddenly narrows down to one type such as "Aim for Red 7" among multiple types of instruction content. means. Therefore, the player may perform the game operation based only on the final instruction mode notified by the effect screen of FIG. 117 (C), and may be confused with the player when other instruction modes are displayed. It is possible to prevent problems such as misidentification, and it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player due to the above confusion and misidentification. That is, the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine capable of executing an instruction effect that is difficult for the player to misunderstand.

Further, in the above-mentioned double navigation effect, not only the instruction display by immediate branching is performed, but also the timing at which the finally presented instruction mode (final instruction mode) is displayed is the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. Is designed to be completed before it becomes available. The time from the operation of the start lever 210 to the time when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be stopped (the reel stop button 211 becomes effective) is different depending on the game time required for the previous game. The start lever is used in a game in which the reel stop button 211 is activated in the shortest time in a game in which the double navigation effect is executed (in other words, there is no waiting time for waiting for the wait timer to time up). The double navigation effect (until the display of the final instruction mode) is executed within the time from the operation of 210 to the activation of the reel stop button 211. Therefore, the player can promptly perform the stop operation based on the final instruction mode when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be operated without stopping the progress procedure of the game until the final instruction mode is displayed. Since it is possible, the effect of increasing the time efficiency of the game can be obtained. When considering the clarity of the instruction effect and the time efficiency of the game, it is preferable not to perform the control for delaying the reception timing of the reel stop operation (so-called freeze control) in the double navigation effect.

The following examples can be given as a derivative form of the double navigation effect according to the present embodiment.

(1)
In FIG. 117 (B), the "cherry symbol" is temporarily displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 5221 in addition to the "BAR symbol" which is the final instruction mode, but the instruction mode other than the final instruction mode is recalled throughout the series of effects. It may not be displayed at all. Specifically, for example, the sub liquid crystal displays 5221 and 5231 do not display the symbol at the timing of FIG. 117 (B), and after displaying only "Aim!" On the main liquid crystal display 5211, "Aim!" Is displayed at the timing of FIG. 117 (C). The "BAR pattern" may be clearly indicated. In this case, the player can operate the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c immediately after operating the start lever 210, only receiving a notification to aim at something, and then without being taught any candidate for the instruction mode. The final instruction mode can be recognized at the stage before becoming. That is, since the player sees only one instruction mode which is the final instruction mode, the possibility of performing a game operation based on the other instruction mode can be suppressed to an extremely low level.

(2)
In addition, the mode of the effect that appears between the time when the start lever 210 is turned on and the time when the final instruction mode is displayed is "Which one !?" (FIG. 117 (B)) or "Aim! It does not have to be accompanied by specific meaning and content as in the example in the previous paragraph, but at least it is a special production with a peculiarity that allows the player to recognize that it is different from the normal game (the example in the previous paragraph). For example, ringing of a special notification sound, display of a special background color on the main liquid crystal display 5211, special light emission by a decorative LED, etc.) are required to be executed. By executing such a special effect, it can be expected to have an effect of making the player recognize some peculiarity and not to overlook the subsequent final instruction mode.

(3)
Further, in FIG. 117, the double navigation effect is realized by using not only the main liquid crystal display 5211 but also the moving image body 522, 523, but the image display body (for example, the main liquid crystal display 5211) is displayed without using such a movable accessory. You may execute the double navigation effect only by itself. Specifically, if the main liquid crystal 5211 and the sub liquid crystals 5221 and 5231 of FIGS. 117 (B) to 117 (D) are all displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211, a double navigation effect can be realized by one image display body. With such a configuration, the double navigation effect can be executed even in the slot machine 1 that does not have the moving image bodies 522 and 523. Further, when a movable accessory is used, the number thereof is not particularly limited. By linking more movable accessories, it can be expected to enhance the effect.

(4)
Further, in the double navigation effect, different expectations may be suggested and advantageous benefits may be given depending on which instruction mode is the final instruction mode. Specifically, in FIG. 117, it is assumed that the double navigation effect is executed based on the winning of the BAR role, but if the double navigation effect is executed for the winning of the cherry role, FIG. 117 (C) shows. The final instruction mode to be taught is "to aim at the cherry pattern". At this time, when the symbol combination of the cherry role is stopped, a certain advantage (such as easy transition to an advantageous gaming state) is obtained by winning the rare role, but the advantage given with the winning of the BAR role. The degree of advantage is lower than the benefits (for example, bonus games and pseudo-bonus games in the above example). Therefore, the double navigation effect illustrated in FIG. 117 has a feature that different expectations are shown for the advantageous privilege depending on which instruction mode is notified as the final instruction mode. Then, by making a difference in the degree of expectation and the privilege given in this way, the player's interest in the instruction mode by the double navigation effect is raised, and the effect of making the effect more enjoyable is achieved.

As illustrated in FIG. 117, the double navigation effect according to the present embodiment is an instruction effect that suggests a symbol combination that can be stopped in the game by the final instruction mode, and the degree of the grant privilege is determined in the push sequence. This is a different type of effect from the instruction display (for example, the push order display during AT or ART) by the "instruction function" that instructs an appropriate push order when the push order combination that can change is won. Then, when the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine 1) executes the double navigation effect in a game in which the instruction display by the "instruction function" is performed, the instruction by the "instruction function" is instructed throughout the double navigation effect. It is preferable not to block the display. More specifically, for example, in FIG. 117 (B), the display area of the main liquid crystal display 5211 that is shielded by moving the moving image body 522, 523 to the operating position, and the push order display by the "instruction function" are performed. Make sure that it does not cover the display area. By doing so, the effect of the double navigation effect (what kind of instruction mode is displayed) is not impaired to the profit obtained by performing an appropriate push order when the push order combination is established. Can be entertained.

Further, in the double navigation effect according to the present embodiment, the BAR symbol does not stop or the figure does not stop even though the instruction content "Aim for BAR!" Is finally displayed as shown in FIG. 117 (C). The BAR symbol combination shown in 117 (E) may not be stopped (the formation of the tempai state by the BAR symbol may be performed). In this case, the so-called "off-the-shelf effect" double-navigation effect is not given to the player, but by including the "out-of-order effect" in the double-navigation effect, the occurrence rate of the double-navigation effect itself can be increased. Since it is possible, it is possible to increase the chances for the player to enjoy the double navigation production.

[19. Information addition effect]
This chapter describes an example of a characteristic effect that can be executed in the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The series of effects described in this chapter is tentatively referred to as "information addition effects".

In the present embodiment, the information addition effect means a predetermined series of image effects in which "display of a special mode for adding a predetermined information (special mode display)" is performed during the execution, and the control of the effect control board 510 is performed. For example, it is executed in the image display body (main liquid crystal 5211 or sub liquid crystal 5221, 5231) of the slot machine 1A based on the above. The information addition effect is an effect that can be executed by the image display body 500 of the slot machine 1.

The "special mode (or special mode display)" for adding predetermined information in the information addition effect will be described in detail. The following two types can be roughly classified as to what kind of predetermined information is added to the "special mode".

First, as the first type, there is a special mode in which a detailed explanation regarding the progress of the information addition effect is given. This is to additionally teach a detailed explanation about the development of the information addition effect in which the special mode display is performed. Specifically, for example, "It's hot enough to be a continuous production", "If you win a rare game, the gauge of the meter in the production screen will be accumulated", "If the gauge of the meter is accumulated, it will be hot", "One-shot lottery will be held in the final game" It is realized by displaying an explanation such as "was". In addition, the above-mentioned "hot" means a state in which the degree of expectation for granting benefits and the like is high, and in this chapter, the notation of "hot" may be used in this sense.

Next, as the second type, there is a special mode in which a detailed explanation of the privilege obtained by the information addition effect is given. This is to additionally teach a detailed explanation about the grant privilege that can be taught or suggested by the information addition effect in which the special aspect display is performed. Specifically, for example, "there is a possibility of developing into a predetermined advantageous game state (chance zone, high probability state, etc.)", "if the production is successful, the bonus winning is confirmed", "the production is successful". If the result is obtained, the number of AT (or ART) games will be added. "

The production transition of the information addition effect will be described with a specific example. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a screen display example of the information addition effect. FIGS. 118 (A) to 118 (I) show screen transition examples of one effect displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211, of which FIGS. 118 (B) and 118 (C) correspond to special mode displays. .. More specifically, the information displayed in "1" in FIG. 118 (B) corresponds to the special mode display in which the second type of information is added, and "2" in FIG. 118 (B) and FIG. 118. The information displayed in "3" and "4" of (C) corresponds to the special mode display for adding the first type of information.

Here, the information addition effect according to the present embodiment additionally presents the information by the special mode display, but it is possible to realize a certain effect even if the special mode display is not performed. In other words, even if a special aspect does not appear in the information addition effect, it can be established as a series of effects. In FIG. 118, such a series of effects corresponds to FIGS. 118 (A), (D) to (I), and in the following, first, screen transitions are briefly described for each of these figures to obtain a certain effect. Show that it will be realized.

In FIG. 118 (A), the information addition effect is started, the outline (Challenge without turnip) in the effect is shown, and the character standing beside the turnip is shown. Next, in FIG. 118 (D), a screen in which the turnip removal by the character is started is shown. After that, in FIG. 118 (E), the state of removing the turnip by the characters increased to three is shown, and the next screen display becomes FIG. 118 (F) or FIG. 118 (H) depending on the success or failure.

FIG. 118 (F) is an example of a screen display when the turnip is successfully removed, and the character “this” suggesting the granting of the privilege is displayed on the removed turnip. In FIG. 118 (G) thereafter, it is confirmed and displayed that the turnip removal was a successful result. At this time, it may be taught what kind of privilege is given, such as "bonus winning", or further, an additional effect that emphasizes success may be performed by a sound, a lamp, or the like.

FIG. 118 (H) is an example of a screen display when the turnip removal fails, and shows how the hands of the three characters have separated from the turnip. Then, in FIG. 118 (I), it is confirmed and displayed that the turnip removal was a failure result. At this time, an effect of dimming the overall brightness of the main liquid crystal display 5211 or an additional effect of emphasizing the failure by a sound, a lamp, or the like may be performed.

As described above, looking at the effect transitions of FIGS. 118 (A) and 118 (D) to (I), the information addition effect illustrated in FIG. 118 is performed even if the special mode display is not performed (FIGS. 118 (B) and (C). Even if there is no)), it is possible to realize a series of production effects in which the presence or absence of privilege grant is taught depending on the success or failure of the turnip removal.

Next, it is confirmed what kind of information is additionally presented by the special mode display according to FIGS. 118 (B) and 118 (C).

In FIG. 118 (B), by displaying "Is it a big hit if the turnip comes off?" In "1", a big hit (for example, a bonus win) is made according to the success result in the "Turnip removal challenge" shown in FIG. 118 (A). It is suggested that the privilege of the above is fixed, and it can be seen that it is a special mode display (second type of special mode display) that gives a detailed explanation of the privilege obtained by the information addition effect. Further, in FIG. 118 (B), by displaying "Power up by replay" in "2", the POWER gauge displayed at the lower right of the screen in FIG. 118 (A) is triggered by the winning of the replay role. It is taught to increase. It is easy to remind the player that increasing the POWER gauge will make it easier for the turnip to come off, suggesting that winning the replay role will contribute to the success of the turnip removal challenge and can be expected to have favorable results. It can be seen that this is a special mode display (first type of special mode display) for explaining in detail the progress of the information addition effect.

Further, in FIG. 118 (C), “3” is displayed as “rare and helper appears?”, And “4” is displayed as “power, chance if there are many people!” In FIG. 118 (B). Similar to "2" in No. 2, it contributes to the success of the turnip removal challenge in each situation and suggests that favorable results can be expected. Therefore, it can be seen that these are special mode displays (first type of special mode display) that give a detailed explanation regarding the progress of the information addition effect.

As described above, the information addition effect exemplified in FIG. 118 "adds predetermined information" during its execution by the appearance of the special mode as shown in FIGS. 118 (B) and 118 (C). "Display of special mode (display of special mode)" is performed, and the player who has obtained additional information by the display of special mode can enjoy the information addition effect more deeply.

The information addition effect according to the present embodiment is not limited to the example described with reference to FIG. 118, and may include, for example, the following derivative patterns.

(1)
For example, in the case of FIGS. 118 (B) and 118 (C), the special mode display is shown so as to be displayed without requiring a special operation in the process of transition of the effect screen of the information addition effect, but the information is added. During the execution of the effect (may be at the start or immediately after the end), a predetermined timing at which the special mode display can appear is provided, and a specific operation (specifically, for example, the effect button 206A) is provided at the predetermined timing. When the pressing operation) is performed, the special mode display may be performed without fail or with a certain probability.

Here, since the additional information presented by the special mode display does not affect the direct benefit such as whether or not the privilege can be granted in the game, the player who does not need the special mode display is specified. You will not suffer any disadvantages even if you do not perform the operation of. However, in other words, only the player who bothered to perform a specific operation such as pressing the effect button 206A can obtain additional information by displaying the special mode. That is, the player can select whether or not to perform the above-mentioned specific operation to display the special mode by his / her own will, and can add diversity to the way of enjoying the information addition effect.

When a specific operation is required for displaying the special mode in this way, an auxiliary effect (speaker) such as notifying the player of the specific operation and its execution timing by displaying the main liquid crystal 5211 or the like. It is conceivable to execute (including voice notification by voice). By executing such an auxiliary effect, the player is surprised, the player does not miss the opportunity to display the special mode, and the special mode display gives an explanation of the game effect, etc., to provide additional information. You can expect a clearer and more entertaining effect.

On the other hand, even when a specific operation is required for displaying the special mode as described above, the auxiliary effect may not be directly executed. Specifically, it corresponds to teaching the specific operation and its execution timing on the demo screen of the slot machine 1A, or describing it in a booklet of a catalog. Further, although no special operation request is made, the auxiliary effect may be executed when a specific operation such as pressing the effect button 206A is performed. When the auxiliary effect is not directly executed in this way, the special mode display is a privilege like a so-called trick that can be obtained only by the player who has collected a lot of information about the slot machine 1A or the player who has played a lot. Therefore, it can be expected to have an effect of giving the player a sense of superiority and further deepening the interest in the slot machine 1A.

(2)
Further, for example, in the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment, the information addition effect including the special mode display may be made to occur only in a specific effect. If the special mode display can occur when all the effects are executed, the frequency of the special mode display will be too high to give a special impression, and the player may have a complicated impression. Because. Similarly, the special mode display may be made to occur only in a specific gaming state.

(3)
In the slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) capable of executing the information addition effect, a plurality of types of display contents of the special mode display are prepared in advance (display of the special mode display in ROM 1120 of the effect control board 510 in advance. Image data corresponding to the content is stored), and the method of determining which display content is to be displayed from these plurality of types of special mode display by the effect control board 510 (mainly CPU 1118) is not particularly limited. For example, it is determined that a predetermined effect in which the special aspect display can be performed includes any special aspect display before the execution of the predetermined effect (that is, a fixed effect mode including the special aspect display). A series of effects by is prepared from the beginning, and a predetermined effect to be executed is selected from the series of the plurality of types of effects), or when the execution of the predetermined effect is decided. The special mode display to be executed in the predetermined effect is determined (that is, when one or a plurality of special mode displays that can be added to the predetermined effect are prepared, among those special mode displays. The special mode display to be executed may be selected), or the execution of the special mode display may be determined at random or by lottery or the like during the execution of the predetermined effect.

(4)
Further, in the above explanation, the information added by the special mode display in the information addition effect is roughly classified, and the detailed explanation about the progress of the information addition effect and the detailed explanation of the privilege obtained by the information addition effect are roughly classified. As mentioned above, the information that can be additionally presented by the special mode display in the information addition effect according to the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, the current or subsequent (after the information addition effect) gaming state (high). Probability state, low probability state, etc.) may be taught or suggested, slot machine 1A settings (settings 1 to 6, high setting, low setting, etc.) may be suggested.

(5)
In addition, the display content of the special mode display in the information addition effect is the effect at each opportunity when the special mode display can be displayed (specifically, each time the information addition effect is executed or at the timing when the special mode display can be displayed). It is not always necessary to select different display contents each time the button 206A is pressed). For example, if a special mode display of different display contents is performed for each pressing operation of the effect button 206A, the player can enjoy various kinds of display contents as more times the effect button 206A is pressed. However, on the other hand, since the information presented by the special mode display is easily known to the player, it may not contribute to the continuity of the game. That is, by setting a predetermined degree of restriction on the change in the display content of the special mode display, it is easy for the player who wants to know the various display contents of the special mode display to maintain the feeling of continuing the game. The effect is obtained.

However, even when restrictions are set on changes in the display content of the special mode display as described above, at least the game state (for example, high probability state / low probability state or normal game state / advantageous game state (bonus game or AT). -It is preferable to control so that the display content is reset (so that a special mode display of different display content can be selected) according to the transition of the ART game)). By performing such control, it is possible to avoid the situation where the special mode display of the same content continues to be displayed endlessly, and to execute the special mode display of different content at an appropriate frequency, so that the player does not get bored. You can expect the effect to entertain.

(6)
Further, when the special mode display is performed by the information addition effect according to the present embodiment, the progress of the game may be stopped (so-called freeze control) for a predetermined period. When the information addition effect is executed and the special mode display is displayed, a more detailed explanation is displayed, so that the player who is playing for the first time needs time to read the displayed explanation. Therefore, in order to secure time for reading the explanation by the special mode display, it is possible to provide a player-friendly gaming machine by applying a freeze control for a predetermined time to stop the progress of the game. .. However, if the freeze time is set too long, the progress of the game is also stopped for a long time, which causes a problem that sales are suppressed and is not preferable for the hall side. Therefore, freeze control for an excessively long time is performed. It is preferable not to set it to.

Specifically, for example, when slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) decides that the "strongest" with a very low winning probability is selected as the winning combination and is given the "AT + special zone". When the specification is that the freeze control is executed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) for a certain long time (the freeze execution timing is, for example, when the start lever 210 is pressed), it accompanies the special mode display in the information addition effect. The freeze time shall be shorter than the freeze time associated with the above-mentioned "strongest" winning. Further, even when a plurality of types (time) are provided for the freeze performed when the start lever 210 is pressed (for example, 2 minutes and 30 seconds), the freeze time associated with the special mode display is the maximum value of the time (this example). It is preferable that the time is shorter than 2 minutes), but the minimum value of the time may be long or short. If the freeze time associated with the special mode display is longer than the minimum value of the time, a specification that freezes for a short time frequently when the start lever 210 is pressed (in that case, the degree of expectation of the freeze itself (bonus or bonus) (Expectation of granting advantageous benefits such as AT) is set low), and conversely, if the freeze time associated with the special mode display is shorter than the minimum value of the time, it will take a long time when the lever is pressed. Since it is possible that the freeze is performed infrequently (in that case, the expectation of the freeze itself (the expectation of granting advantageous benefits such as bonuses and ATs) is set higher), it is performed when the start lever 210 is pressed. The comparison with the minimum freeze time may be appropriately determined according to the specifications.

Further, when the slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) is provided with the freeze control as described above, the special mode display is a "long-time freeze (for example, 2 minutes)" such as the freeze control at the time of winning the "strongest". Freeze control) ”is not shown at all during execution.

By being able to execute the above-mentioned information addition effect, the slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) of the present embodiment is a player who finds that recent game machines are too complicated to understand due to the diversification of game effects. As a gaming machine that responds to the increasing number of issues, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress complication as much as possible.

[20. Performance change instruction production]
This chapter describes an example of a characteristic effect that can be executed in the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The series of effects described in this chapter are tentatively referred to as "performance change instruction effects".

The performance change instruction effect is a special aspect in a series of effects including an "instruction effect" for instructing a player to perform a reel stop operation according to a predetermined operation mode, and is an instruction effect that can appear in the same game. It has a first instruction effect for instructing the reel stop operation to be performed in the first operation mode, and a second instruction effect for instructing the reel stop operation to be performed in the second operation mode. Expectations that advantageous benefits (for example, adding the number of AT and ART games) can be given depending on whether the reel stop operation is performed according to the instruction effect of the above and the reel stop operation is performed according to the second instruction effect. It is characterized by different degrees.

Therefore, it is a necessary condition that the above-mentioned "advantageous privilege" may be given to the game in which the performance change instruction effect is executed. For example, if the "advantageous privilege" is to add the number of AT games, the effect control board 510 executes the performance change instruction effect when the main board 409 determines that the number of AT games may be added. be able to. After that, on the premise that such a necessary condition is satisfied, the explanation of the performance change instruction effect will be continued.

[20-1. Outline of performance change instruction production]
In the following, a specific example will be shown to explain the outline of the performance change instruction effect. This example is an example of a performance change instruction effect executed during AT (may be ART) in the slot machine 1A according to the present embodiment, and is omitted as an “advantageous privilege” of AT (may be ART hereafter). .) It is assumed that an additional number of games can be granted.

When the performance change instruction effect is executed by the slot machine 1A, the above-mentioned first and second instruction effects are displayed on at least a predetermined image display body (for example, a main liquid crystal display 5211 or a sub liquid crystal display 5221, 5231). Further, the operation mode instructed by the instruction effect may be notified by the light emission display of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c or the voice output from the speaker 512, and further, information that can identify the reel stop order is displayed. It may be displayed on an instruction function monitor (not shown) or the like.

Further, in this example, in order to make it easier to explain the characteristics of the performance change instruction effect, the symbol sequence of the reel band in the slot machine 1A is changed to the symbol sequence shown in FIG. 119.

FIG. 119 is a developed view in which another example of the symbol string of the reel band is developed in a plane. The symbol sequence represented by the reel bands 321d to 321f (reels 301d to 301f) shown in FIG. 119 is based on the symbol sequence represented by the reel bands 321a to 321c (reels 301a to 301c) illustrated in FIG. 46. It is a partial change. For example, in FIG. 46, there are two types of "7 symbols", "red 7 symbols" and "blue 7 symbols", but in FIG. 119, one type of "7 symbols" is used. In addition, as a new symbol that was not shown in FIG. 46, a "V symbol" is added to FIG. 119, and the symbol of the "BAR symbol" is also changed. In addition, the arrangement of some symbols has been changed as a whole.

As one of the features of the symbol strings of the reel bands 321d to 321f exemplified in FIG. 119, both "7 symbols" and "V symbols" are used when the pullable range of each reel is set to 4 symbols or less. It is mentioned that the arrangement that can pull in is not made. That is, in the slot machine 1A in which the reel bands 321d to 321f exemplified in FIG. 119 are used, both of the "7 symbols" alignment or the "V symbol" alignment is to be stopped on the effective line as described later. Since there is no reel stop position where the symbol of can be pulled in, it is necessary to select one of the reel stop operations. However, such an arrangement of symbols is merely an example for briefly explaining the relationship between the performance change instruction effect according to the present embodiment and the privilege that can be given as a result, and in an actual gaming machine, for example. A reel stop position capable of partially pulling in both the "7 symbols" and the "V symbol" may be provided. In such a case, a player who can accurately perform the reel stop operation at the timing of the reel stop position where both symbols can be pulled in can more advantageously acquire the advantageous privilege by the performance change instruction effect, so-called technology. It can be an intervention element.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. The symbol combination of each condition device shown in FIG. 120 is composed of the symbols of the symbol sequence illustrated in FIG. 119. The condition device shown in FIG. 120 is a part of a virtual condition device prepared to briefly show the characteristics in a specific example of the performance change instruction effect by the slot machine 1A according to the present embodiment. In the supplementary column of FIG. 120, the name "additional stitch" is described for the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device of "re-game 11" and "re-game 13", and "re-game 12" and "re-game 14" are described. The name "non-additional stitch" is described for the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device. The details will be described later, but in the performance change instruction effect of this example, when the "additional stitch" is displayed due to the stop of the reel, the number of AT games is always added. On the other hand, when the "non-addition" is displayed, it is divided into the case where the number of AT games is added and the case where the number of AT games is not added based on other conditions.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a conditional device that is established corresponding to a predetermined winning combination. The condition device shown in FIG. 121 corresponds to the condition device illustrated in FIG. 120. In addition, in the winning combination of "7 symbols", when the reels 301d to 301f are stopped at the "appropriate timing" at which "7 symbols" can be drawn in, the combination of symbols with "7 symbols" is displayed in the symbol display window ( In this example, it is a winning combination that is allowed to be displayed on the valid line). Similarly, in the winning combination of "V alignment", when the reels 301d to 301f are stopped at "appropriate timing", the symbol combination of "V symbol" alignment is displayed on the symbol display window 401 (especially on the effective line in this example). The winning combination is allowed to be displayed in).

According to FIG. 121, when the “7-matched” combination is selected as the winning combination, the re-game 11 (conditional device number 101), the re-game 12 (conditional device numbers 102 to 108), and the re-game shown in FIG. Game 14 (condition device numbers 110 to 116) is established. Of these, the symbol combination (additional stitch) corresponding to the replaying combination 11 corresponds to the symbol combination of the above-mentioned "7 symbols". The symbol combination (non-additional stitch) corresponding to the condition device other than the re-game 11 is a symbol combination in which the reels 301d to 301f are stopped at a timing different from the above "appropriate timing", that is, the "7 symbols" are aligned. This is a symbol combination that can be displayed on the symbol display window 401 (effective line in this example) when a stop operation is included at a timing when the reel cannot be retracted. Note that FIG. 121 also shows a symbol combination that is established when the "V-matched" combination is selected as the winning combination, but the details can be explained in the same manner as in the case of the "7-matched" combination. , The explanation is omitted.

From the above, when the winning combination lottery performed by the main board 409 wins the "7 matching" combination or the "V matching" combination, "re-game 11" or "re-game 13" is included in the established condition device. ] Is included, so there is a possibility that the number of AT games will be added. That is, the "necessary condition" for executing the performance change instruction effect is satisfied. Therefore, in this example, it is assumed that the performance change instruction effect is executed in the game in which the "7-matched" or "V-matched" combination is selected as the winning combination in the winning combination lottery.

Further, as described above, the performance change instruction effect according to the present embodiment is the first instruction effect for instructing the reel stop operation according to the first operation mode and the reel according to the second operation mode in the same game. It is possible to display the second instruction effect for instructing the stop operation on the image display body (main liquid crystal display 5211 or sub liquid crystal display 5221, 5231), but the first instruction effect and the second instruction effect on the image display body. The display of the instruction effect of is controlled by the effect control board 510.

Then, in this example, the effect control board 510 controls the display timing of each instruction effect as follows. First, the first instruction effect is displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the game (for example, after the start lever 210 is operated and the winning combination lottery is performed) (first stage display). The first stage display is the time when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are stopped or the stop operation is not performed (the elapsed time after the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are activated may be used). Is continued until a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) is exceeded (that is, this is the "first phase"). Then, when the time during which the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not stopped after the first stage display is performed exceeds the predetermined time (90 seconds), the second instruction effect is displayed. (Display of the second period). The period during which the second period is displayed is called the second period. As for the mode of transition from the first period display (first instruction effect) to the second period display (second instruction effect), a specific example of the effect display is given. It will be described later (see, for example, FIGS. 122 to 124 described later).

Then, the main board 409 selects a distribution table in which the expected degree of adding the number of AT games differs depending on whether the reel stop operation is performed at the timing of the first stage display or the second stage display, and the reel stop is performed. Based on the symbol combination displayed along with the operation, whether or not the number of AT games is added and the number of additions are determined (see, for example, FIG. 125 described later).

By providing the above configuration, in the slot machine 1A, when the "7-matched" or "V-matched" combination is selected as the winning combination in the winning combination lottery and the performance change instruction effect is executed, the AT The main board 409 determines whether or not to positively give the privilege of adding the number of games (additional winning or non-additional winning), and the effect control board 510 can be made to perform an instruction effect based on the determination. Specifically, for example, if it is decided to positively add the number of AT games (additional winning) when winning the "7-match" role, "7 symbols" will be displayed in the instruction effect of the first period. By performing an instruction effect aiming at "", it is possible to assist in stopping the alignment of "7 symbols", which is an additional stitch. On the other hand, if it is decided not to positively add the number of AT games (additional non-winning) when winning the "7-match" role, aim for the "V symbol" in the instruction effect of the first stage display. By performing the instruction effect, it is possible to suppress the stoppage of the additional "7 symbols" alignment.

[20-2. Performance display of performance change instruction effect]
Hereinafter, a specific effect display of the performance change instruction effect that can be executed by the slot machine 1A will be described.

122 to 124 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining the effect display of the performance change instruction effect. FIGS. 122 to 124 show an example of various effect patterns for the effect display by the performance change instruction effect, and all of them show the state of the slot machine 1A in the first period in FIG. B) The figure shows the state of the slot machine 1A in the second period.

The effect pattern exemplified in FIG. 122 is a movable body (specifically) a part of the first instruction effect when shifting from the first period display of FIG. 122 (A) to the second period display of FIG. 122 (B). It is characterized in that it is shielded by a moving display body 522) to provide a second instruction effect.

Further, the effect pattern exemplified in FIG. 123 is a movable body (the entire first instruction effect is a movable body when shifting from the first period display of FIG. 123 (A) to the second period display of FIG. 123 (B). Specifically, it is characterized in that it is shielded by a moving display body 522,523).

Further, the effect pattern exemplified in FIG. 124 is a movable body (moving display body 522, 523) when shifting from the first stage display of FIG. 124 (A) to the second stage display of FIG. 124 (B). It is characterized in that the first instruction effect is shielded and the second instruction effect is performed without using it. In the case of the effect pattern as illustrated in FIG. 124, since the moving display body 522, 523 is not required (the effect can be produced only by the fixed display body 521), the slot machine 1 provided with the image display body 500 has the same performance. It is possible to execute a change instruction effect.

The contents of the effect will be described in detail with respect to each of FIGS. 122 to 124.

First, regarding FIG. 122, in FIG. 122 (A), "Aim at 7!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 as the first stage display. By performing such a first stage display (first instruction effect), the player is instructed to stop the reels aiming at "7 symbols" on each reel. If the reel stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is not performed, the first stage display is continuously displayed for the following 90 seconds, so that the player gives the first instruction during this period. It is possible to select whether or not to perform the reel stop operation in the stop mode according to the effect.

Then, when the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 122 (A), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the first stage. The details of the privilege (the number of additional games of AT) obtained by stopping the reel in the first period will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

When 90 seconds have elapsed without performing the reel stop operation from FIG. 122 (A), the second phase display as shown in FIG. 122 (B) is performed. In FIG. 122 (B), the movement display body 522 that was in the standby position moves to the operating position without displaying a specific notation or the like on the sub liquid crystal display 5221, so that the notation of “7” in the first stage display is displayed. Is shielding. As a result, in FIG. 122 (B), as the second stage display, the notation "Aim!" Is shown when the display range of the main liquid crystal 5211 is viewed from the front. By performing such a second stage display (second instruction effect), the player is instructed to perform a reel stop operation aiming at some symbol. Further, when the notation of "7" is blocked by the movement of the moving display body 522, the image of "7" displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 may be deleted or replaced with another image.

Then, when the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 122 (B), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the second period. The details of the privilege (additional number of AT games) obtained by stopping the reel in the second period will be described later with reference to FIG. 125.

Next, FIG. 123 will be described. Since the first stage display exemplified in FIG. 123 (A) is the same as the first stage display illustrated in FIG. 122 (A), the description thereof will be omitted. If the reel stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is not performed, the first stage display is continuously displayed for the following 90 seconds, so that the player gives the first instruction during this period. It is possible to select whether or not to perform the reel stop operation in the stop mode according to the effect. When the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 123 (A), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the first stage.

When 90 seconds have elapsed without performing the reel stop operation from FIG. 123 (A), the second phase display as shown in FIG. 123 (B) is performed. In FIG. 123 (B), the two moving display bodies 522 and 523 both move from the standby position to the operating position, and the characters "aim" and "e!" Are displayed on the respective sub liquid crystal displays 5221 and 5231. By such an operation of the moving display body 522, 523, all the notations of "Aim for 7!" Displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 in the first stage display are shielded, and the main liquid crystal display is used as the second stage display. When the display range of 5211 is viewed from the front, the notation "Aim!" Is shown. By performing such a second stage display (second instruction effect), the player is instructed to perform a reel stop operation aiming at some symbol. When the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 123 (B), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the second period. Also in this case, when the notation of "Aim for 7!" Is blocked by moving the moving display body 522, 523, the image of "Aim for 7!" Displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 is deleted or replaced with another image. You may do so.

Next, FIG. 124 will be described. As described above, in the effect display illustrated in FIG. 124, the sub liquid crystals 5221 and 5231 do not affect the effect, and all the effect displays are performed on the main liquid crystal 5211 of the fixed display body 521.

In FIG. 124 (A), "Aim for 7!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 as the first stage display. By performing such a first stage display (first instruction effect), the player is instructed to stop the reels aiming at "7 symbols" on each reel. If the reel stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is not performed, the first stage display is continuously displayed for the following 90 seconds, so that the player gives the first instruction during this period. It is possible to select whether or not to perform the reel stop operation in the stop mode according to the effect. When the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 124 (A), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the first stage.

When 90 seconds have elapsed without performing the reel stop operation from FIG. 124 (A), the second phase display as shown in FIG. 124 (B) is performed. FIG. 124 (B) shows that the character displayed from the first stage display holds the card on which the character "?" Is written in the character portion of "7" in the first stage display. As a result, as the second stage display, the notation "Aim!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5211. By performing such a second stage display (second instruction effect), the player is instructed to perform a reel stop operation aiming at some symbol. When the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 124 (B), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the second period.

With reference to FIGS. 122 to 124, an effect display example of the first stage display or the second stage display by the performance change instruction effect has been described. In the first stage display, the operation mode accompanied by the designation of the symbol is displayed, and in the second stage display, the operation mode in which the symbol is not specified and the player does not know which symbol should be aimed at is displayed.

Next, a symbol combination that can be stopped when the reels 301d to 301f are stopped in the first period display or the second period display, and the privilege (the number of additional games of AT) obtained as a result will be described.

As described above, when the performance change instruction effect of this example is executed, the "7-matched" or "V-matched" combination is selected as the winning combination in the winning combination lottery. Then, in a normal game other than a game by freeze control, a symbol combination that can stop on the effective line of the symbol display window 401 when the reel is stopped is established corresponding to the winning combination selected in the winning combination lottery. It is a symbol combination of the condition device to be performed. This principle does not change whether the first reel stop or the second reel stop is performed.

Therefore, to be more specific with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121, in the case of a game in which only the winning combination of the "7 matching" combination is won in the winning combination lottery, the reel stop operation is performed at the timing when the "7 symbols" can be pulled in. When is performed, the "additional stitch" (the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 11) is stopped by aligning "7 symbols" on the effective line, and when the reel stop operation is performed at other timings, "7 symbols" are displayed on the effective line. The "non-additional stitch" (the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 12 or the re-game 14) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the case of a game in which only the winning combination of the "V-matched" role is won in the winning combination lottery, even if the player performs the reel stop operation at the timing when the "7 symbols" can be pulled in, the "7 symbols" are on the effective line. The "additional stitch" (the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 11) due to the matching is not stopped, and the "non-additional stitch" (the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 12 or the re-game 14) is stopped. However, if the player dares to perform the reel stop operation at the timing when the "V symbol" can be pulled in, the "additional stitch" by aligning the "V symbols" on the effective line (symbol combination corresponding to the re-game 12). Can be stopped.

FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display period of the instruction effect and the addition. In the performance change instruction effect, the degree of expectation that advantageous benefits can be given differs depending on the reel stop time (first period or second period). Therefore, in the table illustrated in FIG. 125, the instruction when the reel stop is performed is performed. Distributions with different numbers of AT additional games are selected depending on the period. The number of additional games illustrated in FIG. 125 may be an average value, and the actual number of additional games may have a predetermined range. The same applies to FIG. 128, which will be described later.

According to FIG. 125, when an additional item (a combination of "7 symbols" or "V symbols") is displayed for the reel stop in the first period, the number of games of 30 games on average is determined to be added. To. In addition, when the non-additional item is displayed, the number of games is not added.

The granting of benefits in the first period is based on the following ideas. First, in the first stage display, it is instructed that a specific symbol should be aimed (for example, "Aim at 7"), and the player can select whether or not to perform the reel stop operation according to the instruction. .. Then, at the time of "addition winning", when the reel stop operation is performed according to the instruction and the addition ("7 symbols" are aligned) is displayed, the number of games should be added as a matter of course. On the other hand, if the reel stop operation that does not follow the instruction is performed (that is, if the "7 symbols" are not aimed or if the aim is unsuccessful), the additional stitch ("7 symbols" aligned) is not obtained. Therefore, there is no need to add more games. In addition, at the time of "additional non-winning", it is assumed that the winning combination is instructed to "aim for 7" in the first stage display even though the winning combination is a "V-matched" role (the first in the case of "additional non-winning"). Equivalent to one-term display). In such a case, even if the reel stop operation is performed according to the instruction of the first period, it will not be an additional stitch ("7 symbols" are aligned), but this is an expected result in the development of the production, so the number of games It is not necessary to add an extra.

As explained earlier, in the performance change instruction production, after deciding whether or not to positively give the privilege of adding the number of AT games (additional winning / additional non-winning), the first decision is made based on the decision. It is possible to determine the content of the instruction for the one-term display. That is, the first stage display is shown in another operation mode (instruction mode for aiming at 7 symbols or instruction mode for aiming at V symbol) depending on whether it is "additional winning" or "additional non-winning". Then, when the player is aware of such specifications, when the performance change instruction effect is executed, it is predicted whether the effect is the effect at the time of additional winning or the effect at the time of non-winning. Thereby, it is possible to select whether or not to perform the stop operation according to the instruction content of the first period instruction. For example, if it is expected that the effect will be an additional non-winning effect, the reel stop operation will be performed in an operation mode different from the instruction content of the first stage display (for example, V is aimed at 7 symbols). By aiming at the design), if the prediction is correct, you can get the privilege of adding the number of games.

Next, regarding the reel stop in the second period, according to FIG. 125, when the addition is displayed, the addition of the number of games of 60 games on average is determined. This number of additions is larger than the average of 30 games when the additions are displayed in the first period. Further, in the reel stop of the second period, even if the additional stitch is not displayed (the non-additional stitch is displayed), the number of additional games of 30 games is determined on average.

The granting of benefits in the second period is based on the following ideas. The operation mode instructed in the second stage display is a wider operation mode in which at least a part of the operation mode instructed in the first stage display is difficult to identify from the player. For example, in the case of FIG. 122 (B), "Aim!" Instructed in the second period display is a part of "Aim for 7!" Instructed in the first period display, and is a specific symbol. It only shows the operation mode of "aiming" something without showing. In other words, as a player, although the operation mode aiming at one specific symbol is shown in the first stage display before the transition to the second stage display, the second instruction effect is performed after the transition to the second stage display. If you try to stop the reel according to the above, you may not know what to aim for. As a result, for example, it is considered unavoidable to select a striking method that neither "7 symbols" nor "V symbols" are aimed at. Therefore, in the second reel stop, even if the additional stitch is not displayed (the non-additional stitch is displayed), a predetermined number of additional games is added. In addition, if the additional stitches (for example, "7 symbols" are aligned) can be stopped even under such ambiguous instructions, a higher degree of privilege is given than when the additional stitches are stopped in the first period. It is appropriate to give it.

As described above, in the performance change instruction effect of this example, which of the first period and the second period the instruction period is used to perform the reel stop operation, in other words, the first instruction effect. The player is given the right to choose which of the second instruction effects to select. Then, in the performance change instruction effect of this example, it is recommended which selection should be made according to the game situation of the player. That is, when comparing the reel stop according to the first instruction effect and the reel stop according to the second instruction effect in view of their respective characteristics, the former is recommended when time efficiency is to be emphasized, and the latter is given. Recommended when you want to emphasize the amount of benefits.

Such a feature by the performance change instruction effect of this example will be described in detail.

First, regarding the amount of privilege to be given (the size of the number of additional games of AT), the reel stop according to the first instruction effect (the reel stop of the first period) and the reel stop according to the second instruction effect (the first). Compare with the reel stop for one period).

In the case of using FIG. 125, the number of additional games that can be acquired by the player with the condition that the player evenly aims at either the "7 symbols" or the "V symbols" without failing to press the button. Approximate the expected value.

At this time, the expected value of the number of additional games when the reel is stopped in the first period is 15 games (calculation formula: 30 × 1/2). Further, the expected value of the number of additional games when the reel is stopped in the second period is 45 games (calculation formula: 60 × 1/2 + 30 × 1/2). That is, it can be expected that the number of additional games obtained by selecting the reel stop according to the second instruction effect is 30 more games than the case where the reel stop according to the first instruction effect is selected.

Next, regarding the timing at which the reel stop operation can be executed, the reel stop according to the first instruction effect (reel stop in the first period) and the reel stop according to the second instruction effect (reel stop in the first period). And compare.

The first stage display can be displayed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated and the winning combination lottery is performed. That is, after the rotations of the reels 301d to 301f, the first stage display is started by the time when the operations of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be accepted. Therefore, as in a normal game, the player can perform the reel stop operation according to the first instruction effect from the timing when the operations of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be accepted, so that the performance change instruction can be performed. There is no waiting time due to the production.

On the other hand, the second period display is displayed when the time during which the stop operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is not performed exceeds a predetermined time (90 seconds) after the first period display is performed. Therefore, when the player intends to perform the reel stop operation according to the second instruction effect, he / she must wait at least 90 seconds without touching the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c after the first stage display is performed. Must be.

Here, the influence of the waiting time of 90 seconds on the time efficiency of the game will be considered. In the slot machine 1A to which the configuration of the slot machine 1 is partially applied, as described above in the description of step S108 in FIG. 55, the time-up time of the wait timer is set to 4.1 seconds, so that the fastest procedure is performed. Even if you continue playing the game, it takes 4.1 seconds to complete one game. Note that 4.1 seconds is a time-up time widely defined in a general slot machine. Based on this, when the waiting time of 90 seconds is converted into the number of games that can be played at the fastest game, it becomes 21.95 times (calculation formula: 90 / 4.1).

Based on such a calculated value, when the reel stop according to the first instruction effect is selected, the expected value of the number of additional games is higher than when the reel stop according to the second instruction effect is selected. Although the number of games is reduced by 30, it is possible to play about 22 more games at the fastest game because the waiting time of 90 seconds does not occur. For example, when the player has a schedule and the time available for playing is short, or when the closing time of the hall is approaching, it is assumed that the player wants to prioritize the digestion of the game (emphasis on time efficiency). When the performance change instruction effect appears in such a game situation, the player's wish can be met by selecting the reel stop according to the first instruction effect.

On the other hand, when the reel stop according to the second instruction effect is selected, the waiting time of at least 90 seconds is generated as compared with the case where the reel stop according to the first instruction effect is selected, but there are 30 games more. It can be expected to acquire the number of additional games. These 30 games are more than the number of games that can be played at the fastest speed (about 22 games) during the waiting time of 90 seconds. If there is time to play, it is assumed that the player wants to acquire more benefits (emphasis on the amount of benefits given), and performance change instruction production appears in such a game situation. If this is the case, the player's wishes can be met by selecting the reel stop according to the second instruction effect.

As described above, in the performance change instruction effect described above, after the first period display in which the first instruction effect is performed, the transition to the second period display in which the second instruction effect different from the first instruction effect is performed. The operation mode instructed by the second instruction effect makes it difficult for the player to identify at least a part of the operation mode instructed by the first instruction effect. Not only is the degree of expectation of the advantageous benefits that can be granted different between the case where the reel stop operation is performed according to the first instruction effect and the case where the reel stop operation is performed according to the second instruction effect, but also in either case. The degree of expectation of advantageous benefits given differs depending on whether such a symbol combination is displayed. In particular, when the reel stop operation is performed according to the first instruction effect, the advantageous privilege may not be given. Therefore, according to the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine 1) capable of executing such a performance change instruction effect, a gaming machine capable of maintaining the tension of the player even when the instruction effect is being executed is provided. Can be provided.

Although the performance change instruction effect has been described in detail with specific examples, the performance change effect according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above example, and the slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) includes various types shown below. The derived pattern of may be replaced with or combined with the above-mentioned performance change instruction effect as appropriate.

(1)
First, in the performance change instruction effect, if the additional stitches do not stop (the non-additional stitches stop) due to the reel stop in the second period, a distribution may be provided in which the number of AT games is not added. .. This will be explained in detail in the following paragraphs.

In the explanation using FIG. 125, when the additional stitches do not stop (the non-additional stitches stop) due to the reel stop in the second period, 30 without distinguishing between the additional winning time and the additional non-winning time. It is said that the number of AT games of the game will be added. This had the meaning of compensation for the fact that the instruction content of the second period display did not indicate the operation mode aimed at a specific symbol. However, in the first place, when the addition is not won, the addition of the number of AT games is not positively given, so it is the expected development that the addition does not stop, and even in such a case, the addition of the number of AT games is added. It can also be considered unfavorable to do.

Therefore, as a derivative example of changing the table in FIG. 125, when the additional stitches are not won, if the additional stitches do not stop due to the reel stop in the second period (the non-additional stitches stop), the additional number of AT games is added. You may use a table that is not done. Even when such a derivative example is adopted, it is preferable to add the number of AT games even if the additional stitches do not stop due to the reel stop in the second period at the time of the additional winning.

(2)
Further, in the performance change instruction effect, the second stage display is performed when a predetermined time (90 seconds in the above description) has elapsed without performing the reel stop operation from the first stage display, but the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine) In 1), the player may not be notified at all about the specification that "the second period display is performed with the lapse of a predetermined time". If no notification is given, no suggestion display such as "may change if you wait" is not given. By doing so, only the player who knows the specification can intentionally select the reel stop of the second period (generally speaking, in order to proceed with the game, the player usually performs the reel stop operation. It is unlikely to wait 90 seconds). That is, the slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) according to the present embodiment has a game property (compared to the reel stop in the first period) given only to the player who knows the specifications by the second reel stop. Preferential treatment) can be provided.

(3)
Further, in FIGS. 122 and 123, the first stage display (first instruction effect) and the second period display (second instruction effect) are the liquid crystal screen (main liquid crystal 5211, sub liquid crystal 5221, 5231) and the movable combination. Although it was realized by an object (moving display body 522, 523), the effect display by the performance change instruction effect may be realized by various configurations (liquid crystal screen, movable accessory, light guide plate, etc.). Further, these configurations may be appropriately combined and realized such that the movable accessory moves and the light guide plate emits light. When the symbol designation is shielded by the movement of the movable accessory, a light guide plate can be used instead of the movable accessory. When it is desired to shield the symbol designation by the light guide plate, the display of the symbol designation can be made invisible to the player by causing the light guide plate in front of the symbol designation to emit light.

(4)
Further, in the description with reference to FIGS. 122 to 124, the timing for ending the second phase display is not described, but the end timing is any stage at which the reel stop operation in the second phase is performed. be able to. When the end timing is reached, the second stage display (for example, "Aim") is turned off, and then different effects are displayed depending on whether or not the reel stop operation is the "correct operation mode". You may.

This "correct operation mode" corresponds to, for example, that a reel stop operation capable of stopping the additional stitch is performed (at the time of determination). Specifically, when the winning combination is a "7-match" combination and the 2nd period display is turned off at the time of the 1st reel stop in the 2nd period, the operation of the 1st reel stop can pull in "7 symbols". If the timing is not correct, it is determined that the operation mode is "correct" at that time. In other words, at the time when the first reel is stopped, there is still a possibility that the "7 symbols" alignment can be finally stopped, so that it is determined to be a "correct operation mode".

Then, if the "directing of different notification contents" is additionally displayed depending on whether or not such a "correct operation mode" is used, the reels of the second period are released before all reel stops are completed. It is possible to suggest to the player about the granting of advantageous benefits due to the suspension.

Specifically, in the case of the "correct operation mode", the first reel is displayed by displaying a positive meaning such as "GOOD" on the main liquid crystal display 5211 or the like after the second stage display is turned off. It is possible to notify (suggest) the player that the aim of the "7 symbols" performed at the stop was appropriate. Then, the player can obtain an additional number of AT games with a high degree of expectation by similarly aiming at the "7 symbols" for the remaining second reel stop and third reel stop.

On the other hand, if the operation mode is not "correct" (when "7 symbols" cannot be pulled in by stopping the 1st reel), any stop operation is added by the subsequent stop of the 2nd and 3rd reels. Since the eyes cannot be stopped, the main liquid crystal display 5211 etc. after turning off the second stage display is displayed with a negative meaning such as "BAD", and the game is that the aim of "7 symbols" was not appropriate. Can be notified (suggested) to a person. However, when the table of FIG. 125 is used, even if the operation mode is not "correct" as described above, an average of 30 games can be added to the non-additional stop. If the operation mode is not "correct", an effect effect such as darkening the entire effect screen may be performed.

Further, when all the reel stop operations in the second period are completed and the operation mode is not "correct", the non-additional symbol combination is displayed. In this case, the gaming state may be changed. Specifically, changing the gaming state corresponds to, for example, shifting from a high-expected RT state to a low-expected RT state in a gaming machine equipped with RT. However, it is preferable that such a change in the gaming state is not determined by lottery, but is determined in a form corresponding to the displayed non-additional symbol combination. By doing so, the transition of the RT state occurs only when a specific symbol combination is displayed among the non-additional symbol combinations, so the reel stop in the second period is the "correct operation mode". Even if it is notified in the middle of the reel stop operation that it did not occur, the player's attention can be drawn to the reel until the final symbol combination is displayed. In addition to changing the gaming state, the number of payouts may be different depending on whether the operation mode is "correct" or not.

[20-3. Another example of the effect display of the performance change instruction effect]
Another example of the effect display of the performance change instruction effect different from [20-2] will be described.

126 and 127 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining another example of the effect display of the performance change instruction effect. 126 and 127 show an example of an effect pattern different from that of FIGS. 122 to 124 regarding the effect display of the performance change instruction effect, and FIGS. 126 (A) and 127 (A) are the first. The state of the slot machine 1A in the period is shown, and FIGS. 126 (B) and 127 (B) show the state of the slot machine 1A in the second period.

The performance change instruction effect illustrated in FIGS. 126 and 127 is the same as in FIGS. 122 to 124 described in [20-2], the reel band symbol sequence (FIG. 119) and the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device. And the number of medals to be paid out (FIG. 120), and the condition device corresponding to the winning combination (FIG. 121) are used. The display timings of the first period display and the second period display are the same as those in FIGS. 122 to 124. However, as for the table showing the relationship between the display period of the instruction effect and the addition, FIG. 128, which will be described later, is used instead of FIG. 125.

The effect display exemplified in FIGS. 126 and 127 has an effect pattern different from the effect display examples of FIGS. 122 to 124 in the configuration form of the instruction effect, and specifically, the first period display to the second period display. When shifting to, the effect display is added to the area different from the area where the first instruction effect is displayed (without blocking the first instruction effect), and the second instruction effect is displayed. It is characterized by.

Of these, in FIG. 126, the first and second instruction effects are not only the fixed display body 521 (main liquid crystal display 5211) but also the movable body (specifically, the sub liquid crystal display 5221 and the moving display body of the moving display body 522). An effect pattern formed by using the sub liquid crystal display 5231) of 523 is exemplified.

In FIG. 126 (A), as the first stage display, the moving display body 522 moves from the standby position to the operating position, the character "7" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal display 5221, and "Aim!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211. By displaying the display, the player is instructed to stop mode aiming at "7 symbols". If the reel stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is not performed, the first stage display is continuously displayed for the following 90 seconds, so that the player gives the first instruction during this period. It is possible to select whether or not to perform the reel stop operation in the stop mode according to the effect. Then, when the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 126 (A), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the first stage.

When 90 seconds have elapsed without performing the reel stop operation from FIG. 126 (A), the second phase display as shown in FIG. 126 (B) is performed. In FIG. 126 (B), in the form of adding to the first stage display shown in FIG. 126 (A), the moving display body 523 that was in the standby position at the time of the first stage display moves to the operating position and is a sub liquid crystal display. The letter "V" is displayed on 5231. As a result, as the second stage display, the main liquid crystal display 5211 and the sub liquid crystal displays 5221 and 5231 are combined and displayed as "7, V, aim", so that the stop mode aiming at "7 symbols" or "V symbol" is a game. Instructed by a person (second instruction production). Then, when the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 126 (B), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the second period.

Next, FIG. 127 exemplifies an effect pattern in which the first and second instruction effects are formed only by the fixed display body 521 (main liquid crystal 5211), and at this time, the moving display body 522, 523 is displayed. Since it is not necessary, the same performance change instruction effect can be executed even in the slot machine 1 provided with the image display body 500.

In FIG. 127 (A), as the first stage display, the main liquid crystal display 5211 displays “Aim at 7!”, Instructing the player to stop mode aiming at “7 symbols”. If the reel stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is not performed, the first stage display is continuously displayed for the following 90 seconds, so that the player gives the first instruction during this period. It is possible to select whether or not to perform the reel stop operation in the stop mode according to the effect. When the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 127 (A), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the first stage.

When 90 seconds have elapsed without performing the reel stop operation from FIG. 127 (A), the second stage display as shown in FIG. 127 (B) is performed. In FIG. 127 (B), in the main liquid crystal display 5211, the character “/ V” is displayed in the display area that does not overlap with “Aim for 7!” In the first stage display shown in FIG. 127 (A). As the second stage display, "Aim for 7 / V!" Is displayed on the entire main liquid crystal display 5211, so that the player is instructed to stop mode aiming at "7 symbols" or "V symbol" (second). Instructional production). Then, when the player performs the reel stop operation from the state of FIG. 127 (B), it is determined that the reel is stopped in the second period.

Although the effect displays of FIGS. 126 and 127 have been described above, the instruction contents of the first period display (first instruction effect) and the second period display (second instruction effect) in these effect displays are described in [20. As compared with FIGS. 122 to 124 illustrated in -1], the instruction contents of the first period display are the same, but the instruction contents of the second period display are different.

Specifically, the second stage display such as FIG. 122 (B) showed only the operation mode of "aiming" something without showing a specific symbol, but FIGS. 126 (B) and 127 (). The second period display of B) has a broader instruction content than the first period display, but it is instructed to aim at a predetermined symbol (for example, "Aim at 7 / V"). Therefore, when performing the reel stop operation according to the second stage display, in the case of the effect patterns of FIGS. 122 to 124, the player may not perform the stop operation aiming at a specific symbol. In the case of the effect patterns of 126 and 127, the player can select and aim at any of the predetermined symbols (“7 symbols” or “V symbols”).

In view of the display content of the second period display different from [20-2], in the performance change instruction effect of FIGS. 126 and 127, the privilege obtained by stopping the reel of the second period (for example, AT). As for the number of additional games), as illustrated in FIG. 128, a table different from the table of FIG. 125 illustrated in [20-2] can be used.

FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display period of the instruction effect and the addition in another example of the performance change instruction effect. In the table illustrated in FIG. 128, as in the table illustrated in FIG. 125, distributions in which the number of additional games of AT differs depending on the instruction period (first period or second period) when the reel stop is performed are selected. Will be done. Since the operation mode instructed by the first instruction effect in the first period display of FIGS. 126 and 127 is the same as that in the first period display of FIGS. 122 to 124, the idea of granting benefits is also the same. .. Therefore, the number of additional games when the reels are stopped in the first period illustrated in FIG. 128 is the same as in FIG. 125. Specifically, when the additional games are displayed, an average of 30 games and non-addition games are displayed. If so, the number of games will not be added.

Then, according to FIG. 128, with respect to the reel stop in the second period, when the addition is displayed, the addition of the number of games of 80 games on average is determined. This number of additions is larger than the average of 30 games when the additions are displayed in the first period. In addition, the number of games is larger than the average of 60 games when the additional stitches are displayed in the second reel stop illustrated in FIG. 125. On the other hand, according to FIG. 128, when the additional stitch is not displayed (the non-additional stitch is displayed) in the reel stop of the second period, the additional number of games is not added. In this respect, FIG. 125 is different from the point in which the addition of the number of games of 30 games on average is determined even if the addition is not displayed.

The granting of benefits in the second period is based on the following ideas. Since the operation mode instructed in the second stage display is to aim at either "7 symbols" or "V symbol", it is compared with the operation mode instructed in the first stage display (for example, "aim at 7"). Therefore, the operation mode of the instruction content is wide. In other words, as a player, although the operation mode aiming at one specific symbol is shown in the first stage display before the transition to the second stage display, the second instruction effect is performed after the transition to the second stage display. If you try to stop the reels according to the above, you have to select either "7 symbols" or "V symbols" by yourself. As described above, when the reel bands 321d to 321f of FIG. 119 are used, the reel stop position capable of pulling in both the "7 symbols" and the "V symbol" is not provided, and the player fails to press the eye. Even if there is no such thing, it is not known whether the addition can be stopped unless the prediction of winning the "7-match" role or the "V-match" role is correct. Therefore, as a privilege for the reel stop in the second period, if the player's prediction is correct and the additional game is stopped, the number of additional games is as large as 80 games on average, which is larger than the distribution by the table in FIG. 125. I try to give. On the other hand, the case where the additional stitches could not be stopped in the second reel stop is the case where the player's expectation was not met, the case where the push was failed, or the case where one of the symbols was not aimed at in the first place. Since it is possible, as long as the second period display shows the option of the stop symbol, at this time, the number of games is not added.

As described above, in this other example of the performance change instruction effect, which of the first period and the second period the instruction period is used to perform the reel stop operation, in other words, the first instruction effect and the second period. The player is given the right to choose which of the instruction reels to select. Which of the instruction period reel stop operations should be selected is recommended according to the game situation of the player, as in the performance change instruction effect using the table of FIG. 111 exemplified in [20-2]. .. That is, when comparing the reel stop according to the first instruction effect and the reel stop according to the second instruction effect in view of their respective characteristics, the former is recommended when time efficiency is to be emphasized, and the latter is given. Recommended when you want to emphasize the amount of benefits.

Furthermore, in this other example of the performance change instruction effect, even if either the reel stop of the first period or the reel stop of the second period is selected, the additional stitch is not displayed if the push is failed. It depends more on the skill of the player than the example of [20-2] in that the privilege of adding the number of games cannot be obtained. Also, in the second reel stop, which is recommended when the amount of benefits is important, as long as the prediction is correct (when there is no failure in pushing), it can be expected to add a large number of games, so it is a so-called wave. Can realize rough specifications. Therefore, according to this alternative performance change instruction effect, it is possible to realize a gaming machine having a large degree of technical intervention (strong technical intervention).

As described above, in the performance change instruction effect of the other example described above, the advantageous privilege that can be given when the reel stop operation is performed according to the first instruction effect and when the reel stop operation is performed according to the second instruction effect. Not only the degree of expectation is different, but also the degree of expectation of the advantageous privilege given depends on what kind of symbol combination is displayed in either case, and the advantageous privilege is not given when the non-addition is displayed. Therefore, according to the slot machine 1A (or the slot machine 1) capable of executing such a performance change instruction effect, a gaming machine capable of maintaining the tension of the player even when the instruction effect is being executed is provided. Can be provided.

As for the performance change instruction effect of another example described above, the derivative patterns exemplified in [20-2] can be appropriately replaced or combined, thereby obtaining the effect as described in [20-2]. However, the description is omitted to avoid duplication.

Further, comparing the performance change instruction effect described in [20-2] (referred to as "first example" only in this paragraph) and the performance change instruction effect explained in this chapter (referred to as "second example"). As an effect pattern on the effect screen, in the first example, "when shifting to the first period display or the second period display, the second instruction effect is displayed while blocking a part or the whole of the first instruction effect. The effect pattern of "being done" is explained (FIGS. 122 to 124), and in the second example, "when shifting from the first period display to the second period display (without blocking the first instruction effect). ) An effect pattern is described in which an effect display is added to an area different from the area where the first instruction effect is displayed and the second instruction effect is displayed ”(FIGS. 126 to 127). In addition, regarding the distribution and degree of benefits that can be given by the performance change instruction effect, in the first example, "Even if the additional stitches do not stop in the second reel stop (even if the non-additional stitches stop). The pattern of "giving a privilege" is explained (Fig. 125), and in the second example, "a privilege is not given when the additional stitches do not stop (the non-additional stitches stop) in the reel stop of the second period". The pattern was described (FIG. 128). Since these effect patterns and grant benefits are merely examples of the performance change instruction effect according to the present embodiment, these combinations may be exchanged between the first example and the second example. In any case, according to the slot machine 1A (or slot machine 1) capable of executing the performance change instruction effect according to the present embodiment, the player's tension is maintained even when the instruction effect is being executed. It is possible to provide a possible gaming machine.

In addition, in any of the above-mentioned performance change instruction effects, the transition from the first phase to the second phase is performed, and when one reel stop button 211 is operated in the second phase, the transition is made to the first phase again. May be. Further, in this case, as in the case of the transition from the first phase to the second phase, the transition from the first phase to the second phase may be performed again after a predetermined time (for example, 90 seconds) has elapsed. In such a case, it is advisable to execute the production corresponding to the first period or the second period.

[21. Catching production]
This chapter describes an example of a characteristic effect that can be executed in the slot machine 1A according to the present invention. The series of productions described in this chapter is tentatively referred to as "catching production".

The catching effect is an effect that is started before the reel is stopped in a game in which the advantageous state may end when the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a chance zone or a higher AT (specialized zone)). Therefore, it is an effect of notifying the player whether or not the advantageous state ends depending on the stopping mode of the reel. Then, the catching effect according to the present embodiment makes it possible to delay the notification timing of the end of the advantageous state depending on the operation mode of the player.

Hereinafter, an example of a catching effect that can be executed by the slot machine 1A will be described. In this example, the slot machine 1A assumes that the catching effect is executed while controlling the chance zone, and the symbol strings of the reel bands 321d to 321f (reels 301d to 301f) exemplified in FIG. 119 are used.

When the catching effect is executed, the shutter accessory 524 having the lens component 5241 operates (see FIGS. 107 and 108). The operation of the shutter accessory 524 is performed while the reels 301d to 301f are rotating (may be the timing when the starting lever 210 is operated to draw the winning combination), and at this time, a part of the symbol display window 401 (specifically). In the upper half of the upper line and the middle line except the upper part of the middle reel), it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the design. Therefore, in this example, the effective line of the slot machine 1A is the lower 1 line.

First, the outline of the catching effect will be described. In the slot machine 1A, since the gaming state is controlled by the main board 409 (CPU 1110), the main board 409 also determines the control of the chance zone and its termination.

The end condition of the chance zone is, for example, a part of the case where a predetermined winning combination is selected in the winning combination lottery. In this example, it is assumed that the end condition of the chance zone is satisfied when a part of the replay role (hereinafter referred to as a fall replay role) is won during the chance zone. Then, when the main board 409 decides to end the chance zone, the effect control board 510 (CPU1118, VDP1124) executes a catching effect that becomes a "failure result" based on the decision, and ends the chance zone. Notify.

In the catching effect of this example, in addition to the "failure result" at which the chance zone ends, a "success result" at which the chance zone does not end is also prepared as the effect result. In the case of "success result", it is notified that the chance zone does not end (continue) and a predetermined duration is added (addition or extension of the predetermined duration). Therefore, if the additional condition for the duration of the chance zone is satisfied during the control of the chance zone, the effect control board 510 (CPU1118, VDP1124) executes the catching effect that becomes the "success result", and the chance zone is controlled. Notify the continuation (addition of continuation period). In this example, it is assumed that the additional condition of the duration of the chance zone is satisfied when a part of the replay combination different from the fall replay combination (hereinafter referred to as the continuous replay combination) is won during the chance zone.

FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining an effect display of a catching effect. FIG. 129 (A) shows the state of the slot machine 1A at the start of the game in which the catching effect is performed. At the stage of FIG. 129 (A), the shutter accessory 524 is in the standby position. It is assumed that the game is controlled to a predetermined challenge zone up to the previous game, and as a result of the start operation by the start lever 201 and the winning combination lottery being performed in this game, the fall replay combination or the continuous replay combination is won.

FIG. 129 (B) shows the state of the slot machine 1A immediately after the reels 301d to 301f rotate. As shown in FIG. 129 (B), after the operation of the start lever 201 and before the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be operated, the shutter accessory 524 descends to the operating position together with the lens component 5241. Shield the entire upper line and approximately the upper half of the middle line. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 108 for the shutter accessory 524, the lens component 5241 is located at the position of the upper line of the middle reel 301e, so that the position (upper middle reel) is enlarged and the player It is visible from. Further, in FIG. 129 (B), the character "Stop V" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 together with two arrows, so that the player is instructed to stop the V symbol on the upper stage of the middle reel.

Here, in the slot machine 1A, when such a catching effect is started, no matter which reel the player performs the stop operation, the disadvantage due to the pushing order is not applied. Further, the display of "Stop V" shown in FIG. 129 (B) is continuously displayed until the stop operation for the reel stop button 211b corresponding to the reel 301e is performed. Therefore, the player may first perform a reel stop operation aiming at the "V symbol" on the reel stop button 211b to stop the reel 301e, or the other reel stop buttons 211a, 211c. The reel stop operation is performed to stop the other reels 301d and 301f, and finally, the reel stop operation aiming at the "V symbol" at the upper stage is performed on the reel stop button 211b to stop the reel 301e. May be. FIGS. 129 (C) and 129 (E) illustrate the case where the reel 301e is stopped for the first time.

FIG. 129 (C) shows a case where the “V symbol” (SEQ ID NO: 3 in FIG. 119) is stopped in the upper middle reel of the symbol display window 401 as a result of performing the reel stop operation for the reel stop button 211b, that is, The state of the slot machine 1A when the catching effect is successful is shown. Such suspension of the "V symbol" can appear when the winning combination in the above-mentioned winning combination lottery is a "continuous replay combination". At this time, the "V symbol" is enlarged and displayed through the lens component 5241 located on the upper stage of the middle reel, and the characters "success!" Are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211. The display of "success!" On the main liquid crystal display 5211 does not necessarily have to be performed at the same time as the stop timing of the reel 301e, and may be displayed, for example, at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211b. .. Also, at this time, a special sound effect may be used to celebrate the success result.

Then, FIG. 129 (D) shows the state of the slot machine 1A after the remaining rotating reels 301d and 301f are stopped, following FIG. 129 (C). In FIG. 129 (D), the display of "+ 5G!" On the main liquid crystal display 5211 informs that the chance zone (CZ) currently being controlled will be continued for at least 5 games in the future. After that, the shutter accessory 524 (and the lens member 5241) that was in the operating position returns to the standby position at any timing before the BET operation for the next game is performed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 129 (E), as a result of performing the reel stop operation on the reel stop button 211b, the “replay symbol” (arrangement number 5 in FIG. 119) is displayed on the upper middle reel of the symbol display window 401 instead of the “V symbol”. ) Stops, that is, the state of the slot machine 1A when the catching effect fails. Such a symbol suspension appears when the winning combination in the above-mentioned winning combination lottery is a "falling replay combination". At this time, the "replay symbol" is enlarged and displayed through the lens component 5241 located on the upper stage of the middle reel, and the characters "failure!" Are displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211. The display of "Failure!" On the main liquid crystal display 5211 does not necessarily have to be performed at the same time as the stop timing of the reel 301e, and may be displayed, for example, at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211b. .. Further, at this time, a special effect such as dimming the brightness of the entire screen of the main liquid crystal display 5211 may be added.

Then, FIG. 129 (F) shows the state of the slot machine 1A after the remaining rotating reels 301d and 301f are stopped, following FIG. 129 (E). In FIG. 129 (F), the display of "CZ end" is displayed on the main liquid crystal display 5211 to notify that the chance zone (CZ) currently being controlled is terminated. After that, the shutter accessory 524 (and the lens member 5241) that was in the operating position returns to the standby position at any timing before the BET operation for the next game is performed.

It should be noted that the display of "+ 5G!" In FIG. 129 (D) and the display of "CZ end" in FIG. 129 (F) are displayed after all reels 301d to 301f are stopped. It may be displayed at the time when the middle reel 301e of FIG. 129 (C) and FIG. 129 (E) is stopped.

As described above, in the catching effect illustrated in FIGS. 129 (A) to 129 (F), is the current advantageous state (for example, chance zone) terminated when the player has stopped the reels 301d to 301f? Whether or not it is taught, but since the teaching (success or failure) is not performed until the reel 301e is stopped, the stop operation of the reel 301e is performed after the stop operation of the other reels 301d and 301f. When the reel stop operation is performed in such a specific mode, the timing of teaching can be delayed.

That is, for the player, whether or not the advantageous state currently being controlled ends is a big concern, but according to the catching effect, if it is decided that the advantageous state ends, the result cannot be changed, but the teaching timing. Can be matched to the player's wishes. Specifically, for example, a player who wants to know the result first may stop the reel 301e first, and also wants to have hope until the end. The player who thinks that the reel 301e may be stopped at the end. By making such a catching effect feasible, the slot machine 1A can provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest of the player due to the end of the advantageous state.

Further, the design stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel due to the catching effect is enlarged and displayed by being photographed through the lens component 5241 of the shutter accessory 524. Therefore, in the case of a successful result, the "V symbol" is large and can be visually recognized by the player, and the achievement of the effect can be strongly visually appealed. In addition, by enlarging the upper stage of the target middle reel, the player who intends to perform the reel stop operation of the middle reel 301e can feel that the target "V symbol" can be easily stopped. .. Further, in other words, when the advantageous state is continued (success result), the target symbol (V symbol) is displayed in a large size, while the advantageous state ends. When this is done (failure result), the target symbol (V symbol) is made to appear small (it is shown in its original size because it is not located in the enlarged region of the lens component 5241).

The catching effect according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above example, and the slot machine 1A may appropriately replace or combine various derivative patterns as shown below with the above catching effect. good.

(1)
For example, the shutter accessory 524 in the above example, except for the upper stage of the reel 301e (middle reel 301e), makes the symbols stopped on the upper line and the middle stage line invisible or difficult to see, but the slot. The machine 1A can perform a catching effect that can further enhance the entertainment of the game by changing the form of the shutter accessory 524 to partially eliminate the invisible or difficult-to-see position.

Specifically, for example, by forming the portion of the shutter accessory 524 that overlaps the left and right reels 301d and 301f with a transparent material, even if the shutter accessory 524 is lowered to the operating position during the catching effect, the symbol display window 401 It is conceivable that the symbols displayed on the upper line and the middle line of the left and right reels 301d and 301f (left reel 301d, right reel 301f) can be visually recognized or inferred from the player. The transparent portion may be limited to a part.

In the example of FIG. 129, no matter what kind of symbol stops at the place shielded by the shutter accessory 524, the player is not so affected, but such a transparent shutter accessory 524 is used. When used, it can be expected to change the game entertainment by the stop type of the design.

FIGS. 130 to 133 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 4) for explaining an example of a stop type of a symbol which is effective when the left and right reels can be visually recognized. Each figure shows an example of a stop type of a symbol which can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 by a reel stop operation after the effect as illustrated in FIG. 129 (B) is displayed in the catching effect. The arrows in the figure mean that the corresponding reel is spinning. The numbers in parentheses at the lower right of each symbol mean the sequence numbers shown in the symbol sequence of FIG. 119. Then, in FIGS. 130 to 133, as a stop mode in which the illustrated stop type is more effective, a case where the left and right reels 301d and 301f are stopped first and the middle reel 301e is stopped last will be described.

First, FIG. 130 is an example of a stop pattern in which it is difficult to predict whether or not the catching effect will be successful until the stop operation aiming at the "V symbol" is performed on the middle reel 301d. FIG. 130 (A) shows a state in which the left reel 301d and the right reel 301f are stopped, but the so-called tempai state is not formed in any of the two reels in the stopped form. It is difficult to predict what will stop on the middle reel 301e. Therefore, when the stop type as shown in FIG. 130 (A) is shown, the player will challenge the stop operation of the middle reel 301e without prejudice, and the effect of enhancing the game interest can be expected.

Then, when the winning combination is a continuous replay combination, the reel stop button 211b is stopped at a timing when the "V symbol" can be pulled into the upper stage, so that the middle is shown in FIG. 130 (B). "V symbol" is displayed on the upper part of the reel, and the success result is taught. At this time, in the lower line, which is a valid line, the pattern alignment of "BAR (11) -cherry (1) -replay (8)" (the number in parentheses is the sequence number) is stopped, but this is a continuous replay. It is one of the symbol combinations of the conditional devices that are established when the winning combination is won. In particular, when the "cherry symbol" of sequence number 1 is stopped in the lower row of the middle reel, the "V symbol" of sequence number 3 is displayed in the upper row of the middle reel.

Further, when the winning combination is a fall replay combination, the "V symbol" does not stop at the upper stage of the middle reel regardless of the timing at which the reel stop button 211b is stopped, for example, FIG. 130 ( As shown in C), the "replay symbol" is displayed and the failure result is taught. At this time, in the lower line, which is an effective line, the pattern alignment of "BAR (11) -V (3) -replay (8)" is stopped, but this is a condition device that is established when the fall replay combination is won. It is one of the symbol combinations.

Next, FIG. 131 is an example of a stop pattern that can give the player an impression that the success result cannot be expected so much even before the stop operation aiming at the "V symbol" is performed on the middle reel 301d. Looking at the stopped types of the left reel 301d and the right reel 301f exemplified in FIG. 131 (A), although the "V symbol" is stopped in each of them, the tempai state is not formed. Generally, in the case of such a stop type, the player does not have the same "V symbol" even if the middle reel 301e is stopped, so that it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the stop of the "V symbol". Therefore, when the stop type as shown in FIG. 131 (A) is shown, the player will challenge the stop operation of the middle reel 301e without much expectation.

However, even in such a case, if the winning combination is a continuous replay combination, the "V symbol" may be displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel as shown in FIG. 131 (B), so that the player who is about to give up. May be surprised and satisfied by the teaching of "success results". At this time, the lower line, which is the effective line, has stopped the matching of the symbols of "Bell 1 (15) -Cherry (1) -Bell 2 (0)", but this is a condition that is established when the continuous replay combination is won. It is one of the design combinations of the device.

Further, when the winning combination is a fall replay combination, the "V symbol" is not displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel as illustrated in FIG. 131 (C), and the failure result is taught. At this time, the lower line, which is the effective line, has stopped the matching of the symbols of "Bell 1 (15) -V (3) -Bell 2 (0)", but this is a condition that is established when the fall replay combination is won. It is one of the design combinations of the device.

Next, FIG. 132 is an example of a stop pattern in which the player can strongly expect a successful result even before the stop operation aiming at the “V symbol” is performed on the middle reel 301d. Looking at the stopped types of the left reel 301d and the right reel 301f exemplified in FIG. 132 (A), the "V symbol" is stopped at the upper stage to form a tempai state. In the case of such a stop type, the player has a strong image that the "V symbol" is stopped and lined up in a straight line even on the upper stage of the middle reel, so that the player can strongly expect the success result.

Then, as a result of performing the stop operation of the middle reel 301e from the stop type of FIG. 132 (A), if the winning combination is a continuous replay combination, the timing is such that the "V symbol" can be pulled into the upper stage. As shown in FIG. 132 (B), a "V symbol" is displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel, and the success result is taught. At this time, in the lower line, which is an effective line, the pattern alignment of "watermelon (14) -cherry (1) -bell 2 (0)" is stopped, but this is a conditional device that is established when the continuous replay combination is won. It is one of the symbol combinations of.

Further, when the winning combination is a fall replay combination, the "V symbol" is not displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel as illustrated in FIG. 133 (C), and the failure result is taught. At this time, in the lower line, which is an effective line, the pattern alignment of "watermelon (14) -V (3) -bell 2 (0)" is stopped, but this is a conditional device that is established when the fall replay combination is won. It is one of the symbol combinations of.

Finally, FIG. 133 is an example of a stop pattern in which it is determined that a success result will not be obtained even before the stop operation aiming at the “V symbol” is performed on the middle reel 301d. Looking at the stop types of the left reel 301d and the right reel 301f exemplified in FIG. 133 (A), the "7 symbols" of the sequence number 6 are stopped on the upper stage of the left reel. At this time, the "replay symbol" of sequence number 4 stops at the lower stage of the left reel constituting the effective line. Even when the "7 symbol" of the sequence number 3 is stopped on the upper stage of the left reel, the stopped symbol on the lower stage of the left reel is a "replay symbol".

Here, as a design example, in the slot machine 1A, when "7 symbols" are stopped on the upper stage of the left reel, a symbol combination corresponding to the continuous replay combination is on the effective line regardless of the stopped symbols of other reels. Make it impossible to stop at. Specifically, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the continuous replay combination may be set so that the left reel does not have a "replay symbol". Furthermore, among the symbol combinations corresponding to the fall replay combination, the one having the "replay symbol" on the left reel is set.

By doing so, it is possible to confirm that the failure result is notified by the catching effect when the "7 symbols" are stopped on the upper stage of the left reel. However, from the viewpoint of maintaining the interest of the game, it is preferable not to notify the player of such a specification. For example, a control for notifying the main liquid crystal display 5211 of the failure result when the left reel 301d stops at the above position is performed. Not performed.

Looking at the specific stop type, when "7 symbols" ("replay symbol" in the lower part of the left reel) stops in the upper part of the left reel in the stop type of FIG. 133 (A), the continuous replay role is won. There is no possibility. Therefore, no matter how the stop operation of the middle reel 301e is performed, the "V symbol" is not displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel as shown in FIG. 133 (B), as shown in FIG. 133 (C). Is always displayed except for "V symbol", and the failure result is notified. At this time, in the lower line, which is an effective line, the pattern alignment of "Replay (4) -V (3) -Bell 2 (0)" is stopped, but this is a conditional device that is established when the fall replay combination is won. It is one of the symbol combinations of. In this way, if the "7 symbols" stop in the upper row of the left reel 301d, the failure is confirmed by the catching effect, but from another point of view, the reel stop operation aimed at the "7 symbols" in the upper row was performed. However, if "7 symbols" does not stop in the upper row, in a sense, it will be a game of intense heat that can be expected to be a successful result, so when a predetermined symbol stops, the advantageous state is always terminated. It can be said that the specifications are also specifications that improve the interest.

As described above, the slot machine 1A changes the form of the shutter accessory 524 having a transparent portion, and prepares a condition device corresponding to a predetermined symbol combination as described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 133. By setting this, in the catching effect, the stop type of the other reels (left reel 301d, right reel 301f) is performed before the stop operation of the middle reel 301e, which is notified whether or not the advantageous state ends, is performed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player various expectations for the result of the end of the advantageous state. Such a catching effect has the effect of further enhancing the entertainment of the game.

In addition, although it is also shown in the stop type of each of the above figures, in the catching effect, from the viewpoint of preventing misidentification of the player, the symbol stop mode displayed on the symbol display window 401 after all reels are stopped has another role. It is preferable not to stop the pattern alignment that reminds us of the winning. For example, when a catching effect occurs, it is possible that the player has won the continuous replay role or the fall replay role, but if the watermelon pattern alignment etc. stops in such a game, the player misidentifies the winning role. There is a risk of causing it. Therefore, for the same reason, it is not preferable that the "cherry pattern" is displayed on the left reel in the catching effect. However, the fact that the "V symbols" are displayed in a straight line as shown in FIG. 132 (B) does not mislead the winning of other roles, but is a catching effect of aiming for the "V symbol". Since it is a one-stop mode that is close to each other, it is excluded from the above restrictions.

(2)
Further, in the above example described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 133, in order to stop the "V symbol" on the upper stage of the middle reel and obtain a successful result, the winning combination is a continuous replay combination. It is necessary to perform the reel stop operation of the middle reel 301e (stop operation for the reel stop button 211b) at an appropriate timing in which the "V symbol" can be pulled in to the upper stage. However, depending on the skill of the player, it is possible that the reel stop operation at an appropriate timing may fail. At the time of this failure, even if the winning combination is a continuous replay combination, the "V symbol" is not stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel, but in such a case, the success result of "avoid end of chance zone (continuation)" cannot be obtained. It is terrible for the player to do. Therefore, in the slot machine 1A, even if the "V symbol" cannot be stopped at the upper stage of the middle reel in the catching effect, if the continuous replay role is won, the chance zone is internally continued. May be good. Further, at this time, the effect display by the main liquid crystal display 5211 or the like may be displayed as "failure?" And then revived to display "continuation". In addition, a display such as "continuation" may be suddenly displayed without going through the effect of "failure?".

(3)
Further, in the catching effect according to the present embodiment, the player is notified whether or not the advantageous state ends depending on the reel stop mode (for example, whether the "V symbol" is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel). It is possible not to teach the player in advance about the development at the time of the failure result that the advantageous state ends when the above stop mode is not obtained. That is, it is not taught to the player that the catching effect is a negative effect regarding the end instruction of the advantageous state, but rather it is made to appear as a chance effect that can be expected to develop in some advantageous state by stopping the "V symbol". You may. By adopting such an effect mode, it can be expected to have an effect of not discouraging the player when a catching effect occurs.

(4)
Further, in the specific example of the catching effect described with reference to FIG. 129, when the "V symbol" is displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel and a successful result is obtained, the privilege that the chance zone is continued for 5 games is given. However, the benefits at the time of successful catching production are not limited to this, and advantageous benefits higher than the current gaming state (here, chance zone), such as granting AT or ART, should be granted. You may. By doing so, the catching effect is not limited to a negative effect in which the advantageous state (chance zone) may end, but on the contrary, if it succeeds, it can be moved to a higher advantageous state. be able to.

(5)
In addition, the winning combination that can generate the catching effect is not limited to the replay role (continuous replay role, fall replay role) as shown in the above specific example, and occurs when the other winning combination is elected. You may try to do it. However, even in such a case, it is preferable that the winning combination is different from the rare role or the bonus role (so-called low expectation role, specifically, the push order bell role, etc.). When the same symbol combination (similar symbols such as bell 1 and bell 2 are also within the same range) is not displayed on the effective line in the symbol display window 401 or on the straight line that is not on the effective line. In addition, it is desirable that the catching effect fails. Further, since the condition device is not a replay, the shutter accessory 524 may be moved to the standby position at the time of the next bet operation (for example, when the MAX input button 206 is pressed).

(6)
Further, when the advantageous state ends as a result of failure due to the catching effect, the main board 409 may control the gaming state after the end so as to return to the gaming state before the transition to the advantageous state. Specifically, for example, when the normal gaming state shifts to the chance zone, and a catching effect occurs there and the result is a failure, the normal gaming state is controlled thereafter. Further, the destination of the transition of the gaming state after the end may be determined by lottery.

In the catching effect of this example described above, it has been described that the slot machine 1A provided with the shutter accessory 524 is executed. However, in executing the catching effect according to the present embodiment, the shutter accessory 524 is used. Although it enhances the effect of the effect, it is not an essential configuration. Alternatively, for example, the moving display bodies 522, 523 may be moved to hide the upper and middle lines of the left and right reels, or a part of the symbol display window 401 may be appropriately used by using the light emission display by the light guide plate. May be made difficult to see. Further, for example, the catching effect may be executed without any shielding (in this case, the progress of the effect is preferably instructed entirely by the main liquid crystal 5211). In such a case, the slot machine 1 However, it is possible to perform a catching effect. Further, the above-mentioned catching effect has been described in the case where a predetermined symbol is stopped on the middle reel 301e, but the catching effect according to the present embodiment is not limited to this, and the lens component 5241 corresponds to the left reel 301d or the right reel 301f. It may be arranged at a position and the catching effect may be executed by the left reel 301d or the right reel 301f. In addition, the lens component 5241 itself is configured to be movable to the left and right, and after moving the shutter accessory 524 to the operating position, the lens component 5241 is moved to the left and right to determine which reel is used for the catching effect. May be good.

The above is one form of the slot machines 1, 1A of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, for example, a pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

1,1A Slot machine 10 Gap 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex surface 102b Guard 103 Top plate 104a Heat dissipation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Stepped part 107 Mounting piece 108 Mounting piece 109 Opening 110 Medal discharge device 110a Device body 110b Hopper 110c Discharge port 110d Overflow gutter 110e Payout sensor 111 Auxiliary storage box for game medals 111a Medal full tank sensor 112 Power supply device 112a Device case 112b Top plate 112c Back plate 112d Front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Ventilation hole 112h Leg 112i Ventilation space 112j Step 112k Mounting piece 112m Protrusion 112m-1 Projection 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Board 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Fixture 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent 200 Door type front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation unit 203 Medal insertion port 205 1 piece insertion button 206 MAX insertion button 206A Directional button 207 Medal selector 207a Solton 207b Input sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a, 211d Left reel stop button 211b, 211e Middle reel stop button 211c, 211f Right reel stop button 212 Medal gutter 213 Return gutter 214 See-through window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Luminous body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Recessed groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a, 301d Left reel 301b, 301e Middle reel 301c, 301f Right reel 302 Device case 303 Drive means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 30 5 Top plate 306 Right plate 307 Left plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper diagonal plate 310 Lower diagonal plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Retaining part 316 Handle 321a to 321c, 321d to 321f Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Design display window 402 Reinforcing rail 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear surface plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcing member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step part 413 Tapered part 414 Wheel 415 Hook part 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hing metal fittings 420a Fixing member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Shaft support piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420h Overlapping area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle opening 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 229 Holder main body 429a Receiving cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Mounting piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Top window part 444 Reinforcing band 449 Main board 500 Image display body 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Lighting device 503 Board 505 Translucent lid plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving part 509 Engaging part 510 Directional control board 512 Speaker 521 Fixed display body 5211 Main liquid crystal 522, 523 Moving display body 5221, 5231 Sub liquid crystal 524 Shutter accessory 5241 Lens part 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Lamp 614 Lamp 623a Right-down line 623b Right-up line 700 Note connector 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stop shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O Interface 1130 I / O Interface 1200 Hall Computer

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of repeatedly executing a game that executes a lottery regarding a winning combination and displays a game result based on the result of the lottery.
Multiple rotatable reels with multiple symbols attached to each,
A plurality of stop operation means capable of accepting a stop operation for stopping each of the plurality of rotating reels, and
A production execution means that executes the production as the game progresses,
When a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operation means and the plurality of reels are stopped, and as a result, a specific symbol combination is indicated by the symbols attached to the stopped reels, the game is played as a privilege to the player. Benefit granting means to grant the medium and
There are at least a normal gaming state, a high-advantageous gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal gaming state, and a low-advantageous gaming state with a higher degree of advantage than the normal gaming state but a lower degree of advantage than the high-advantageous gaming state. A game state control means that controls to one of the game states,
Equipped with
When the game state control means is controlled to the low advantageous gaming state, it is possible to perform another privilege granting lottery as to whether or not to grant another privilege advantageous to a player different from the privilege.
When the game state control means is controlled to the low advantageous gaming state and the result of granting the different privilege is obtained a predetermined number of times by the special privilege granting lottery, the low advantageous gaming state is terminated. Later, it is controlled to the above-mentioned highly advantageous gaming state.
It is possible to execute an effect according to the number of times that the result of granting the separate privilege is obtained by the separate privilege grant lottery.
It is made visible that the result of granting the other privilege is obtained by the special privilege granting lottery.
In a game in which the special privilege granting lottery is performed when the game state control means is controlled to the low advantageous gaming state, the degree of expectation that the result of granting the different privilege is obtained depending on the result of the lottery regarding the winning combination is Different,
It has a preferential lottery means for performing a lottery regarding the degree to which the result of granting the extra privilege is obtained in the extra privilege grant lottery performed in the low advantageous gaming state when the special condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state.
Information on the result of the lottery by the preferential lottery means can be retained.
Regarding the information on the result of the lottery by the preferential lottery means that can be held in the normal gaming state, it is possible that the information on the result of the lottery is not held when the low advantageous gaming state is terminated by the game state control means. do
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images